catalog.pdf - LAMCO Slings & Rigging, Inc

L0108

4960 41st Street Court, Moline, IL 61265(309) 764-7400 - (800) 447-1885 - Fax: (309) 764-1105

Manufactured by LAMCO - Same Day Emergency Service

LAMCO Slings & Rigging, Inc.

Synthetic Slings

Alloy Chain Slings

Wire Rope Slings & Assemblies

Visit our website at www.lamcoinc.com

I

Customer Satisfaction Is Our Goal!Our #1 Goal at LAMCO is customer satisfaction. If for any reason you are notsatisfied with the service you receive, please feel free to contact any of the indi-viduals listed below. Our local telephone number is (309) 764-7400 and our tollfree number is (800) 447-1885.

LAMCO Customer Satisfaction

VP Marketing & FinanceVP Operations

Manager - Metal Fabrication

Theodore (Ted) King (ext. 204)

Charles (Chuck) Lambrecht (ext. 201)

Robert (Bob) Pegg (ext. 205)

Contact Your Outside Sales Representative for On-Site HelpWith Lifting & Material Handling Solutions.

Your Outside Sales Representative Is:

As a reminder, all of the items that we manufacture and distribute are not listedin this catalog. Please contact your Outside Sales Representative, listed below,or our Customer Service department for ordering assistance or to answer anyproduct questions you may have.

II

LAMCOSame Day Emergency Service Since 1971

For ergonomically designed lifting solutions ranging from nylon slings to manipulators andvacuum lifters as well as complete overhead crane systems...LAMCO is the only name youneed to know.

At LAMCO we can design and fabricate standard and single use ergonomic lifting devices tomeet your specific needs. Our manufacturing capabilities allow us to offer Same DayEmergency Service for slings with capacities up to 65 Tons (130,000 lbs.). All slings and lift-ing devices are made to OSHA and ASME/ANSI standards. We also represent over 75 man-ufacturers of lifting products to supply you with the best lifting solutions for a safe and efficientworkplace.

Our manufacturing and service capabilities include, but are not limited to:

SYNTHETIC - ALLOY CHAIN - WIRE MESH SLINGS•Slings designed and manufactured to your specific length and pad requirements•Webbing replacement and repairs made to slings•Certified testing equipment with Test Certificates for proof testing to 150,000 lbs.

METAL FABRICATION•Complete design and fabrication of single use ergonomic lifting devices

WIRE ROPE ASSEMBLIES AND WIRE ROPE SLINGS•Wire rope slings and multi-leg bridles with Flemish Eyes for extra safety•Wire rope assemblies for hoists and cranes•Wire rope cut to specified lengths at No Additional Charge

OVERHEAD HOISTS AND CRANE SYSTEMS•Chain and wire rope hoists - Air, Electric and Hand•Complete crane systems and installation - ceiling mounted or free standing

HOIST REPAIR•Factory Trained Technicians - Certified Testing Equipment•Air, Electric and Hand hoists

“FLOOR TO RAFTER” OVERHEAD LIFTING INSPECTIONS•Slings & Rigging Hardware •Overhead Cranes & Hoists•Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices

TRAINING AND INFORMATION SERVICES•Sling use & inspection training seminars at our facilities or at your location•LAMCO Wall Charts and Rigger’s Cards

LAMCO Full Service Lifting Center

III

About the SeminarsLAMCO offers training seminars for your employees on the prop-er Care, Use and Inspection of Slings and Hoists. Seminarscan be tailored to your needs from one hour to full-day sessions.

Full-day seminars are offered 4 times a year at our Moline loca-tion. Topics covered include Principles of Lifting, Sling and HoistInspection and Proper Sling and Hoist use. In addition to class-room instruction, attendees will participate in hands-on inspectionof slings and tour our manufacturing facility. A certificate will be issued upon completionof the class.

LAMCO also offers training seminars in 1-4 hour durations that can be used for in-plantsafety training.

Who should attend?All individuals with responsibility for using/inspecting slings.This includes laborers, steel erection workers, sheet metalworkers, equipment operators, foreman, job superintendents,electricians and other specialty crafts.

Why attend?Rigging and material handling failures are among theleading causes of injury and death at construction sitesand manufacturing operations. The vast majority of theseaccidents can be attributed to operator error and notequipment failure. Failures can be prevented by respon-sible and trained personnel who know and understand thelimitations of rigging and the proper use of equipment andload charts.

When?A seminar and fee schedule is available and can be sent to you by calling (800) 447-1885 or (309) 764-7400.

CALL NOW!EMPLOYEE SAFETY IS NOT SOMETHING TO POSTPONE.

• ON SITE SLING INSPECTIONS, PERFORMEDBY LAMCO, ARE ALSO AVAILABLE •

LAMCO Sling & Hoist Training Seminars

IV

This space is made available to simplify the ordering of items that you order on a repetitivebasis.

Item Number Description Special Remarks

LAMCO Frequently Ordered Items

V

LAMCO TABLE OF CONTENTS

Synthetic Slings & Attachments

Care, Use & Inspection of Synthetic Slings ................... pg. 2Synthetic Sling Capacity Charts .................................... pg. 7Wear Pads ..................................................................... pg. 18Synthetic Sling Hardware .............................................. pg. 19Roundslings ................................................................... pg. 24

Wire Rope Slings / Wire Rope /Attachments

Care, Use & Inspection of Wire Rope Slings ................. pg. 29Wire Rope Sling Capacity Charts .................................. pg. 33Care, Use & Inspection of Crane Ropes ....................... pg. 37Wire Rope Capacity Charts & Specialty Ropes ............. pg. 40Wire Rope Hardware, Crane Blocks, Sheaves ............. pg. 45

Alloy Chain Slings & Attachments

Care, Use & Inspection of Grade 80 Alloy Chain Slings pg. 72Grade 80 Alloy Chain & Attachments .......................... pg. 74Grade 100 Alloy Chain & Attachments ........................ pg. 86Grade 120 Alloy Chain & Attachments ........................ pg. 97Specialty Chain, Chain/Wire Mesh Slings ..................... pg. 98

Custom Lifting Devices

Lift & Spreader Beams ................................................... pg. 104Wire Fabricated Hooks .................................................. pg. 106Coil Handling Equipment ............................................... pg. 110Sheet Handling Equipment ............................................ pg. 115

Ergonomic / Work Cell Equipment

Manipulators .................................................................. pg. 117Lift Tables ....................................................................... pg. 119Specialty Balancers & Hoists ......................................... pg. 120Workstation Jibs & Cranes ............................................. pg. 128

Hoists & Accessories

CM Manual, Lever, Electric & Air Hoists ........................ pg. 138CM Manual & Powered Trolleys .................................... pg. 168Harrington Manual, Lever, Electric & Air Hoists ............. pg. 174High Capacity Air & Wire Rope Hoists ........................... pg. 185Hoist Hooks and Latch Kits ........................................... pg. 187

VI

Rigging Hardware

Swivel Hoist Rings & Eye Bolts ...................................... pg. 228Turnbuckles ................................................................... pg. 234Shackles - Carbon, Alloy, Wide Body, Long Reach ...... pg. 240

Lifting & Beam Clamps

Plate Clamps .................................................................. pg. 249Beam Clamps ................................................................ pg. 256

Vacuum & Magnet Lifters

Permanent Lever Actuated Magnets ............................. pg. 259Powered Lift Magnets .................................................... pg. 263Vacuum Lifters ............................................................... pg. 266

Fall Restraint / Cargo Restraint / Fiber Rope

Index

Overhead Cranes / Jibs / Winches

UESCO & Harrington Crane Systems ........................... pg. 197Spanco Jib Cranes ........................................................ pg. 200Spanco Gantry Cranes .................................................. pg. 206Electrification, Remote Controls, & Crane Scales .......... pg. 216Hand & Power WInches ................................................ pg. 223

LLAAMMCCOO TTAABBLLEE OOFF CCOONNTTEENNTTSS

Harnesses, Lanyards & Anchors ................................... pg. 270Manbaskets .................................................................... pg. 272Forklift Work Platforms .................................................. pg. 273Ratchet Tie Downs ......................................................... pg. 274Binder Chains, Lever & Ratchet Binders ...................... pg. 277Fiber Rope and Fiber Rope Slings ................................ pg. 280


2

Care, Use and Inspectionof

Synthetic Web SlingsSafety is the paramount consideration involved in the use of any web sling. This standard does not purport toaddress all safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard toestablish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of the regulatory limitations priorto use. The appropriate web sling shall be selected for the specific lift. Users of web slings shall have knowledgeon the proper method of lifting item(s), and how they will react under normal and emergency situations. Also, usersshall be knowledgeable about industry, local, state, federal and provincial regulations applicable to the item(s)being lifted.

Chapter 5.0 Operating Practices for Web Slings

Section 5.1 Purpose

5.1.1 The purpose of this chapter is to provide guidelines for the qualified person responsible for web sling selection, rigging, inspection and use.

Section 5.2 Mechanical Considerations

5.2.1 Determine the weight of the load. The weight of the load shall be within the rated capacity of the web sling.

5.2.2 Select a web sling having suitable characteristics for the type of load, hitch and environment. (See hitch definitions below).

Hitch Definitions:

Hitch/Vertical - A method of rigging a sling in which the load is attached to the loop eye or end fitting at one end of the sling and the loop eye or end fitting at the other end is attached to the lifting device.

Hitch/Choker - A method of rigging a sling in which the sling is passed around the load,then through one loop eye, end fitting, or device with the other loop eye or end fitting attached to the lifting device. This hitch can be done with a sliding choker hook or simi-lar device.

Hitch/Vertical Basket - A method of rigging a sling in which the web sling is passed around the load, and both loop eyes or end fittings are attached to the lifting device.

Hitch/Angled Basket - Same as Basket Vertical hitch except that the attachment point of the lifting device (over the load) forces an angled hitch.

5.2.3 Web slings shall not be loaded in excess of the rated capacity shown on the attachedidentification tag. Consideration shall be given to the sling to load angle which affects rated capacity.

Hitch/Vertical Hitch/Choker Hitch/Angled BasketHitch/Vertical Basket

3

Sling Angle Table (Reduction of Sling Capacity)Angles/Degrees

HorizontalAdjustment

FactorAngles/Degrees

HorizontalAdjustment

Factor90 1.000 55 0.819

85 0.996 50 0.766

80 0.985 45 0.707

75 0.966 40 0.643

70 0.940 35 0.574

65 0.906 30 0.500

60 0.866

Angle of Choke(degrees)

Sling Rated capacity factoras percentage of single leg

choker hitch capacity

120 - 180 100%

90 - 120 87%

60 - 89 74%

30 - 59 62%

0 - 29 49%

Example: EE-291 Endless Web Sling with a 6,200 lbs. vertical basket rating.

Sling Rating x Adjustment Factor = Rated Capacity

6200 x .866 = 5369 rated capacity 6200 x .707 = 4383 rated capacity 6200 x .500 = 3100 rated capacity

For web slings used in a choker hitch, rated capacities are for anangle of choke 120 degrees or greater for the angle formed in theweb sling body as it passes through the choking eye. (Below)

5.2.4 Web slings with fittings, which are used in a choker hitch, shall be of sufficient length to assure that the choking action is on the webbing, and should not be on the fitting, the base of the eye or fitting, the load carrying splice and the sling tag.

5.2.5 Web slings used in a basket hitch shall have the load controlled to prevent slippage.

Special Considerations for LargeHooks, Shackles, etc.The ratio of the length of a loop eye, tothe diameter of the object over whichthe loop eye is to be placed, should bea minimum three-to-one relationship.

4

5.2.6 The opening in fittings shall be the proper shape and size to ensure that the fitting will seat properly on the hook or other attachments.

5.2.7 Web slings shall always be protected from being cut or damaged by corners, edges, protrusionsor abrasive surfaces with protection sufficient for the intended purpose.

5.2.8 Web slings should not be dragged on the floor or over abrasive surfaces.

5.2.9 Web slings shall not be twisted, shortened, lengthened, tied in knots or joined by knotting. Web slings shall be shortened, lengthened, or adjusted only by methods approved by themanufacturer.

5.2.10 Web slings should not be pulled from under loads when the load is resting on the web sling. Loads resting on web slings could damage the sling.

5.2.11 Do not drop web slings equipped with metal fittings.

5.2.12 Web slings that appear to be damaged shall not be used unless inspected and accepted as usable under Sections 5.3, 5.4, and 5.5.

5.2.13 The web sling shall be hitched in a manner providing control of the load.

5.2.14 Personnel, including portions of the human body, shall be kept from between the sling and the load, and from between the sling and the crane hook or hoist hook.

5.2.15 Personnel shall not stand under suspended loads. Personnel should stand clear of suspended loads.

5.2.16 Personnel shall not ride the web sling or the load being lifted.

5.2.17 Shock loading should be avoided.

5.2.18 Twisting and kinking the legs (branches) shall be avoided.

5.2.19 Load applied to the hook shall be centered in the base (bowl) of hook to prevent point loading on the hook.

5.2.20 During a lift, with or without the load, personnel shall be alert for possible snagging.

5.2.21 The web sling’s legs (branches) should contain or support the load from the sides above the center of gravity when using a basket hitch.

5.2.22 Web slings shall be long enough so that the rated capacity (Working Load Limit) is adequate when the sling to load angle is taken into consideration (See Sling Angle Table on top of page 3).

5.2.23 Only web slings with legible identification tags shall be used.

5.2.24 Tags and labels should be kept away from the load, hook and point of choke.

5.2.25 Web slings shall not be constricted or bunched between the ears of a clevis or shackle.

5.2.26 Place blocks under load prior to setting down the load to allow removal of the web sling, if appli-cable.

5.2.27 Web slings shall not be used as bridles on suspended personnel platforms.

Section 5.3 Environmental Considerations

5.3.1 Web slings should be stored in a cool, dry and dark place when not in use to prevent loss of strength through exposure to ultraviolet rays. Web slings shall not be stored in chemically activeenvironments.

5

5.3.2 Chemically active environments can affect the strength of synthetic web slings in varying degrees ranging from little to total degradation. the web sling manufacturer or qualified person should be consulted before slings are used in chemically active environments.

5.3.2.1 Acids

5.3.2.1.1 Nylon is subject to degradation in acids, ranging from little to total degradation.

5.3.2.1.2 Polyester is resistant to many acids, but is subject to degradation, ranging from little tomoderate in some acids.

5.3.2.1.3 Each application shall be evaluated, taking into consideration the following:

A. Type of acidB. Exposure conditionsC. ConcentrationD. Temperature

5.3.2.2 Alkalis

5.3.2.2.1 Polyester is subject to degradation in alkalis, ranging from little to total degradation.

5.3.2.2.2 Nylon is resistant to many alkalis, but is subject to degradation, ranging from little to moderate in some alkalis.

5.3.2.2.3 Each application shall be evaluated, taking into consideration the following:

A. Type of alkalisB. Exposure conditionsC. ConcentrationD. Temperature

5.3.3 Nylon and polyester slings shall not be used in contact with objects or at temperatures in excessof 194°F (90°C) or below -40°F (-40°C).

5.3.4 Web slings incorporating aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mistsor liquids of alkalis and/or acids are present.

5.3.5 Environments in which synthetic web slings are continuously exposed to ultraviolet light can affect the strength of synthetic web slings in varying degrees ranging from slight to totaldegradation.

CAUTION: Degradation can take place without visible indications.

A. Factors which affect the degree of strength loss are:1. Length of time of continuous exposure2. Web sling construction and design3. Other environmental factors such as weather conditions and geographic

location.

B. Suggested procedure to minimize the affects of ultraviolet light is to store web slings in a cool, dry and dark place when not being used for prolonged periods of time.

C. Some visual indications of sunlight or ultraviolet degradation are:

1. Bleaching out of web sling color2. Increased stiffness of web sling material3. Surface abrasion in area not normally in contact with the load

D. Proof Testing Warning: Slings used in environments where they are subject to continuous exposure to sunlight or ultra-violet light shall be proof tested to twice the rated capacity semi-annually, or more frequently depending on severity of exposure.

6

Section 5.4 Inspection

5.4.1 Type of Inspection

A. Initial Inspection - Before a new or repaired web sling is placed in service, it shall be inspected by a designated person to ensure that the correct web sling is being used, as well as to determine that the web sling meets the requirements of the specification.

B. Frequent Inspection - This inspection should be conducted by the person handling the sling each time the sling is used.

C. Periodic Inspection - This inspection shall be conducted by designated personnel. Frequency of inspection should be based on:

1. Frequency of web sling use2. Severity of service conditions3. Experience gained on the service life of web slings used in similar applications4. Inspections should be conducted at least annually

Section 5.5 Removal from service

5.5.1 Treated and untreated nylon and polyester webbing, used to fabricate synthetic slings, per class5 and class 7 rated capacity charts, may contain red yarn woven into the core of the webbing to serve only as one of many aids in determining whether and when a sling should be removed from service.

5.5.2 A web sling shall be removed from service if any of the following are visible:

A. If sling rated capacity or sling material identification is missing or not readable.B. Acid or Alkali burns.C. Melting, charring or weld spatter on any part of the web sling.D. Holes, tears, cuts, snags or embedded particles.E. Broken or worn stitching in load bearing splices.F. Excessive abrasive wear.G. Knots in any part of the web sling.H. Excessive pitting, or corrosion, or cracked, or distorted, or broken fittings.I. Any other visible damage that causes doubt as to the strength of the sling

Section 5.6 Inspection records

5.6.1 Written inspection records, utilizing the identification for each sling as established by the user, should be kept on file for all web slings. These records should show a description of the sling and its condition on each periodic inspection.

Section 5.7 Repair of web slings

5.7.1 Sling webbing with structural damage shall never be repaired. (See 5.5.2)

5.7.2 Type I and Type II web slings, and other web slings utilizing hardware, may be re-webbed utiliz-ing existing fittings. It shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer repairing the web sling to determine if the hardware is re-usable.

5.7.3 Slings shall be repaired only by a sling manufacturer or a qualified person. When repaired, a sling shall be marked to identify the repair agent.

5.7.4 All re-webbed Type I and Type II, and other web slings utilizing fittings, shall be proof tested to two (2) times their vertical rated capacity before being placed back into service. A certificate of proof testing shall be provided.

5.7.5 Temporary repairs of webbing, fittings or stitching shall not be permitted.

5.7.6 Repaired slings shall be proof tested to two (2) times its assigned rated capacity before being put back into service.

The preceding is an excerpt from the Recommended Standard Specification for Synthetic Web Slings. Permission for its usehas been given by the Web Sling & Tiedown Association.

7

STOCK NO. WIDTH EYEWIDTH

EYELENGTH

RATED CAPACITY IN LBS.

VERTICALBASKET VERTICAL CHOKER

CLASS 75 - ONE PLY

EE-171EE-172EE-173EE-174EE-175EE-176

1”2”3”4”5”6”

1”2”

1 1/2”1 1/2”

2”2”

9”9”12”12”12”14”

2,2004,4006,6008,800

11,00013,200

1,1002,2003,3004,4005,5006,600

8801,7602,6403,5204,4005,280

CLASS 75 - TWO PLY

EE-271EE-272EE-273EE-274EE-275EE-276

1”2”3”4”5”6”

1”2”

1 1/2”1 1/2”

2”2”

9”9”12”12”12”14”

4,4008,800

13,20016,40020,50024,600

2,2004,4006,6008,200

10,25012,300

1,7603,5205,2806,5608,2009,840

CLASS 75 - FOUR PLY

EE-471EE-472EE-473EE-474EE-475EE-476

1”2”3”4”5”6”

1”2”

1 1/2”2”

2 1/2”3”

12”12”18”18”20”20”

8,80017,60026,40032,80041,00049,200

4,4008,800

13,20016,40020,50024,600

3,5207,040

10,56013,12016,40019,680

Wear pads and sleeves are available. See page 18.

CLASS 75 - EYE & EYE SLINGSTYPE THREE - FLAT EYE

TYPE FOUR - HALF TWIST EYE

Class 75 eye & eye slings are available in widths up to 6”. Type three eye & eye slings have flat eyes at eachend and conform to all basic rigging hitches. The flat eye aids in sliding the sling in and out of narrow places.The eyes may be buffered on the inside for longer life.

Type four eye & eye slings have eyes with a half twist to keep them open. The open eye makes for faster hitch-ing in a choker and allows the operator to quickly slip the other eye onto the crane hook.

ALL CLASS 75 WEBBING CONTAINS RED WARNING YARNS THAT, WHEN EXPOSED,INDICATE REMOVAL FROM SERVICE.

Length or Reach

LAMCO SLINGS & RIGGING, INC.


LLAAMMCCOO MMaannuuffaaccttuurreedd bbyy LLAAMMCCOO -- SSaammee DDaayy EEmmeerrggeennccyy SSeerrvviiccee

8

STOCK NO. WIDTH EYEWIDTH

EYELENGTH



CLASS 98 - ONE PLYEE-191EE-1915EE-192EE-193EE-194EE-195EE-196EE-198EE-1910EE-1912

1”1 1/2”

2”3”4”5”6”8”10”12”

1”1 1/2”

2”1 1/2”1 1/2”

2”2”3”4”5”

9”9”9”9”12”12”12”18”22”26”

3,1004,6506,2009,300

12,40015,40018,60024,80031,00037,200

1,5502,3253,1004,6506,2007,7009,300

12,40015,50018,600

1,2401,8602,4803,7204,9606,1307,4409,920

12,40014,880

CLASS 98 - TWO PLYEE-291EE-2915EE-292EE-293EE-294EE-295EE-296EE-298EE-2910EE-2912

1”1 1/2”

2”3”4”5”6”8”10”12”

1”1 1/2”

2”1 1/2”1 1/2”

2”2”3”4”5”

9”9”9”12”12”12”14”18”22”26”

6,2009,300

12,40018,60022,00027,50033,00044,00055,00066,000

3,1004,6506,2009,300

11,00013,70016,50022,00027,50033,000

2,4803,7204,9607,4408,800

10,90013,20017,60022,00026,400

CLASS 98 - FOUR PLYEE-491EE-4915EE-492EE-493EE-494EE-495EE-496EE-498EE-4910EE-4912

1”1 1/2”

2”3”4”5”6”8”10”12”

1”1 1/2”

2”1 1/2”

2”2 1/2”

3”4”5”6”

12”12”12”18”18”18”20”24”28”32”

12,40018,60024,80037,20044,00054,90066,00088,000

110,000132,000

6,2009,300

12,40018,60022,00027,50033,00044,00055,00066,000

4,9607,4409,920

14,88017,60021,90026,40035,20044,00052,800


TYPE FOUR - HALF TWIST EYE

Class 98 eye & eye slings are available in widths up to 12”. Class 98 slings are made the same as class 75, butare from stronger and slightly thicker webbing. Available in nylon or polyester.


Length or Reach



TYPE THREE - FLAT EYECLASS 98 - EYE & EYE SLINGS


9

CLASS 75 ENDLESS SLINGS - TYPE FIVE

Class 75 endless slings are available in widths up to 6”. Endless slings give the advantage of longer lifebecause the "wear point" revolves around the circumference as it is repeatedly used. Best used in lengths often feet or less, endless slings are the real workhorse of the machine shop and maintenance group. Endlessslings with a width of three inches or more can be tapered at bearing points to fit crane hooks.


STOCK NO. WIDTH OPTIONALTAPER



CLASS 75 - ONE PLY

EN-171EN-172EN-173EN-174EN-175EN-176

1”2”3”4”5”6”

N/A1”

1 1/2”1 1/2”

2”2”

4,4008,800

13,20017,60022,00026,400

2,2004,4006,6008,800

11,00013,200

1,7603,5205,2807,0408,800

10,560

CLASS 75 - TWO PLY

EN-271EN-272EN-273EN-274EN-275EN-276

1”2”3”4”5”6”

N/A1”

1 1/2”1 1/2”2 1/2”

2”

8,80017,60026,40032,80041,00049,200

4,4008,800

13,20016,40020,50024,600

3,5207,040

10,56013,12016,40019,680

CLASS 75 - THREE PLY

EN-371EN-372EN-373EN-374EN-375EN-376

1”2”3”4”5”6”

N/AN/A

1 1/2”2”

2 1/2”3”

13,20026,40039,60049,20061,50073,800

6,60013,20019,80024,60030,70036,900

5,20010,50015,80019,70024,60029,500


Length or Reach



10

CLASS 98 ENDLESS SLINGS - TYPE FIVE

Class 98 endless slings area available in widths up to 12”. Class 98 webbing is stronger than class 75 and notquite as pliable. With slightly thicker fiber than class 75, these slings will withstand more wear. Available innylon or polyester webbing.


STOCK NO. WIDTH* OPTIONALTAPER



CLASS 98 - ONE PLY

EN-191EN-1915EN-192EN-193EN-194EN-195EN-196

1”1 1/2”

2”3”4”5”6”

N/AN/A1”

1 1/2”1 1/2”

2”2”

6,2009,300

12,40018,60024,80030,90037,200

3,1004,6506,2009,300

12,40015,45018,600

2,4803,7204,9607,4409,920

12,35014,880

CLASS 98 - TWO PLY

EN-291EN-2915EN-292EN-293EN-294EN-295EN-296

1”1 1/2”

2”3”4”5”6”

N/AN/A1”

1 1/2”1 1/2”2 1/2”

2”

12,40018,60024,80037,20044,00055,00066,000

6,2009,300

12,40018,60022,00027,50033,000

4,9607,4409,920

14,88017,60021,95026,400

CLASS 98 - THREE PLY

EN-391EN-3915EN-392EN-393EN-394EN-395EN-396

1”1 1/2”

2”3”4”5”6”

N/AN/A1”

1 1/2”1 1/2”2 1/2”

3”

18,60027,90037,20055,80068,80085,900

103,200

9,30013,95018,60027,90034,40042,95051,600

7,44011,16014,88022,32027,52034,30041,280


*Additional widths are available up to 12 inches. Call for Information.

Length or Reach



11

Wear pads and sleeves are available. See page 18.*NOTE: Substitute the letter “F” for “R” if flat eyes required.

REVERSE EYE SLINGS

TYPE SIX - REVERSIBLE EYE

TYPE SEVEN - FLAT EYE

Reverse eye slings are built for rugged use. Both sides of the body and eyes are protected with abrasion resist-ant nylon to give longer life in rough applications.

On type six slings, the eye can be turned inside out to give a new wear surface and extend the life of the sling.Type seven slings have flat eyes to slide under loads or for tight clearance areas.

ALL CLASS 75 & 98 WEBBING CONTAINS RED WARNING YARNS THAT, WHEN EXPOSED,INDICATE REMOVAL FROM SERVICE.

STOCKNO.* WIDTH EYE

WIDTHEYE

LENGTH



RE-1712RE-1912RE-2712RE-2912

2”2”2”2”

1”1”1”1”

9”9”12”12”

6,4009,200

11,60015,000

3,2004,6005,8007,500

2,5603,6804,6406,000

RE-1953RE-2953

3”3”

1 1/2”1 1/2”

12”12”

13,80020,000

6,90010,000

5,5208,000

RE-1724RE-1924RE-2724RE-2924RE-3924RE-4924

4”4”4”4”4”4”

2”2”2”2”2”2”

12”12”15”15”15”15”

12,00015,60022,00027,60040,80046,000

6,0007,800

11,00013,80020,40023,000

4,8006,2408,800

11,00016,30018,400

RE-1736RE-1936RE-2736RE-2936RE-3936RE-4936

6”6”6”6”6”6”

1 1/2”1 1/2”1 1/2”1 1/2”

3”3”

14”14”18”18”20”24”

20,00024,00028,00034,80053,00068,000

10,00012,00014,00017,40026,50034,000

8,0009,600

11,20013,92020,20027,200

Length or Reach




12

SLINGS WITH HARDWARE - TYPE ONE

Type one slings with oblongs have alloy master links on each end. The oblongs have the ability to allow theslings to be used in a choker hitch. The oblongs offer a greater capacity at a less expensive price than steel tri-angles. If not damaged the hardware may be used after the webbing has worn. Available in nylon or polyesterwebbing.


STOCK NO. WEBBINGWIDTH

OBLONGSIZE



LOO-171LOO-191LOO-271LOO-291

1”1”1”1”

1/2 X 2 1/2 X 51/2 X 2 1/2 X 51/2 X 2 1/2 X 51/2 X 2 1/2 X 5

2,2003,1004,4006,200

1,1001,5502,2003,100

8801,2401,7602,480

LOO-1915LOO-2915

1 1/2”1 1/2”

1/2 X 2 1/2 X 51/2 X 2 1/2 X 5

4,6509,300

2,3254,650

1,8603,720


2”2”2”2”

1/2 X 2 1/2 X 51/2 X 2 1/2 X 51/2 X 2 1/2 X 5

5/8 X 3 X 6

4,4006,2008,800

12,400

2,2003,1004,4006,200

1,7602,4803,5204,960


3”3”3”3”

1/2 X 2 1/2 X 51/2 X 2 1/2 X 5

3/4 X 2 3/4 X 5 1/23/4 X 2 3/4 X 5 1/2

6,6009,300

13,20018,600

3,3004,6506,6009,300

2,6403,7205,2807,440


4”4”4”4”

1/2 X 2 1/2 X 55/8 X 3 X 6

3/4 X 2 3/4 X 5 1/21 X 3 1/2 X 7

8,80012,40016,40022,000

4,4006,2008,200

11,000

3,5204,9606,5608,800


5”5”5”5”

5/8 X 3 X 63/4 X 2 3/4 X 5 1/2

1 X 3 1/2 X 71 X 3 1/2 X 7

11,00015,40020,50027,500

5,5007,700

10,25013,700

4,4006,1308,200

10,900LOO-176LOO-196LOO-276LOO-296

6”6”6”6”

3/4 X 2 3/4 X 5 1/23/4 X 2 3/4 X 5 1/2

1 X 3 1/2 X 71 X 3 1/2 X 7

13,20018,60024,60033,000

6,6009,300

12,30016,500

5,2807,4409,840

13,200


Length or Reach



13

SLINGS WITH HARDWARE - TYPE ONE

Type one slings have one triangle and one choker end and can be supplied in either aluminum or steel. Slingswith aluminum hardware are lighter in weight, but are made for one ply slings only. Steel hardware is availablefor one and two ply slings. If not damaged, the hardware can be re-used to build a new sling many times afterthe nylon has worn.





MFA-172MFA-192MFS-272MFS-292

2”2”2”2”

4,4006,2008,800

12,400

2,2003,1004,4006,200

1,7602,4803,5204,960


3”3”3”3”

6,6009,300

13,20016,800

3,3004,6506,6008,400

2,6403,7205,2806,720


4”4”4”4”

8,80012,40016,40022,000

4,4006,2008,200

11,000

3,5204,9606,5608,800

MFS-275MFS-295

5”5”

20,50027,500

10,25013,750

8,20011,000


6”6”6”6”

13,20018,60024,60033,000

6,6009,300

12,30016,500

5,2807,4409,840

13,200MFS-198MFS-298

8”8”

24,80044,000

12,40022,000

9,92017,600

MFS-1910MFS-2910

10”10”

31,00055,000

15,50027,500

12,40022,000

MFS-1912MFS-2912

12”12”

37,20064,000

18,60032,000

14,88025,600


Length or Reach



14

SLINGS WITH HARDWARE - TYPE TWO

Type two slings have two triangle ends and can be supplied in either aluminum or steel. Slings with aluminumhardware are lighter in weight, but are made for one ply slings only. Steel hardware is available for one and twoply slings. If not damaged, the hardware can be re-used to build a new sling many times after the nylon hasbeen worn.




VERTICALBASKET VERTICAL

MMA-172MMA-192MMS-272MMS-292

2”2”2”2”

4,4006,2008,800

12,400

2,2003,1004,4006,200


3”3”3”3”

6,6009,300

13,20016,800

3,3004,6506,6008,400


4”4”4”4”

8,80012,40016,40022,000

4,4006,2008,200

11,000MMS-275MMS-295

5”5”

20,50027,500

10,25013,750


6”6”6”6”

13,20018,60024,60033,000

6,6009,300

12,30016,500

MMS-198MMS-298

8”8”

24,80044,000

12,40022,000

MMS-1910MMS-2910

10”10”

31,00055,000

15,50027,500

MMS-1912MMS-2912

12”12”

37,20064,000

18,60032,000



Length or Reach


15

TYPE NINE - BRIDLE EYE

Bridle eye slings are light duty with wide bodies and narrow eyes to handle bulky loads and fit small cranehooks.



Additional sizes and capacities available on request.

DESIGNED FOR USE IN BASKET HITCH ONLY.

STOCK NO. BODYWIDTH

EYEWIDTH

EYELENGTH

RATED CAPACITYIN LBS.

VERTICALBASKET

BE-196BE-198BE-1910BE-1912

6”8”10”12”

1”1”1”1”

9”12”15”18”

8,0008,0008,000

10,000

BE-1916BE-1920BE-1924

16”20”24”

1”1”1”

24”24”24”

10,00010,00010,000


Length or Reach


16

WIDE BODY SLINGS

Wide body slings range from six inches to twenty four inches wide and are DESIGNED FOR USE IN A BASKETHITCH ONLY. Wide body slings are used primarily in pairs from a spreader beam for heavy loads or for pickinglarge coils around their circumference.



STOCK NO. BODYWIDTH

EYEWIDTH

EYELENGTH

RATED CAPACITYIN LBS.

VERTICALBASKET

WB-176WB-196WB-276WB-296

6”6”6”6”

2”2”2”2”

12”12”15”15”

13,20018,60026,40037,200

WB-178WB-198WB-278WB-298

8”8”8”8”

2”2”2”2”

16”16”16”16”

17,60024,80032,80044,000

WB-1910WB-2910

10”10”

2 1/2”2 1/2”

18”18”

31,00055,000

WB-1712WB-1912WB-2712WB-2912

12”12”12”12”

2”2”3”3”

18”18”18”18”

26,40037,20049,20066,000

WB-1916WB-2916

16”16”

3”4”

18”18”

44,00070,400

WB-1920WB-2920

20”20”

3 1/2”5”

24”24”

55,00082,500

WB-1924WB-2924

24”24”

4”6”

24”24”

66,00092,000




17

BRIDLE AND MULTI-LEG WEB SLINGSWEB BRIDLE SLING ADVANTAGES

Lightweight and easy to handle Do not conduct electricity Help absorb shock Fitting options include, but are not limited to: Rings, hooks, shackles and

choker hardware Available in 3 & 4 leg assemblies also. Can be made from either nylon or polyester webbing

CALL US FOR YOUR SPECIFIC NEEDS.

SINGLE LEGSTOCK NO.

VERTICALCAPACITY

1L-171-*-*1L-191-*-*1L-271-*-*1L-291-*-*

1,1001,5502,2003,000

1L-172-*-*1L-192-*-*1L-272-*-*1L-292-*-*

2,2003,1004,4006,000

1L-173-*-*1L-193-*-*1L-273-*-*1L-293-*-*

3,3004,6506,6009,300

CrosbyWS-320AHook Size

1 1/2 Ton

3 Ton

5 Ton

DOUBLE LEGSTOCK NO. 75° 60° 45°

2L-171-*-*2L-191-*-*2L-271-*-*2L-291-*-*

2,1203,0004,2505,790

1,9002,6803,8105,190

1,5502,1903,1104,240

2L-172-*-*2L-192-*-*2L-272-*-*2L-292-*-*

4,2505,9808,500

11,580

3,8105,3707,620

10,400

3,1104,3806,2208,480

2L-173-*-*2L-193-*-*2L-273-*-*2L-293-*-*

6,3708,980

12,750 17,800

5,7208,060

11,440 16,000

4,6606,5709,330

13,150

* Code designates the top fitting and leg attachment.O = Oblong Master R = Ring Master P = Pear Master

H = Hook J = J-Hook E = Sling Eye C = Choker Hook

Sling to Load Angle* Sling angles of less than 45° are not recommended


Single Leg (1L)O-H

Double Leg (2L)O-H

18

WEAR PADS AND SLEEVES

NYLON WEAR PADS

SLEEVES

COIL HANDLING SLEEVESBuffer Back Side

COIL HANDLING SLEEVESCoil Contact Side

SLING WRAP

Webbing wear pads and sleeves offer extra protection to a web sling at a point where it wears the most. Theycan be used on any style of web sling and can be ordered in any length. Wear pads can be sewn anywhere onthe sling, on one or both sides. Sleeves cover both sides of the sling and do not stretch with the sling when thelift is being made.

COIL HANDLING SLEEVESLoop Back Side

GLASS HANDLING SLEEVE

LEATHER WEAR PADS

EYE BUFFER


19

WS-320AWEB SLING HOOK

SEE APPLICATION ANDWARNING INFORMATION

* Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Average straightening load (ultimate load) is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements for minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact width shownin the Recommended Standards Specification for Synthetic Polyester Roundslings by the Web Sling & Tie Down Association.WSTDA-RS1 (revised 2001)

LAMCO synthetic barrel slingutilizing Crosby S-377 barrel hooks.

Replacement Latches page 192.

20

21

22

• Connects Synthetic Web and Synthetic Round Slings to conventional Crosbyhardware including:

• 320N Eye Hook• Additional Crosby Grade 8 Fittings• Master Links• Rings• Shackles

• Makes a field assembled bridle quick and easy.• Increased radius of spool gives wider sling bearing surface resulting in anincreased area for load distribution, thus:

• Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency by at least 15% as compared to standard anchor and chain shackle bows and conventional eye hooks. This allows 100% of the slings rated Working Load Limit to be achieved.• Allowing better load distribution on internal fibers.

S-280

23

MADE IN U.S.A.

CM web sling shackle• Finish: hot dip galvanized.

• Klik pin (zinc plated) as shownfurnished as standard—cotteror hair pin can be furnished on special order.

• Shackle body: carbon steel,heat treated.

• Shackle pin: alloy steel, heat treated.

• Tolerances: ±1/32" unless otherwise indicated.

• Design ultimate strength equals4 times the working load limit.

Working Approx.Webbing load KLIK weightwidth limit Product UPC pin Radius each(in.) (lbs.)* code 43927- code W L D P R E (lbs.)

2 18,050 M702 40600 333001 2 21/4 5/8 3/4 15/8 5/8 1.70

3 13,050 M703 40603 333001 3 31/4 3/4 7/8 17/8 3/4 2.86

4 10,800 M704 40606 333001 4 3 3/4 3/4 7/8 17/8 7/8 3.15

5 18,000 M705 40609 333002 5 41/4 7/8 1 21/8 7/8 4.75

6 18,000 M706 40614 333002 6 43/4 1 11/8 2 3/8 1 6.75

6 23,850 M706H 40615 333002 6 43/4 11/8 11/4 2 5/8 1 9.80heavy duty

Dimensions (inches)Shackle

Web Round Sling Connector - SKR

WARNINGTO AVOID INJURY:Do not exceed working load limit

24

Endless(ENR)Roundslings

*Capacity in lbs.

MinimumLength

Approx.Diameter(No Load)

Approx.Weightper footVertical Choker

VerticalBasket

PartNumber

ColorCode

ENR1ENR2ENR3

PurpleGreenYellow

260053008400

210042006700

52001060016800

3’3’3’

0.625”0.875”1.125”

0.3 lb.0.4 lb.0.5 lb.

ENR4ENR5ENR6ENR7

TanRedWhiteBlue

10600132001680021200

8500106001340017000

21200264003360042400

3’3’6’6’

1.125”1.375”1.375”1.625”

0.6 lb.0.8 lb.0.9 lb.1.3 lb.

ENR8ENR9ENR10

OrangeOrangeOrange

250003100040000

200002480032000

500006200080000

6’6’6’

1.750”2.125”2.350”

1.6 lb.2.0 lb.2.6 lb.

ENR11ENR12ENR13

OrangeOrangeOrange

530006600090000

424005280072000

106000132000180000

8’8’8’

3.150”3.950”4.800”

3.4 lb.4.3 lb.5.9 lb.

EndlessSlings (ENR)Liftex Endless-TypeRoundslings are the mostbasic roundsling yet theyoffer great versatility.Endless roundslings may beused in a vertical, choker orbasket type hitch.

Bearingto Bearing

Length

WARNING *DO NOT EXCEED RATED CAPACITY

• Sling life extended through rotation ofbearing points

• Soft and Pliable - conforms well to irreg-ularly shaped loads

• Offers tighter choke with easier release• Double Jacket protects load-bearing

fibers

• Tagged for easy identification• Red Core Warning Fibers alert user to

damage• Elongation approximately 3% at Rated

Capacity*

25

Eye & Eye(EER)Roundslings

*Capacity in lbs.

MinimumLength

StandardEye

LengthBodyWidth

Approx.Weightper footVertical Choker

VerticalBasket

PartNumber

ColorCode

EER1EER2EER3

PurpleGreenYellow

260053008400

210042006700

52001060016800

3’3’4’

10”10”12”

2.25”2.50”2.50”

0.4 lb.0.5 lb.0.6 lb.

EER4EER5EER6EER7

TanRedWhiteBlue

10600132001680021200

8500106001340017000

21200264003360042400

4’5’7’7’

12”14”16”16”

3.50”3.50”3.50”4.25”

0.7 lb.1.0 lb.1.1 lb.1.6 lb.


Eye & Eye (EER)Liftex Eye & Eye-Typeroundslings are ideal whereabrasion to the sling body is aproblem. A tough, abrasion-resistant nylon sleeve is sewnto the body forming a loop oreye at each end. They maybe used in a vertical, chokeror basket hitch.

Bearingto Bearing

Length

• Capacities are color coded• Double Jacket under body cover protects load-bearing yarns• Stretch is reduced to approximately 3% at rated capacity• Red Core Warning Fibers alert user to damage

26

Bearingto Bearing

Length

6-PartBraidedRoundslings

*Capacity in lbs.

MinimumLength

StandardEye

Length

Approx.Weightper foot

WidthUnderLoadVertical Choker

VerticalBasket

PartNumber

ColorCode

6BR16BR26BR3

PurpleGreenYellow

67001350021400

53001080017100

134002700042800

5’5’6’

14”15”18”

1.1 lb.1.45 lb.1.9 lb.

3.25”3.75”4.25”

6BR46BR56BR6

TanRedWhite

270003360042800

216002680034200

540006720085600

6’7’7’

18”25”25”

2.25 lb.3.0 lb.3.5 lb.

4.50”5.25”5.50”

6BR76BR86BR9

BlueOrangeOrange

540006370079000

432005090063200

108000127400158000

9’10’10’

30”33”38”

4.95 lb.6.0 lb.

7.75 lb.

6.63”8.25”11.0”

8-PartBraidedRoundslings

*Capacity in lbs.

MinimumLength

StandardEye

Length

Approx.Weightper foot

WidthUnderLoadVertical Choker

VerticalBasket

PartNumber

ColorCode

8BR18BR28BR3

PurpleGreenYellow

90001800028500

72001440022800

180003600057000

5’5’6’

14”15”18”

1.4 lb.1.85 lb.2.40 lb.

3.50”4.00”4.75”

8BR48BR58BR6

TanRedWhite

360004490057100

288003590045600

7200089800

114200

6’7’7’

18”25”25”

2.85 lb.3.8 lb.4.4 lb.

5.00”6.00”6.25”

8BR78BR88BR9

BlueOrangeOrange

7200085000

105300

576006800084200

144000170000210600

9’10’10’

30”33”38”

6.25 lb.7.6 lb.

9.75 lb.

7.50”9.50”

13”



Braided Roundup® RoundslingsBraided Roundslings provide greater security in handling high-capacity loads, while maintain-ing the qualities our other roundslings offer. Braided Roundslings are constructed using 3 (6-part) or 4 (8-part) Endless Roundup roundslings. Braided Roundslings offer superior perform-ance in a vertical, choker or basket hitch.

• Eyes are covered with abrasion-resistant nylon.• Soft, flexible and easy to handle• Conform well to load• Excellent strength-to-weight ratio• Capacities are color coded• Red Core Warning Fibers alert user to damage• Each sling is tagged for easy identification

Bearingto Bearing

Length

27

CODE NO.

RATED CAPACITIES (LBS.)APPROXIMATE

WEIGHT(lbs. Per Ft.)

(Bearing-Bearing)

APPROXIMATEBODY WIDTH

(inches)

VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET HITCHES(Horizontal Angles)

TPXC 1000TPXC 1500TPXC 2000

10,00015,00020,000

8,00012,00016,000

20,00030,00040,000

17,32025,98034,640

14,14021,21028,280

.31

.40

.55

3”3”4”


25,00030,00040,000

20,00024,00032,000

50,00060,00080,000

43,30051,96069,280

35,35042,42056,560

.65

.801.12

4”4”5”


50,00060,00070,000

40,00048,00056,000

100,000120,000140,000

86,139103,920121,240

70,70084,84098,980

1.501.601.68

5”6”6”


85,000100,000125,000

68,00080,000100,000

170,000200,000250,000

147,220173,200216,500

120,190141,400176,500

1.852.203.00

6”8”8”


150,000175,000200,000

120,000140,000160,000

300,000350,000400,000

259,800303,100346,400

212,100247,450282,800

3.364.004.37

8”10”10”


250,000275,000300,000

200,000220,000240,000

500,000550,000600,000

433,000476,300519,600

353,500388,850424,200

5.506.907.50

11”11”13”

Twin-Path Extra Slings are constructed of high performance load carrying yarns. The loadcarrying yarns are protected by two independent, seamless, color coded covers. The internal red cover is pro-tected by the outer green covermax abrasion resistant cover.

The sling cover is fabricated in such a way that it is actually two complete and separate slings in one. Eachpath makes its own separate connection between the lifting hook and the load. This unique backup system isdesigned to provide the sling user with sufficient reaction time to maintain control of the load if damage to one ofthe paths was undetected.

Tell Tails Tags are used to show when Twin-Path Extra Slings are loaded beyond rated capacity, the indicatortails shrink until they finally disappear under the cover.

Protective Sleeves can be sewn on or float around the body of the sling so that they can be positioned to theareas where they are needed. A Special tag contains required information--and the Flag Tag contains theVertical Capacity in large readable characters.

US Patent 4,850,629Canadian Patent 1,280,458NOTE: Capacities shown include both paths and are for one complete sling. Ratings based onstraight pin diameter one-half sling width.Metric capacities available. Do not exceed rated capacity.

60° 45°


29

Care, Use and Inspectionof

Wire Rope SlingsCCoouurrtteessyy ooff WWiirree RRooppee CCoorrppoorraattiioonn ooff AAmmeerriiccaa,, IInncc..

The rated capacity of a sling and what itmeans to you.The rated capacity of a sling varies depending uponthe type of sling, the size of the sling, and the type ofhitch. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME) requires that all wire rope slings be taggedwith the name or trademark of the manufacturer, therated capacity for specific configurations and the diam-eter or size of the sling. Under no circumstances shalla sling's rated capacity be exceeded. The user shouldmaintain this identification so that it is legible duringthe life of the sling. All persons using the sling shouldread the tag and understand the information on it.

The rated capacity of a wire rope sling is basedupon the Minimum Breaking Force (MBF) of the wirerope used in the sling, and other factors that affect theoverall strength of the sling, including

- Attachment or splicing efficiency. - Design factor (5 is standard).- Number of parts of rope in the sling.- Type of hitch (straight pull, choker hitch or basket

hitch).- Diameter around which the body of the sling is

bent (D/d ratio). - Number of legs.- Diameter of the pin (or hook) over which the eye

of the sling is rigged.- Angle at which the sling is used.

Design FactorThe rated capacities for wire rope slings are based ona design factor of 5 per ASME B30.9. The design fac-tor and other factors are used to calculate the ratedcapacities Design factors have been established thatallow the sling to give efficient service to the user.

D/d RatiosWhen a sling is rigged as a basket, the diameter of thebend where the sling contacts the load can affect thesling's lifting capacity. How much the liftingcapacity is affected can be calculated bydividing the diameter of the bend wherethe rope contacts the load (representedby "D") by the diameter of the rope orthe component rope diameter in amulti-part sling (represented by "d").For example, if the diameter of the bend("D") Is 10 and the component rope diam-eter ("d") is 1/2, the D/d Ratio is 10 = 1/2 or 20. WhenD/d ratios smaller than those shown in the footnotes

below Rated Capacity Tables are used, the ratedcapacity of the sling must be decreased.

How wire rope slings are used.

HitchesHow wire rope slings are configured to lift a load iscalled a hitch. Most lifts use one of three basic hitch-es.

Vertical Eye and Eye HitchIf one eye of the sling is attached to the liftinghook and the other eye is attached to the load,this is called a vertical eye and eye, orstraight, hitch. A tagline should be used toprevent load rotation that may damage thesling.

When two or more slings are attachedto the same lifting hook, the total hitch becomes, ineffect, a lifting bridle and the load is distributed equal-ly among the individual slings.

Slings used at an angle have a lower rated capac-ity than a sling used vertically.

Choker HitchIn the choker hitch, one eye of the sling isattached to the lifting hook, while the slingitself is drawn through the other eye. The loadis placed inside the "choke" that is createdwhile the sling is drawn tight over the loadthrough the eye.Choker hitches reduce the lifting capabil-

ity of a sling since the wire rope compo-nent's ability to adjust during the lift isaffected. You should only use a chokerhitch when the load will not be seriously damaged bythe sling body, or the sling damaged by the load, andwhen the lift requires the sling to hug the load. Neverchoke a load so that any part of one eye or splice is inthe part of the sling that passes through the other eyeto form the choke.

Two notes of caution: Always pull a choker hitch tightbefore the lift is made. It should never be pulled downduring the lift. Also, never use only one choker hitch tolift a load that could shift or slide out of thechoke.

Basket HitchA basket hitch is formed when botheyes of the sling are placed on the lift-ing hook, thereby forming a circularbasket of the sling. This type of hitch dis-tributes the load equally between thetwo legs of the sling, within limitations.

Lifting BridlesWhen you attach two or more slings to the same liftinghook, or are connected to a link rigged onto the hook,

Vertical

Choker

Basket

30

the total hitch becomes a lifting bridle, distributing theload among the individual slings. When using two ormore slings as a lifting bridle, remember that the slingangle affects the slings' rated capacities. Also, thelocation of the lift's center of gravity will affect the loadon each sling leg.

Sound lifting practices.

There are four primary factors to take into considera-tion when lifting a load.

They are: (1) the physical parameters of the load;(2) the number of legs and the angle they make withthe horizontal; (3) the rated capacity of the sling; and(4) the condition of the sling.

Physical parameters of the load The size of the object to be lifted, and particularly thelocation of lifting points, will affect sling selection. Theweight of the lift, while a critical component, is only apart of the information. The location of the center ofgravity is also necessary to determine sling loadings.

If the load has small diameter corners, protectiveblocking or "softeners" must be used so that slingcapacity isn't reduced. Also, if lifting a painted object oran object with a finished surface, padding or softenersmay be needed between the sling and the load to pro-tect the load.

Number of legs and angle with the horizontalAs the angle formed by the sling leg and the horizon-tal decreases, the rated capacity of the sling alsodecreases. In other words, the smaller the anglebetween the sling leg and the horizontal, the greaterthe load on the sling leg. The minimum angle allowedis 30 degrees.

Rated capacityThe rated capacity of a sling must never be exceeded.The rated capacity is based both on sling fabricationcomponents (minimum breaking force of rope used,splicing efficiency, number of parts of rope in sling andnumber of sling legs) and sling application compo-nents (angle of legs, type of hitch, D/d ratios, etc.)

If you are using one wire rope sling in a verticalhitch, you can utilize the full rated lifting capacity of thesling, but you must not exceed that lifting capacity.

If you are using two wire rope slings in a verticalhitch (called a 2-legged bridle hitch) in a straight lift,the load on each leg increases as the angle betweenthe leg and the horizontal plane decreases.

Whenever you lift a load with the legs of a sling atan angle, you can calculate the actual load per leg byusing the following three-step formula.

Three-step formula for calculating loadper sling leg These calculations assume that the center of gravity is

equal distance from all of the lifting points, and thesling angles are the same. If not, more complicatedengineering calculations are needed.

1. Divide the weight of your total load by the num-ber of legs you are using. This gives you the loadper leg if the lift were being made with all legs lift-ing vertically.

2. Measure the angle between the legs of the slingand the horizontal plane.

3. Multiply the load per leg that you calculated instep 1 by the load factor for the leg angle you areusing. Use the Load factor guidelines table onthe next page to determine the load factor.

The result is the actual load on each leg of the sling forthis lift and angle. The actual load must never exceedthe sling's vertical rated capacity.

Examples:

1. Total load is 1,000 Ibs. divided bytwo legs - 500 Ibs. load per leg ifvertical lift.

2. Horizontal sling angle is 60degrees.

3. Multiply 500 Ibs. by 1.154 loadfactor (from table) = 577 Ibs. actu-al load per leg.



3. Multiply 500 Ibs. by 1.414 loadfactor (from table) = 707 Ibs. actu-al load per leg



3. Multiply 500 Ibs. by 2 load factor(from table) = 1000 Ibs. actualload per leg

WARNING: Slings shall not be used with horizontalangles less than 30°.

Condition of slingEach sling must be inspected daily. If the sling doesnot pass inspection (See Page 32), do not use.

31

When you're calculating the load ofbasket hitches and bridles, remem-ber that as the horizontal angle of a

sling decreases, theresultant load on eachleg increases. The

horizontal angle ofbridles with three

or more legs ismeasured the

same wayas horizon-

tal sling angles of two-legged hitch-es. If a bridle is designed with differ-ent leg lengths, it may result in dif-ferent horizontal angles. The load oneach leg must be calculated basedon the position of the slings and thelocation of the lift's center of gravity.Adjusting the rated capacity of a

Calculating the load of basket hitches and bridles.

choker hitch.

Due to the body of the sling beingused in the choke, there is a reduc-tion in rated capacity. This is reflect-ed in the choker rated capacitytables. Another reduction that mustbe considered is due to the "angle"of the choke (not the angle of the legof the sling).

If the load is hanging free, the nor-mal choke angle is approximately135 degrees. When lift-ing and turning a loadusing a chokerhitch, it is notuncommon tohave a severebend at thechoke. When achoker hitch isused at an angleof less than 120 degrees, you mustreduce the hitch's rated capacity asshown in the chart at right. Youalways must adjust the ratedcapacity of the wire rope sling

Load factorguidelinesLeg angle Load factor

90°85°80°75°70°65°60°55°50°45°40°35°30°

1.0001.0031.0151.0351.0641.1031.1541.2201.3051.4141.5551.7432.000

whenever you use a choker hitch toshift, turn or control a load, or whenthe pull is against the choke in amulti-leg lift.

As always, if more than one sling isused and the legs are not vertical, afurther reduction in rated capacitymust be made for the sling angle.Warning: Choker hitches at angles

greater than 135 degrees are notrecommended since they are unsta-ble. Extreme care should be takento determine the angle of choke asaccurately as possible

Angle of chokein degrees

Rate CapacityPercent*

Over 12090-12060-8930-590-29

100%87%74%62%49%

*Percent of sling’s rated capacity in a choker hitch.

See next page for wire rope sling inspection and removalfrom service criteria.

LAMCO is a ProudMember of

Associated Wire Rope Fabricators

32

ASME B30.9C-2000 Excerpt

Section 9-2.6: Effects of Environment

9-2.6.1 Fiber core wire rope slings of all grades shallnot be exposed to temperatures in excess of 180°F(82° C).

9-2.6.2 When wire rope slings of any grade are to beused at temperatures above 400°F (204°C) or below -60°F (-51°C), the sling manufacturer should be consult-ed.

9-2.6.3 The strength of slings can be affected by chem-ically active environments as sling materials may besusceptible to damage from caustic or acid substancesor fumes; strongly oxidizing environments attack allcommon sling materials. The sling manufacturer shouldtherefore be consulted before slings are used in chemi-cally active environments.

Section 9-2.8: Sling Inspection & Replacement

9-2.8.1 Frequent Inspection. All slings shall be visu-ally inspected by the person handling the sling each daythey are used. These visual observations should beconcerned with discovering gross damage, such as list-ed below, which may be an immediate hazard:

(a) distortion of rope in the sling such as kinking,crushing, unstranding, birdcaging, main stranddisplacement, or core protrusion. Loss of ropediameter in short rope lengths or unevenness ofouter strands should provide evidence the slingor slings should be replaced.

(b) general corrosion;(c) broken or cut strands;(d) number, distribution, and type of visible broken

wires.

See paras. 9-2.8.3(b)(1) and (8) for further guidance.

9-2.8.2 Periodic Inspection. A periodic inspectionshall be performed by a designated person on a regularbasis with frequency of inspection based on:

(a) frequency of sling use;(b) severity of service conditions;(c) nature of lifts being made;(d) experience gained on the service life of slings

used in similar circumstances.

Inspection shall be made at least annually and shallinclude a record of the inspection or of apparent condi-tions to provide the basis for a continuing evaluation.Inspection shall be conducted on the entire length ofeach sling including splices, end attachments, and fit-

tings. Deterioration which would result in loss of origi-nal strength shall be observed and determination madewhether further use of the sling would constitute a haz-ard. Para. 9-2.8.3 (Replacement) can provide guid-ance in making such a determination.

9-2.8.3 Replacement

(a) No precise rules can be given for determinationof the exact time for sling replacement, sincemany variable factors are involved. Once asling reaches a specified removal criteria, itmay be allowed to operate to the end of thework shift, based on the judgement of a quali-fied person. The sling shall be replaced a f t e rthat work shift, at the end of the day, or at thelatest time prior to the next work shift.

(b) Removal criteria for sling replacement shall be as follows:

(1) missing or illegible sling identification(2) for strand laid and single part slings

ten randomly distributed broken wiresin one rope lay, or five broken wires inone strand in one rope lay. (See page39 for a description of the componentparts of wire rope.)

(3) severe localized abrasion or scraping;(4) kinking, crushing, birdcaging, or any

other damage resulting in distortion ofthe rope structure;

(5) evidence of heat damage;(6) end attachments that are cracked,

deformed, or worn to the extent thatthe strength of the sling is substantial-ly affected;

(7) hooks should be inspected in accor-dance with ASME B30.10;

(8) severe corrosion of the rope or endattachments;

(9) multipart removal criteria for cable laidand braided slings.

Care, Use and Inspection of Wire Rope Slings - Continued

Sling BodyAllowable Broken

Wires per LayLength

Allowable BrokenStrands per Braid

Length

Cable laid 20

Less than 8part braid 20

8 part braidand more 40

33

RATED CAPACI T Y – Tons* E - EBasket Eye E - H T E - E HHitch Dimensions Thimble Hook

Rope ChokerDia. Vert. Hitch WLL**(in.) *** 60° 45° 30° A B A B Tons E R

1/4 0.65 0.48 1.3 1.1 0.91 0.65 2.0 4 .88 1.63 3/4 .89 3.345/16 1.0 0.74 2.0 1.7 1.4 1.0 2.5 5 1.06 1.88 1 .91 3.813/8 1.4 1.1 2.9 2.5 2.0 1.4 3.0 6 1.13 2.13 1-1/2 1.00 4.14

7/16 1.9 1.4 3.9 3.4 2.7 1.9 3.5 7 1.25 2.38 2 1.09 4.691/2 2.5 1.9 5.1 4.4 3.6 2.5 4.0 8 1.50 2.75 3 1.36 5.77

9/16 3.2 2.4 6.4 5.5 4.5 3.2 4.5 9 1.50 2.75 5 1.61 7.375/8 3.9 2.9 7.8 6.8 5.5 3.9 5.0 10 1.75 3.25 5 1.61 7.373/4 5.6 4.1 11 9.7 7.9 5.6 6.0 12 2.00 3.75 7-1/2 2.08 9.077/8 7.6 5.6 15 13 11 7.6 7.0 14 2.25 4.25 10 2.27 10.08

1 9.8 7.2 20 17 14 9.8 8.0 16 2.50 4.50 10 2.27 10.081-1/8 12 9.1 24 21 17 12 9.0 18 2.88 5.13 15 3.02 12.531-1/4 15 11 30 26 21 15 10.0 20 2.88 5.13 15 3.02 12.53

1-3/8 18 13 36 31 25 18 11 22 3.50 6.25 AH-22 3.02 12.531-1/2 21 16 42 37 30 21 12 24 3.50 6.25 AH-22 3.02 12.531-5/8 24 18 49 42 35 24 13 26 4.00 8.00 AH-30 3.25 14.06

1-3/4 28 21 57 49 40 28 14 28 4.50 9.00 AH-37 3.00 18.192 37 28 73 63 52 37 16 32 6.00 12.00 AH-45 3.38 20.12

2-1/4 44 35 89 77 63 44 18 36 7.00 14.00 AH-60 4.12 23.72

2-1/2 54 42 109 94 77 54 20 402-3/4 65 51 130 113 92 65 22 44

3 77 60 153 133 108 77 24 48

3-1/2 102 79 203 176 144 102 28 564 130 101 260 224 183 130 32 64

All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs. All eye and fitting dimensions in inches.* Rated Capacities Basket Hitch based on D/d Ratio of 25.Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or less than the nominal sling diameter.Rated Capacities based on design factor of 5. Horizontal sling angles less than 30° shall not be used.** Working Load Limit, based on standard carbon f it tings unless noted otherwise. *** See Choker Hitch Rated Capacity Adjustment on page 31.

6x

36

IWR

C

6

x1

9IW

RC

Flemish Eye Splice

In the standard f lemish eye mechanicalsplice, wire rope is separated into twoparts: three adjacent strands to onepart and three adjacent strands alongwith the core to the other part. The twoparts are then re - laid back in oppositedirections to form an eye and ends aresecured with a pressed metal sleeve.

SINGLE PART BODY MECHANICAL SPLICEWIRE ROPE SLINGS

LLAAMMCCOO MMaannuuffaaccttuurreedd PPrroodduucctt -- SSaammee DDaayy EEmmeerrggeennccyy SSeerrvviiccee

Hook latchesare availableupon request

6x

36

6x

19

IWR

C

RATED CAPACI T Y(Tons)

RopeDia.(in.) 60° 45° 30°

5/16 3.5 2.8 2.03/8 5.0 4.1 2.9

7/16 6.7 5.5 3.91/2 8.8 7.1 5.1

9/16 11 9.0 6.4

5/8 14 11 7.83/4 19 16 117/8 26 21 15

1 34 28 201-1/8 42 34 241-1/4 51 42 301-3/8 62 50 361-1/2 73 60 42

All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs. Horizontal slingangles of less than 30° shall not be used.

34

RATED CAPACI T Y( Tons)

Alloy Oblong Link Hook

RopeDia. WLL**(in.) 60° 45° 30° D L W Tons E R

1/4 1.1 0.91 0.65 .50 5.00 2.50 3/4 .89 3.345/16 1.7 1.4 1.0 .50 5.00 2.50 1 .91 3.813/8 2.5 2.0 1.4 .50 5.00 2.50 1-1/2 1.00 4.14

7/16 3.4 2.7 1.9 .75 5.50 2.75 2 1.09 4.691/2 4.4 3.6 2.5 .75 5.50 2.75 3 1.36 5.77

9/16 5.5 4.5 3.2 1.00 8.00 4.00 3 1.36 5.775/8 6.8 5.5 3.9 1.00 8.00 4.00 5 1.61 7.373/4 9.7 7.9 5.6 1.00 8.00 4.00 5 1.61 7.377/8 13 11 7.6 1.25 8.75 4.38 7-1/2 2.08 9.07

1 17 14 9.8 1.25 8.75 4.38 10 2.27 10.081-1/8 21 17 12 1.50 12.00 6.00 10 2.27 10.081-1/4 26 21 15 1.75 12.00 6.00 15 3.02 12.53

1-3/8 31 25 18 1.75 12.00 6.00 15 3.02 12.531-1/2 37 30 21 2.00 14.00 7.00 AH-22 3.02 12.531-5/8 42 35 24 2.00 14.00 7.00 AH-30 3.25 14.06

1-3/4 49 40 28 2.25 16.00 8.00 AH-37 3.00 18.192 63 52 37 2.50 16.00 8.00 AH-45 3.38 20.12

Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or less than the nominal sling diameter.

Rated Capacities based on design factor of 5.Horizontal sling angles of less than 30° shall not be used unless noted otherwise. ** Working Load Limit, based on standard carbon fit tings.

6x

36

IWR

C6

x1

9IW

RC

2 LEG BRIDLE

RATED CAPACI T Y( Tons)

RopeDia.(in.) 60° 45° 30°

1/4 1.7 1.4 0.975/16 2.6 2.1 1.53/8 3.7 3.0 2.2

7/16 5.0 4.1 2.91/2 6.6 5.4 3.8

9/16 8.3 6.8 4.85/8 10 8.3 5.93/4 15 12 8.47/8 20 16 11

1 26 21 151-1/8 31 26 181-1/4 38 31 22

1-3/8 46 38 271-1/2 55 45 321-5/8 63 52 37

1-3/4 74 60 42

All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs. Horizontal slingangles of less than 30° shall not be used.

6x

36

IWR

C6

x1

9IW

RC

3 LEG BRIDLE*


4 LEG BRIDLE*

*See 2 Leg Bridle chart for hook size. All hook sizes correspond with rope diameter.

Hook latchesare availableupon request

35

RATED CAPACI T Y – Tons* EyeSlipDimensionsThru Heavy

Rope Thimble ThimbleDia. Width Thick. Choker Basket(in.) of Body of Body Vert. Hitch** Hitch A B ST HT

#3/32 7/16 1/4 0.42 0.37 0.84 2 4 W-2 1/41/8 9/16 3/8 0.84 0.74 1.7 3 6 W-2 5/16

3/16 13/16 1/2 1.6 1.4 3.2 4 8 W-3 1/2

1/4 1-1/8 11/16 2.9 2.5 5.7 5 10 W-4 5/85/16 1-3/8 7/8 4.4 3.9 8.9 6 12 W-4 3/43/8 1-11/16 1 6.3 5.5 13 7 14 W-5 7/8

7/16 2 1-3/16 8.6 7.5 17 8 16 W-5 11/2 2-1/4 1-5/16 11 9.8 22 9 18 W-6 1-1/8

9/16 2-1/2 1-1/2 14 12 28 10 20 W-6 1-3/8

5/8 2-13/161-11/16 17 15 35 11 22 W-7 1-1/23/4 3-3/8 2 25 22 49 12 24 W-8 1-5/87/8 4 2-5/16 33 29 67 14 28 W-9 2

1 4-1/2 2-11/16 43 38 87 16 32 W-10 -

# Made with 7 x 19 GAC component rope.* Rated Capacities Basket Hitch based on D/d ratio of 25 times the component rope

diameter.** See Choker Hitch Rated Capacity Adjustment on page 31.Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or less

than the nominal sling diameter.Rated Capacities based on design factor of 5. Horizontal sling angles less than 30° shall not be used.All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs. All eye and fitting dimensions in inches.

XIP

IWR

C

615 Six-part f lat braided sling

BodyDia.

RATED CAPACITY - Tons*Eye Slip

ThruThimble

ST

HeavyThimble

HTVert. Choker

Hitch**

Basket Hitch

60° 45° 30° A B1/43/81/2

5/83/47/8

1 1 1/81 1/4

.501.11.9

2.84.15.4

6.98.39.9

.34

.741.3

1.92.83.7

4.75.87.0

1.02.23.7

5.58.1

11.

14.17.20.

.871.93.2

4.87.09.4

12.14.17.

.711.52.6

3.95.87.6

9.712.14.

.501.11.9

2.84.15.4

6.98.39.9

234

567

89

10

468

101214

161820

W-2W-2W-3

W-4W-4W-5

W-5W-6W-6

1/43/81/2

5/83/47/8

11 1/81 1/4

* Rated Capacities Basket Hitch Based on D/d of 10 or greater.** See Choker Hitch Rated Capacity Adjustment on page 31.Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or less than the nominal slingdiameter.Rated Capacities based on design factor of 5.Sling angles less than 30 degrees shall not be used

7x7x

77x

7x19

Cable Laid Wire Rope SlingsThese smooth and very flexible slings are made from cut lengths of cable-laid fabric that ismachine formed by laying six wire ropes in a helical pattern around a core rope. Flemish eyemechanical splices, secured by pressed metal sleeves, provide centerline pull at the eyes.


36

815 Eight-part round braided sling

Rated Capacity – Tons* EyeSlipDimensions

Thru HeavyRope ThimbleThimbleDia. Sling Choker Basket(in.) Dia. Vert. Hitch** Hitch A B ST HT

#3/32 7/16 0.56 0.49 1.1 2 4 W-2 5/16#1/8 9/16 1.1 0.98 2.2 3 6 W-2 3/83/16 13/16 2.2 1.9 4.3 4 8 W-3 1/21/4 1-1/8 3.8 3.3 7.6 5 10 W-4 3/4

5/16 1-3/8 5.9 5.2 12 6 12 W-5 13/8 1-11/16 8.5 7.4 17 7 14 W-5 1-1/8

7/16 2 11 10 23 8 16 W-6 1-1/4

1/2 2-1/4 15 13 30 9 18 W-7 1-3/89/16 2-1/2 19 16 38 10 20 W-7 1-1/25/8 2-13/16 23 20 46 11 22 W-8 1-3/4

3/4 3-3/8 33 29 66 12 24 W-9 27/8 4 45 39 89 14 28 W-10 -

1 4-1/2 58 51 116 16 32 W-10 -

XIP

IWR

C

RATED CAPACI T Y IN TONS OF 2,000 LBS*

XIP® Basket Hitch and 2-leg Bridle Eye Dimensions WeightIWRCComp. SlingRope Body Eye Eye Lbs.Dia. Dia. Choker Width Length per ft.

(inches) (inches) Vert. Hitch** Vert. 60° 45° 30° (inches) (inches) (approx)

1/4 1 4.3 3.7 8.6 7.4 6.1 4.3 6 12 15/16 1-1/4 6.6 5.8 13 12 9.4 6.6 6 12 23/8 1-1/2 9.5 8.3 19 16 13 9.5 7-1/2 13 3

7/16 1-3/4 13 11 26 22 18 13 9 18 41/2 2 17 15 34 29 24 17 10 20 59/16 2-3/16 21 19 42 37 30 21 12 24 6

5/8 2-1/2 26 23 52 45 37 26 12 24 83/4 3 37 32 74 64 52 37 15 30 117/8 3-1/2 50 44 100 87 71 50 17 34 15

1 4 65 57 130 113 92 65 20 40 201-1/8 4-1/2 82 72 164 142 116 82 22 44 251-1/4 5 101 88 201 174 142 101 25 50 31

1-3/8 5-1/2 121 106 242 210 171 121 27 54 381-1/2 6 144 126 287 249 203 144 30 60 451-5/8 6-1/2 166 146 333 288 235 166 32 64 53

1-3/4 7 193 169 386 334 273 193 35 70 611-7/8 7-1/2 219 192 438 380 310 219 37 74 70

2 8 249 218 499 432 353 249 40 80 80

2-1/4 9 311 272 622 539 440 311 45 90 1012-1/2 10 381 333 761 659 538 381 50 100 1252-3/4 11 455 398 910 788 643 455 55 110 151

3 12 536 469 1071 928 757 536 60 120 1793-1/2 14 711 622 1421 1231 1005 711 70 140 244

915 Nine-part wire rope sling

# Made with 7 x 19 GAC component rope.* Rated Capacities Basket Hitch based on D/d ratio of 20

times the component rope diameter. Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or less than the nominal sling diameter. Rated Capacities based on design factor of 5. Horizontal sling angles less than 30° shall not be used.

** See Choker Hitch Rated Capacity Adjustment on page 31.All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs. All eye and fitting dimensions in inches.

* Rated Capacities Basket Hitch based on D/d ratio of 25 times the component rope diameter.Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no larger than natural width or less than the nominal diameter. Rated Capacities based on design factor of 5. Horizontal sling angles of less than 30° shall not be used.

** See Choker Hitch Rated Capacity Adjustment on page 31. All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs.All eye and fitting dimensions in inches.

37

ASME B30.2A - 1997 Excerpt

Section 2-2.4: Rope Inspection, Replacement, andMaintenance

2-2.4.1 Rope Inspection(a) Frequent Inspection

(1) All ropes should be visually inspected by theoperator or other designated person at the startof each shift. These visual observationsshould be concerned with discovering grossdamage, such as listed below, that may be ahazard.

(a) distortion of the rope, such as kinking,crushing, unstranding, birdcaging,main strand displacement, or core pro-trusion

(b) general corrosion(c) broken or cut strands(d) number, distribution, and type of visible

broken wires [see paras. 2-2.4.2(b)(1)and (2) for further guidance]

(2) When such damage is discovered, the ropeshall either be removed from service or givenan inspection as detailed in (b) below.

(b) Periodic Inspection(1) The inspection frequency shall be determined

by a qualified person and shall be based onsuch factors as expected rope life, as deter-mined by experience on the particular installa-tion or similar installations; severity of environ-ment; percentage of capacity lifts; frequencyrates of operation; and exposure to shockloads. Inspections need not be at equal calen-dar intervals and should be more frequent asthe rope approaches the end of its useful life.

(2) Periodic inspections shall be performed by adesignated person. This inspection shall coverthe entire length of rope. The individual outerwires in the strands of the rope shall be v i s i -ble to this person during the inspection. A n ydeterioration resulting in appreciable loss oforiginal strength, such as described below,shall be noted and determination shall bemade as to whether further use of the ropewould constitute a hazard.

(a) points listed in para. 2-2.4.1(a)(b) reduction of rope diameter below nom-

inal diameter due to loss of core sup-port, internal or external corrosion, orwear of outside wires

(c) severely corroded or broken wires atend connections

(d) severely corroded, cracked, bent,worn, or improperly applied end con-nections

(3) Special care should be taken when inspecting

sections of rapid deterioration, such as the fol-lowing:

(a) sections in contact with saddles,equalizer sheaves, or other sheaveswhere rope travel is limited;

(b) sections of the rope at or near terminalends where corroded or broken wiresmay protrude;

(c) sections subject to reverse bends; (d) sections of rope that are normally hid-

den during visual inspection, such asparts passing over sheaves.

(C) In order to establish data as a basis of judgingthe proper time for replacement, a continuinginspection record should be maintained. Thisrecord should cover points of deteriorationlisted.

2-2.4.2 Rope Replacement(a) No precise rules can be given for determination of

the exact time for rope replacement, since manyvariable factors are involved. Once a rope reach-es any one of the specified removal criteria, itmay be allowed to operate to the end of the workshift, based on the judgement of a qualified per-son. The rope shall be replaced after that workshift, at the end of the day, or at the latest timeprior to the equipment being used by the nextwork shift.

(b) Removal criteria for rope replacement shall be asfollows:

(1) in running ropes, twelve randomly distributedbroken wires in one lay or four broken wires in one strand in one lay.

(2) one outer wire broken at the contact point with the core of the rope, which has worked its wayout of the rope structure and protrudes or loopsout from the rope structure.

(3) wear of one-third the original diameter of out-side individual wires.

(4) kinking, crushing, birdcaging, or any otherdamage resulting in distortion of the rope struc-ture.

(5) evidence of heat damage from any cause.(6) reductions from nominal diameter greater than

those listed below.

Care, Use and Inspection of Wire Rope on Overhead and Gantry Cranes

Rope DiameterMaximum Allowable

Reduction FromNominal Diameter

Up to 5/16 in. (8mm) 1/64 in. (0.4mm)

Over 5/16 in. to 1/2 in. (13mm) 1/32 in. (0.8mm)

Over 1-2 in. to 3/4 in. (19mm) 3/64 in. (1.2mm)

Over 3/4 in. to 1 1/8 in. (29mm) 1/16 in. (1.6mm)

Over 1 1/8 in. to 1 1/2 in. (38mm) 3/32 in. (2.4mm)

38

(C) Broken wire removal criteria cited in this volumeapply to wire rope operating on steel sheavesand drums. The user shall contact the sheave,drum, or crane manufacturer, or a qualified per-son, for broken wire removal criteria for wireropes operating on sheaves and drums made ofmaterial other than steel.

(D) Attention shall be given to end connections.Upon development of two broken wires adjacentto a socketed end connection, the rope should beresocketed or replaced. Resocketing shall not beattempted if the resulting rope length will be insuf-ficient for proper operation.

(E) Replacement rope and connections shall have astrength rating at least equal to the rating of theoriginal rope and connections specified by thehoist manufacturer. Any deviation from the origi-nal size, grade, or construction of the rope shallbe specified by a rope manufacturer, the crane orhoist manufacturer, or a qualified person.

2-2.4.3 Rope Maintenance

(A) Rope should be stored to prevent damage ordeterioration.

(B) Rope shall be unreeled or uncoiled in a mannerto avoid inducing a twist in or kinking of the rope.

(C) Before cutting rope, means shall be used to pre-vent unlaying of the strands.

(D) During installation, care should be observed toavoid dragging the rope in dirt or around objectsthat will scrape, nick, crush, or induce sharpbends.

(E) Rope should be maintained in a well-lubricatedcondition. Lubricant applied as part of a mainte-nance program shall be compatible with the orig-inal lubricant. Lubricant applied shall be of thetype that does not hinder visual inspection.Those sections of rope that are located oversheaves or otherwise hidden during inspectionand maintenance procedures require specialattention when the rope is being lubricated. Theobject of rope lubrication is to reduce internal fric-tion and to prevent corrosion.

CCoorree CChhaaiinn && CCaabbllee LLuubbrriiccaannttCore is a penetration chain and cable lubricant. Core with F-11 moly, lubricates and protectschains, cables and wire rope against friction and high temperature breakdown. It sprays onas a penetrating foam, then cures to a semi-greasy oil that wraps each strand with a protec-tive coating.

Core penetrates to displace water. Maximum penetration means complete lubrication andrust prevention even on idle cables and chains. Cables stay flexible, last longer. Use core oncranes, derricks, loading equipment, fork lifts and more.

• Penetrates cables, chains and wire ropes• Protects against friction and wear• Lubricates hard-to-reach areas• Keeps cables flexible, reduces wear• Will not sling off

39

Wireco supplies the following wire ropes as part of theirstandard product line. To help you with your wire ropeselection and ordering is the following basic explanation ofhow ropes are made, strength and weight tables, and abrief description of some of the extra value products avail-able.Call for delivery and specifications on other rope, wire andstrand products ... or with any questions.

Some basics about wire rope.Four primary factors affect strength of any wire rope, and

must be considered when specifying a rope for an applica-tion. (1) DIAMETER. (2) TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION. (3)GRADE OF ROPE. (4) CORE.

DIAMETER must fit the grooves of sheaves and hoistingdrums.

CONSTRUCTION includes number of strands, number ofwires per strand, and the arrangement of the wires in eachstrand.

DESIGN FACTORSThe nominal (or catalog) strength provided for any wire rope is notthe working load for that wire rope. The nominal strength is for a newand unused wire rope of a specific size, construction and grade andis used in conjunction with a design factor to determine the maximumload allowed on the wire rope. The Design Factor must take into con-sideration such things as type of service (fast or slow, rough orsmooth, sudden stops and starts, etc.), consequences of failure andtype of equipment.

For applications where standards or specifications do not state other-wise, a design factor of 5 should be used. In certain applications,standards and specifications allow design factors of less than 5 to beutilized. Wire rope removal criteria are often more stringent for theseapplications. Other applications, because of the nature of the lift,(such as nuclear lifts, hot ladle cranes, lifts involving personnel, etc.)have requirements for design factors greater than 5. Consult stan-dards and specifications for your specific application to determine thedesign factor required.

Tables for wire rope slings show Rated Capacity for new and unusedslings. This is the amount the sling can lift in the specified riggingconfiguration and normally employs a design factor of 5.

GRADE OF ROPE is usually Improved Plow Steel (IPS) orExtra Improved Plow Steel (XIP)® which is about 15%stronger than IPS. There are other ropes that are availablein other grades and types of steel, but generally IPS andXIP are standard. Ropes may be "Bright"–without specialfinish for the wire–or Galvanized.

CORE is the member of a wire rope about which thestrands are laid. It may be fiber, or wire strand, or an inde-pendent wire rope.

Uses of the Word "Lay."The word "lay" has three uses in rope making: (1) Thedirection strands "lay" in a rope-right or left. (2) The direc-tion wires "lay" in strands-Regular or Lang. (3) A unit oflength measure, as one "lay." See illustrations below.

In REGULAR LAY, wires in each strand arelaid opposite the direction the strand is laidin the rope—so exposed portions of wiresappear parallel to the axis of the rope.Regular Lay ropes are more stable, resist-ant to kinks and crushing than Lang Layropes.

In LANG LAY, exposed wires appear at anangle to the axis of the rope. Lang Layropes are more fatigue resistant and resistabrasion better than Regular Lay, but haveless stability. Lang Lay ropes are used onapplications where the rope is subjected torepeated bending and both ends areattached so that the rope does not rotate.

WARRANTYAny warranty, expressed or implied as to quality, performance, or fit-ness for use of wire rope products is always premised on the conditionthat the published strengths apply only to new, unused rope, that themechanical equipment on which products are used is properlydesigned and maintained, that such products are stored, handled,used, and maintained and properly inspected on a regular basis dur-ing the period of use.

Seller shall not be liable under any circumstances for consequential orincidental damages or secondary charges including but not limited topersonal injury, labor costs, a loss of profits resulting from the use ofsaid products or from said products being incorporated in or becominga component of any other product.

STANDARD ANDEXTRA VALUEWIRE ROPES

40

6 x 19 CLASSIFICATION 6 x 37 CLASSIFICATION15-26 WIRES PER STRAND 27-49 WIRES PER STRAND

XXIP XIP IPS GALV. IPS XIPDIA IWRC IWRC FC IWRC FC IWRC IWRC3/16 1.55 1.40 1.50

.059 .059 .065

1/4 3.74 3.40 2.74 2.94 2.47 2.65.116 .116 .105 .116 .105 .116

5/16 5.80 5.27 4.26 4.58 3.83 4.12.180 .180 .164 .180 .164 .180

3/8 8.30 7.55 6.10 6.56 5.49 5.90.260 .260 .236 .260 .236 .260

7/16 11.2 10.2 8.27 8.89 7.44 8.00.354 .354 .322 .354 .322 .354

1/2 14.6 13.3 10.7 11.5 9.63 10.3.462 .462 .420 .462 .420 .462

9/16 18.5 16.8 13.5 14.5 12.1 13.0.585 .585 .532 .585 .532 .585

5/8 22.7 20.6 16.7 17.9 15.0 16.1 21.7.722 .722 .656 .722 .656 .722 .74

3/4 32.4 29.4 23.8 25.6 21.4 23.0 31.01.04 1.04 .945 1.04 .945 1.04 1.06

7/8 43.8 39.8 32.2 34.6 29.0 31.1 41.91.42 1.42 1.29 1.42 1.29 1.42 1.46

1 56.9 51.7 41.8 44.9 37.6 40.4 54.41.85 1.85 1.68 1.85 1.68 1.85 1.89

1 1/8 71.5 65.0 52.6 56.5 47.3 50.8 68.52.34 2.34 2.13 2.34 2.13 2.34 2.39

1 1/4 87.9 79.9 64.6 69.4 58.1 62.5 84.02.89 2.89 2.63 2.89 2.63 2.89 2.95

1 3/8 106. 96.0 77.7 83.5 69.9 75.1 101.3.50 3.50 3.18 3.50 3.18 3.50 3.57

1 1/2 125. 114. 92.0 98.9 82.8 89.0 119.4.16 4.16 3.78 4.16 3.78 4.16 4.25

1 5/8 146. 132. 107. 115. 96.3 103. 140.4.88 4.88 4.44 4.88 4.44 4.88 4.99

1 3/4 169. 153. 124. 133. 112. 120. 161.5.67 5.67 5.15 5.67 5.15 5.67 5.79

1 7/8 192. 174. 141. 152. 127. 137.6.50 6.50 5.91 6.50 5.91 6.50

2 217. 198. 160. 172. 144. 155.7.39 7.39 6.72 7.39 6.72 7.39

2 1/8 244. 221. 179. 192. 161. 173.8.35 8.35 7.59 8.35 7.59 8.35

2 1/4 272. 247. 200. 215. 180. 193.9.36 9.36 8.51 9.36 8.51 9.36

NOMINAL STRENGTHAND WEIGHT CHART WIRE ROPEFC—Fiber Core BOLDFACE TYPE—Nominal Strength-Tons (2000 lbs.)IWRC—Independent Wire Rope Core LIGHTFACE TYPE—Approximate Weight Per Ft.-PoundsIPS—Improved Plow Steel XIP—Extra Improved Plow Steel

XXIP—Extra Extra Improved Plow Steel

41

NOMINAL STRENGTHAND WEIGHT CHART WIRE ROPEFC—Fiber Core BOLDFACE TYPE—Nominal Strength-Tons (2000 lbs.)IWRC—Independent Wire Rope Core LIGHTFACE TYPE—Approximate Weight Per Ft.-PoundsIPS—Improved Plow Steel XIP—Extra Improved Plow Steel

6X7CLASS

TUF-KOTE

8X19CLASS

10X19*ROTATIONRESISTANT

8X25*RESISTWIST

19X17*ROTATIONRESISTANT

FLEX-X 19*ROTATIONRESISTANT FLEX-X 6 FLEX-X 8

DIAIPSFC

XIPIWRC

IPSFC

XIPIWRC IPS XIP

1/4 2.64 2.35 2.51 2.77 +3.91 3.91.094 .098 .113 .113 .127 .131

5/16 4.10 3.65 3.90 4.30 +6.06 6.06.15 .153 .177 .177 .212 .218

3/8 5.86 7.55 5.24 6.63 5.59 6.15 +8.80 8.80.21 .275 .220 .265 .25 .25 .307 .32

7/16 7.93 10.2 7.09 8.97 7.58 8.33 +11.9 11.9.29 .375 .300 .360 .35 .35 .418 .41

1/2 10.3 13.3 9.23 13.3 11.6 9.85 10.8 15.3 15.3.38 .490 .392 .48 .470 .45 .45 .546 .55

9/16 13.0 16.8 11.6 16.8 14.7 12.4 13.6 19.3 19.3.48 .620 .496 .62 .595 .58 .58 .691 .70

5/8 15.9 20.6 14.3 20.6 18.1 15.3 16.8 22.7 22.7.59 .765 .612 .76 .735 .71 .71 .853 .86

3/4 22.7 29.4 20.5 29.4 25.9 21.8 24.0 32.4 32.4.84 1.10 .882 1.10 1.06 1.02 1.02 1.25 1.25

7/8 30.7 39.8 27.7 39.8 35.0 29.5 32.5 43.8 43.81.15 1.51 1.20 1.49 1.44 1.39 1.39 1.68 1.67

1 39.7 51.7 36.0 51.7 45.5 38.3 42.2 56.9 56.91.50 1.96 1.57 1.96 1.88 1.82 1.82 2.17 2.18

1 1/8 49.8 65.0 45.3 65.0 57.3 48.2 53.1 71.5 71.51.90 2.48 1.98 2.47 2.39 2.3 2.3 2.75 2.71

1 1/4 61.0 79.9 55.7 79.9 70.5 59.2 65.1 87.9 87.92.34 3.06 2.45 3.05 2.94 2.83 2.83 3.45 3.43

1 3/8 73.1 96.0 67.1 96.0 84.9 71.3 78.4 106. 106.2.84 3.71 2.96 3.69 3.56 3.43 3.43 4.33 4.25

1 1/2 86.2 114. 794 114. 100. 84.4 92.8 125. 125. 125.3.38 4.41 3.53 4.39 4.24 4.08 4.08 5.11 5.01 4.57

1 5/8 146.5.37

1 3/4 169.6.23

1 7/8 192.7.15

2 217.8.13

2 1/8 244.9.18

2 1/4 272.10.3

* These strengths apply only when a test is conducted with both ends fixed. When in use, the strength ofthese ropes will be reduced if one end is free to rotate.

+ These sizes normally made in 19 x 7 construction. All other sizes normally made in 19 x 19 construction

42

Rotation-resistant ropes can frequently provide the bestand most economical service in specific applicationswhen you choose, handle and use themproperly.

Contra-helically laid, rotation-resistantropes are different from standard ropesbecause they're designed to reducerope torque. Modes of failure and wearfor rotation-resistant ropes can differfrom those for standard ropeconstructions. The very nature of theseropes requires special handling,selection and usage not encounteredwith standard constructions. They aresusceptible to kinking, crushing andunbalancing in the form of "core pops"and "birdcages:" Use extreme care toavoid operational practices that canpossibly lead to these conditions.

There are different types of rotation-resistant ropes,categorized by their resistance to rotation. Category 1rotation-resistant rope has at least 15 outer strands, hasthree layers of strands (over a center) and has little orno tendency to rotate, or, if guided, transmits little or notorque. Category 2 rotation-resistant rope has 10 or moreouter strands, has two or more layers of strands (overa center) and has a significant resistance to rotation.Category 3 rotation-resistant rope has no more than 9outer strands, has two layers of strands (over a center)and has limited resistance to rotation. For bestperformance, Category 2 and 3 rotation resistant ropesshould not be used with a swivel. Category 1 rotation-resistant rope may be used with a swivel.

Because rotation-resistant ropes are special, thereare separate design, maintenance, inspection andremoval criteria established for them in many industryregulations and standards. Rotation-resistant ropesmust be replaced when you see two randomly distributedcrown wire breaks in six rope diameters - or four randomlydistributed crown wire breaks in 30 rope diameters. Ifany significant reduction in diameter is found in a shortlength of a rotation-resistant rope, the rope needs to bereplaced. Rotation-resistant ropes must be used witha minimum design factor of 5.0.

Flex-X® 35.

Flex-X 35, a Category 1 rotation-resistant rope, features a uniquedesign that minimizes the torqueand rotation of the rope at normalload ranges of zero to 20% of therope's minimum breaking force

(MBF). In addition, Flex-X 35 is engineered to give youmaximum strength per diameter while also achieving

superior fatigue resistance. These factors combine togive you the maximum service life when you have long

block falls or load control is critical.Unlike other rotation-resistant ropes,swivels can be used in your system withFlex-X 35.

Flex-X® 19.

Flex-X 19, aCategory 2rotation-resistantrope, is made from19 strands. Sixstrands are laidaround a corestrand in one

direction, and then 12 strands are laid around this firstoperation in the opposite direction. Because of its tightlycompacted smooth design, Flex-X 19 offers morecrushing resistance than standard 19x7 rope, higherstrength-to-diameter, resistance to bending fatigue,exceptional stability, reduced wear to sheaves anddrums, and improved handling, operating and spoolingcharacteristics.

Flex-X 19 has also demonstrated greater fatigueresistance to substantially cut rope expense and extendservice life. It's ideal for multi-part hoist lines whereveryou encounter spooling problems, drum crushing, blocktwisting or have fast line speeds.

19 x 7 and 8 x 25 Resistwist® rope.

In an application where a single-parthoist rope is used to lift a free load- or where rotation-resistantproperties are essential for ropeperformance - the 19x7 can beused. Its Category 2 rotation-resistant characteristic is achievedby laying six strands around a corestrand in one direction, then laying12 strands around the first operation in the oppositedirection. When the rope is intension, opposing rotational forcesare created between the inner andouter layers.

In a multi-part wire rope systemwhere the blocks have a tendencyto twist - but doesn't require thedegree of rotation-resistantproperties found in a 19x7 rope - the8x25 Resistwist rope has found successful application.It is a Category 3 rotation-resistant rope.

Rotation-resistant ropes.

Flex-X 35

Flex-X 19

19 x 17

8 x 25FW

43

Flex-X® 6 wire ropes.

Most applications for wire rope are extremely demanding.Wire rope must resist crushing, bending fatigue and

abrasion. For example, clamshellclosing lines must resist bendingfatigue and boom hoists aresubject to pressures that causecrushing. Overhead hoists test thestability and strength of a wirerope. All drum-related applicationsdemand a rope that will spool andoperate smoothly and dependably.

Flex-X 6 users receive superior performance andincreased service life in many applications comparedto the ropes they had previously employed. Whencompared to conventional 6 strand ropes, Flex-X 6ropes provide greater surface area and more steel pergiven diameter, which increases rope stability andstrength, too. This results in longer service life and lesssheave and drum wear.

Flex-X vs. standard 6 x 26 WS.

Drum scrubbingbetween the lead lineand the previous wrapis reduced. The smoothcontact creates lessinterference, less metalloss and wiredeformation. (right)

The increasedsurface area of Flex-Xcan be seen in the comparison of the contact points ofa standard 6 x 26 WS (below left) and Flex-X (belowright).

Flex-X® 9 wire ropes.

Designed to satisfy drum crushing challenges, Flex-X9 features compacted strands and swaging for extra drumcrushing resistance and increased stability. Its high-density strands deliver extra strength, surprisingbendability and a stubborn resistance to abrasion. Inaddition, the high-density, compacted strands minimizenicking at strand-to-strand contact points.

And Flex-X 9 makes inspection easier for you.

While swaged ropes may develop internal broken wiresbefore they do externally, Flex-X 9's design minimizesinternal stresses, making external wire breaks more likelyto develop first.

TUF-KOTE®/PFV® wire ropes.

TUF-KOTE/PFV, the plastic-impregnated wire rope,has proven in many applications to give you longerservice life and cleaner operation than conventionalwire ropes. On the inside, you'll find our top-of-the-linewire rope that effectively withstands the tough pressuresof your demanding jobs. On the outside, you'll see aspecially engineered polymer plastic designed toovercome even harsher conditions. This polymer isapplied at high pressure to force the material into therope, filling the valleys of the strands. TUF-KOTE/PFVcushions the strands, distributes internal stresses, keepsin wire rope lubricant and keeps out dirt and debris.

TUF-KOTE/PFV doesn't melt or soften from theheat of your normal operating temperatures. It's alsovirtually unaffected by sunlight and cold weather. Theresult is longer service life from your wire rope.

TUF-KOTE/PFV also helps shed water and dirt,giving you a clean, smooth surface to make it easy topass over sheaves and onto drums. This smooth surfaceworks to clean and polish as it extends the service lifeof your sheaves and drums. That reduces your cleanuprequirements and your maintenance costs.

With one strand and part of the polymer plastic removed,you can see how deep the polymer penetrates into therope. You can also see how the polymer gives you uniformand continuous support for all strands throughout thelength of the rope.

WRCA offers many other types of wire rope for toughapplications. Contact LAMCO for more information onthe following WRCA products:

• 7-Flex® wire ropes • TUF-MAX® shovel ropes• Tuffy® 8 Hoist & Drag ropes

Contact LAMCO for more details309-764-7400 • 800-447-1885

Premium value ropes.

Flex-X 6

44

This category includes wire rope sizes as small as 1/32” in diameter. They’re used in a vari-ety of applications, including control cables, window and door closures, different kinds ofremote control systems, boat rigging and many others. They can be made of galvanized orstainless steel aircraft wire.

These ropes are produced for the most common applications in the market. Utility grade ismade to RR-W-410. These cables have historically been called “aircraft” cable. Since mostapplications do not require that designation, we are changing the name to “utility” cable. Wecan provide these ropes to MIL-DTL-83420 “aircraft” specifications on request. They requirespecial lubrication, internal marking and fatigue testing.

Specialty Small Ropes

GALVANIZED OR STAINLESS STEEL

DIAMETERIN INCHES

APPROXIMATEWEIGHT

PER 100 FEETIN POUNDS

NOMINALSTRENGTH IN POUNDS

GALVANIZED STAINLESS

1/163/327/64

1/85/323/16

7/321/4

9/32

5/1611/32

3/8

.751.712.21

2.914.516.51

8.6111.0113.91

17.3120.7124.31

4801,0001,400

2,0002,8004,200

5,6007,0008,000

9,80012,50014,400

480920

1,260

1,7602,4003,700

5,0006,4007,800

9,000—

12,000

GALVANIZED, TINNED, OR STAINLESS STEEL

DIAMETERIN INCHES

APPROXIMATEWEIGHT

PER 100 FEETIN POUNDS

NOMINALSTRENGTH IN POUNDS

GALVANIZED STAINLESS

1/323/641/16

5/643/327/64

1/85/323/16

7/321/4

9/32

5/163/8

.16

.42

.75

1.11.62.2

2.84.36.2

8.310.613.4

16.723.6

110270480

650920

1,260

1,7002,6003,700

4,8006,1007,600

9,20013,100

110270480

650920

1,260

1,7002,4003,700

4,8006,1007,600

9,00012,000

7 x 19

7 x 7

*

* 1/32 is made in 3 x 7 construction

45

As LsMax. Approx. After After

Rope Swage Swage Dia. C D E F Pin Dia. Length

1/4 .69 .38 1.50 1.38 .69 .46 4.255/16 .81 .47 1.75 1.62 .81 .71 5.503/8 .81 .47 1.75 1.62 .81 .71 5.50

7/16 1.00 .56 2.00 2.00 1.00 .91 7.001/2 1.00 .56 2.00 2.00 1.00 .91 7.00

9/16 1.25 .68 2.25 2.38 1.19 1.16 8.50

5/8 1.25 .68 2.25 2.38 1.19 1.16 8.503/4 1.50 .78 2.75 2.75 1.38 1.42 10.507/8 1.75 .94 3.25 3.13 1.62 1.55 12.25

1 2.00 1.06 3.75 3.69 2.00 1.80 14.001-1/8 2.25 1.19 4.25 4.06 2.25 2.05 15.751-1/4 2.50 1.22 4.75 4.50 2.50 2.30 17.25

1-3/8 2.50 1.38 5.25 5.00 2.50 2.56 19.001-1/2 3.00 1.69 5.75 5.50 2.75 2.81 20.751-3/4 3.50 2.11 6.75 6.69 3.50 3.06 24.25

2 4.00 2.37 8.00 8.00 3.75 3.56 28.25

Open Swaged Socket

As LsMax. Approx. After After

Rope Swage Swage Dia. C D E Dia. Length

1/4 1.38 .75 .50 .46 3.755/16 1.62 .88 .67 .71 4.753/8 1.62 .88 .67 .71 4.75

7/16 2.00 1.06 .86 .91 6.001/2 2.00 1.06 .86 .91 6.00

9/16 2.38 1.25 1.13 1.16 7.75

5/8 2.38 1.25 1.13 1.16 7.753/4 2.88 1.44 1.31 1.42 9.257/8 3.12 1.69 1.50 1.55 10.75

1 3.63 2.06 1.75 1.80 12.251-1/8 4.00 2.31 2.00 2.05 13.501-1/4 4.50 2.56 2.25 2.30 15.25

1-3/8 5.00 2.56 2.25 2.56 16.751-1/2 5.50 2.81 2.50 2.81 18.001-3/4 6.25 3.56 3.00 3.06 21.25

2 7.25 3.81 3.25 3.56 24.25

Closed Swaged Socket

RATEDCAPACI T Y

IN TONS OF2,000 LBS*

RopeDia.

(inches) XIP® XXIP®

1/4 0.68 0.745/16 1.1 1.23/8 1.5 1.7

7/16 2.0 2.21/2 2.7 2.9

9/16 3.4 3.7

5/8 4.1 4.53/4 5.9 6.57/8 8.0 8.8

1 10 111-1/8 13 141-1/4 16 18

1-3/8 19 211-1/2 23 251-3/4 31 34

2 40 432-1/4 49 542-1/2 60 66

Swaged Socket Assemblies

6x

19

and

6x

36

XIP

IWR

C

Mobile Crane Pendants - Mechanically Swaged

* These sockets are not interchangeablewith zinc-poured sockets.

All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs. All eye and fitting dimensions in inches.


Pin Dia.

E

**

46

HOW TO ORDER—When ordering, please consider the following:• The number of completed assemblies required. • Diameter of the wire rope.• Wire rope classification or construction. • Rope material.• Rated capacity required.• Length as described by reference points • Fitting material required.• For threaded fittings, specify the type, length and hand ofthread.• For terminals such as forks and eyes, please specify howthey should be positioned relative to each other.How to measure reference points for specifying yourassemblies. Here are several examples of various assemblies. The dottedvertical lines indicate the reference points. Please specifythese reference points when you order. If you need a cus-tomized assembly not shown here, please call us and we'llsupply what you need.

Tuf-GripWWRRCCAA

47

FIELD INSTALLED WIRE ROPE FITTINGSQUICK AND EASY• No special tools required for installation• No heat, chemicals, or pressure involved in assembly• On-site assembly can be accomplished in minutes

VERSATILE• Reusable components• Various platings and finishes available• Large variety of designs• Custom designs available• For ropes from 1/16 to 1-1/2 inches in diameter

48

Dimensions in inches

49

50

WIRE ROPE PLUGS

51


52


53


54


55

56

DIMENSIONS & DATANewco

No.SLING SIZE DIMENSIONS WT.

LBS.SINGLE 8 PTS. 6 PTS. A B C D E F GW-2W-3W-4

5/16 - 3/81/2 - 9/165/8 - 3/4

3/32 - 1/83/161/4

3/32 - 1/83/16

1/4 - 5/16

2 1/82 3/83 3/8

4 1/84 3/86 5/8

7/165/8

13/16

13/161

1 5/16

9/165/85/8

3 1/44

5 3/8

5 1/46

8 1/2

1.31.53.4

W-5W-6W-7

7/8 - 11 1/8 - 1 1/41 3/8 - 1 1/2

5/163/8

7/16-1/2

3/87/161/2

3 3/44 3/8

5

7 1/88 3/89 1/2

1 1/81 3/81 5/8

1 5/81 7/82 1/8

7/81

1 1/4

6 1/47 1/88 1/8

9 3/811

12 1/2

5.58.610

W-8W-9W-10W-11

1 5/8 - 1 3/41 7/8 - 2

2 1/8 - 2 1/42 1/2 - 3

9/165/83/4

7/8-1

5/83/4

7/8 - 11 1/8

6 3/48

8 1/29

11 3/414 1/215 1/218 1/2

1 13/162 1/82 1/23 3/16

2 9/163 1/43 3/4

4 11/16

1 7/161 7/8

22 1/2

9 3/81313

15 3/4

14 3/419 1/420 3/824 3/4

17.65365126

DIMENSIONS & DATANewco

No.ROPE SIZE

SINGLE8 PTS. BRAID

ROPE DIA.6 PTS. BRAID

ROPE DIA. A B C D E F G H APPROX.WT. LBS.

6C8C9C

3/8-7/161/2-9/16

5/8

3/32-1/83/16

1/83/161/4

22 1/42 3/4

11 1/81 3/8

27/321

1 5/32

15/325/8

23/32

2 1/162 1/2

3

3/81/2

19/32

1/21/29/16

3/81/2

19/32

.50

.751.2

10C14C16C

3/47/81

1/4

5/16

5/16

3/8

3 1/44 1/24 1/2

1 5/82 1/42 1/4

1 5/161 7/161 9/16

13/1615/161 1/16

3 1/24 5/164 19/32

5/83/4

13/16

5/811/163/4

5/83/47/8

2.03.33.75

18C20C22C24C

1 1/81 1/4

1 3/8-1 1/21 5/8

3/87/161/29/16

7/161/29/165/8

4 7/85 1/2

66 1/2

2 7/162 3/4

33 1/4

1 13/162 1/162 1/42 1/2

1 1/41 7/161 5/81 3/4

5 1/325 3/46 1/4

6 11/16

7/815/161 1/161 1/8

7/815/161 1/81 1/4

11 1/81 3/161 1/4

5.06.758.012.0

28C32C40C48C

1 3/4-1 7/82

2 1/4-2 1/22 3/4-3

5/83/4-7/8

1

3/41

1 1/8

77

8 1/210

3 1/23 1/24 1/4

5

2 15/163 3/164 1/84 7/8

1 15/162 3/162 7/83 3/8

7 3/87 13/169 5/811 1/4

1 1/41 1/21 5/81 3/4

1 3/81 1/21 7/82 1/4

1 1/21 5/8

22 1/2

16.621.839.067.0

T H I M B L E S

Slip-Thru ThimbleNEWCO SLIP-THRU THIMBLES are designed to allow passageof an identical thimble through its eye. This is a necessity whena regular sling is used as a choker sling. SLIP-THRU THIMBLESalso prevent the eye of the sling from mashing together and thetop of the eye wearing excessively. The generous inside dimensionsallow the thimbles to fit large crane hooks. Rope retention earsare tapered so they can be bent or peened over wire rope.

Crescent ThimbleNEWCO CRESCENT THIMBLES are designed to protectthe bearing surface of a loop where a large dimension loopis necessary. The ears are tapered so that they can be bentor peened over wire rope. Standard-Laid Rope Size 3/8”to 3”.

57

DIMENSIONS & DATA (in.)THIMBLE

SIZEROPESIZE A B C D E F G WT.

LBS.3/81/25/8

3/81/25/8

33 1/23 3/4

2 27/323 3/8

3 13/16

1 7/161 5/81 3/4

7/169/1611/16

13/161 1/161 3/16

7/1619/323/4

5/83/4

15/16

0.61.01.5

3/47/81

3/47/81

4 1/84 3/45 7/16

4 3/164 13/165 3/8

1 7/82 1/82 3/8

13/1615/161 1/8

1 5/161 9/161 13/16

7/81 1/161 3/16

1 1/161 1/41 3/8

2.03.24.7

DIMENSIONS & DATAPARTNO.

ROPESIZE A B C D E F G H J K W WT.

LBS. W.L.L.

302303304

3/8-1/25/83/4

2 3/83 7/84 7/8

3 3/45 3/46 3/4

2 1/82 5/82 5/8

2 1/42 3/4

3

5/813/1615/16

1/29/1611/16

7/87/8

1 1/4

11 1/81 1/4

13/1615/161 1/16

2 1/82 1/4

3

2 5/83

3 1/2

2 1/44 1/45 3/8

340051008000

305306

7/81

5 3/85 5/8

7 1/28 3/8

3 1/83 1/2

3 3/83 7/8

11 1/8

13/167/8

1 3/81 1/2

1 1/21 1/2

1 1/41 1/2

3 1/43 1/2

44 1/8

7 1/212

1000015000

Standard Choker HooksNEWCO STANDARD CHOKER HOOKS arealways clean and smooth castings to avoidcutting and chafing of valuable wire ropeslings. NEWCO STANDARD CHOKERHOOKS can be attached to the end of a slinginstead of themain body. Thisfeature allows themain part of thesling to be free of

Slip-On ThimbleFlattening or pulling together of the eyes under heavy loads iseliminated as is severe wear at the top of the eye. It isparticularly recommended to prevent abrasion when a choker slingis used by slipping one eye through another. Easily installed.

W

58


192-193)

59


60

61

Rated Sling Standard After SwageUse Model Capacity Dia. Length Dim. (in) WT.With Number Tons (in) (ft) A B (lbs)

LS-3/4 4.9 3/4 5 3.25 1.55 9LS-7/8 6.6 7/8 5 3.86 1.80 14LS-1 8.5 1 5 4.36 2.05 19LS-1 1/8 10 1 1/8 5 4.81 2.30 26LS-1 1/4 13 1 1/4 5 5.42 2.56 33

PC-1 1/2 LS-1 1/2 18 1 1/2 5 6.52 3.00 52

FEATURES:• An efficient way to handle concrete water and sewer pipes.• The Caldwell “Tea Cup” Carrier will save you time and money.• Three sizes available, to handle from 3/4” to 1-1/2” cable, and lift

up to 15 tons.• Optional “Spoon” handle allows the “Tea Cup” to be guided into

small diameter pipes.• Designed and manufactured to ASME B30.20 and B30.9.

SPECIFICATIONS - Model PC

1. Drop pipe carrierlifting sling throughhole in pipe.

2. Align and insert “teacup” pipe carrierinto lifting sling.

3. Lift pipe

Rated Dimensions in InchesModel Capacity WT.Number Tons A B C D E F G (lbs)

PC-3/4* 6.6 5 9/16 2 2 1/8 1 1/8 4 11/16 1 7/8 1 1/8 9PC-1 13 6 2 1/2 2 5/8 1 3/8 5 5/8 2 1 3/8 12

PC-1 1/2 18 8 3 3 1/4 1 5/8 7 5/8 3 1 5/8 22

PC-3/4 only, musthave lip on handle.

For “Spoon”handle pleaseorder SH-3/4

Lip

*Has standard “lip” for use with the “Spoon Handle”.

Model PC – “Tea Cup” Pipe Carrier

SPECIFICATIONS - Model LSTea Cup Lifting Sling Option - LS

PC-3/4

PC-1

Operation

62

LAMCO

63

64

65

66

STANDARD FEATURES

• Quick release, zinc plated, rope retention pin meets OSHA requirements for rope retention. Cannot be completely removed from block to avoid pin loss.

• Johnson J-Latch™ heavy duty, steel, lockable,spring loaded latch meets OSHA personnel liftingrequirements. (P. 195)

• The Johnson J-Latch™ provides a fast hookdeformation inspection point.

• Available tonnage capacities from 5-300 tons. Larger capacities available upon request.

• Quick Reeve™ upright design rests on its own hook for a stable base while reeving.

• No bulky, drop down, trap door to handle ordamage.

• Wire rope end fitting will pass through block without removal from wire rope.

Johnson Crane Blocks - Quick Reeve

Available in sizes rangingfrom 3” to 108”, and over 250standard models, JohnsonWire Rope Sheavesare industry provenwith over100,000 in use.Cost efficientcustom designsare availablewith no up fronttooling orpattern chargesand no premiumfor small orderquantities.16” to 108”O.D. sheaves haveflame-hardened,precision groovesfor slow, even wearand long rope life.(Less than 16” O.D. flame-hardenedupon request.) Theintegrity of Johnson’s singledisc forged steel constructionprovides a sheave withsuperior strength.

Johnson WIRE ROPE SHEAVES

STANDARD FEATURES• 3 through 108 inch sheave diameters• 1/4 through 3 inch wire rope sizes• 4 to 1 design factor• Cast iron, ductile iron, cast steel, ForgeFabsteel types

OPTIONAL FEATURES(Price on Application)• Custom designs to customer shaft, bearingmounting, hub, sheave O.D. or wire rope sizerequirement• Electroplate inorganic zinc compound and othercorrosion resistant coatings available• Hub-located grease fittings• Modifications as required to API and other applicableindustry standards• Special shafts• AISE No. 6 specifications• Cold weather properties

67


(P. 192)

(P. 194)

68

† US-422T Terminator Style

(P. 192)

69

McKissick sheaves come in a variety of sizes to suit your specific applications. For applications that require unique specificationsCrosby can make minor modifications to many of the sheaves at a reasonable charge. Crosby can also custom design and manu-facture sheaves to your exact requirements. For special requirements of custom designed sheaves, furnish the following importantinformation:

(C)(D)

(A)

(B)

For more information contact LAMCO

150°

A B C

Using a gauge, A is correct.B is too tight and C is too loose.

How to check for worn sheaves

70



72

MADE IN U.S.A.

A higher strength heat treated alloy steel chain, CMgrade 80 Herc-Alloy 800 chain is primarily used as asling component for overhead lifting, but can be used inrigging and tie down applications where a lighter weighthigh strength chain is desirable. Recommended for over-head lifting by NACM, ANSI, & OSHA.

CM grade 80 Herc-Alloy 800 chain slings and attach-ments are manufactured from special analysis alloysteel, engineered for a superior combination ofstrength, lightness and durability.

All Herc-Alloy 800 chain and attachments are black finish and/or color coded orange for easy, permanentidentification. The chain is embossed with the grade(HA-800) and trace code.

Chain slings are used primarily for overhead lifting andare generally used in conjunction with a crane or sometype of lifting device. Standard sling configurations con-sist of chain branches which are affixed on one endto a master link or ring with some type of attachment, usually a hook, affixed to the opposite end.

Types of chain slingsIn describing the type, the following symbols should beused. If attachments are other than standard, givedetailed specifications.

First symbol (basic type):S — Single chain sling.C — Single choker chain sling with a standard end link

on each end, no hooks.D — Double branch chain sling. T — Triple branch chain sling. Q — Quadruple branch chain sling.

Second symbol (type of master link or end link): O — Oblong master link of standard dimensions. P — Pear shaped master link (available on request,

not a standard item).

Third symbol (type of hook): S — Sling hook F — Foundry hook G — Grab hook L — Latchlok

Sling tags are coded with numerals 1 through 4 to reflectnumber of branches in sling. Additional coding is definedas follows:

AS — Adjustable single SB — Single basketES — Endless single ED — Endless double

SAL — Single adjustable loop DAL — Doubleadjustable

AD — Adjustable double loopDB — Double basket

Approx. Approx.no. weight Feet

Inside Inside links per 100 ft. Product UPC Product UPC per( in.) (mm) length width per ft. (lbs.) code 43927- code 43927- drum

7/32 15.5 1.671 1.296 17.9 11,44.7 607020 20038 677010 20040 800

9/32 17.0 1.868 1.395 13.8 11,74.2 607028 20246 677011 20254 500

5/16 18.0 1.05 1.4540 11.4100 ,1..90.6 607031 20551 — — —

3/8 10.0 1.222 1.572 19.8 1,145.9 607037 20717 677013 20725 500

1/2 13.0 1.404 1.720 18.5 1,257.7 607050 21038 677015 21045 300

5/8 16.0 1.733 1.854 16.9 1,387.3 607062 21271 677016 21279 200

3/4 20.0 2.160 1.052 15.5 1,622.0 607075 21437 677017 21441 100

7/8 22.0 2.250 1.137 15.3 1,776.4 607087 21551 677018 21554 100

1 26.0 2.664 1.348 14.5 1,995.4 607101 21626 677019 21630 100

11/4 32.0 3.250 1.656 13 .7 1,570.9 607128 21692 677070 21695 190

CM Herc-Alloy 800 chain sizes and working load limits

Chain size

Nominaldimensions (inch-

es) Foot Drum

( in.) (mm)

7/32 15.5 12,100 113,600 113,000 12,100 115,450 114,450 113,150

9/32 17.0 13,500 116,100 114,900 13,500 119,100 117,400 115,200

5/16 18.00 04,500 117,800 116,300 14,500 111,700 119,450 116,750

3/8 10.0 17,100 112,300 110,000 17,100 118,400 115,100 110,600

1/2 13.0 12,000 120,800 117,000 12,000 131,200 125,500 118,000

5/8 16.0 18,100 131,300 125,600 18,100 147,000 138,400 127,100

3/4 20.0 28,300 149,000 140,000 28,300 173,500 160,000 142,400

7/8 22.0 34,200 159,200 148,400 34,200 188,900 172,500 151,300

1 26.0 47,700 182,600 167,400 47,700 123,900 101,200 171,500

11/4 32.0 72,300 125,200 102,200 72,300 187,800 153,400 108,400

Working load limits (lbs.)

Single Double Triple & quad

90° 60° 45° 30° 60° 45° 30°

Chain size

GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY 800 CHAIN SLINGS

73

GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY 800®_—WELDED CHAIN SLINGS

Care, use and inspection

The life and strength of CM Herc-Alloy 800 chain slingsdepend on proper inspection, maintenance and use. Foradditional information, refer to ANSI B30.9 and OSHA1910.184.

CareChain requires careful storage and regular maintenance.• Store chains on an A frame in a clean, dry place.• To avoid corrosion, oil chains before prolonged storage.• Do not heat CM Herc-Alloy 800 chain; this will alter its

thermal treatment.• Do not plate or change surface finish of chain. Contact

LAMCO for special requirements.

UseTo protect both operators and materials, observe theseprecautions when using chain slings:• Before use, inspect chain and attachments following

the instructions under “Inspection” below.• Do not exceed working load limit. Any of the factors

listed here can reduce the load the chain will hold:• Acceleration in rate of load application—can produce

dangerous overloading.• Variation in the angle of the load to the sling—as

the angle decreases, the working load of the sling will increase.

• Twisting, knotting or kinking—subjects links to unusu-al loading, decreasing the working load of the sling.

• Use for purposes other than those for which slingsare intended—can reduce the working load of thesling.

• Free chain of all twists, knots and kinks.• Center load in hook(s); hook latches must not support

load.

• Avoid sudden jerks when lifting and lowering.• Balance all loads; avoid tipping of loads.• Use pads around sharp corners.• Do not drop load on chains.• Match the size and working load limit of attachments

such as hooks or rings to the size and working loadlimit of the chain.

• For overhead lifting, use only alloy chain and attach-ments.

InspectionIt is important both to inspect chain slings regularly and to keep a record of all chain inspections. Follow thisguide for such an inspection system.• Before inspecting, clean chains with a non-acid/non-

caustic solvent so that marks, nicks, wear and otherdefects are visible.

• Inspect each link for these conditions:• Twists or bends.• Nicks or gouges.• Excessive wear at bearing points.• Stretch.• Distorted or damaged master links, coupling links or

attachments, especially spread in throat opening ofhooks.

• Mark plainly with paint each link or attachment showingany of the conditions listed here to indicate rejection;remove from service until properly repaired.

CM Herc-Alloy 800 chain and attachments conversion tableChain size Hook size designation and markings

Fraction (in.) Decimal (in.) Metric (mm) Sling Grab Foundry Latchlok

7/32 1.218 15.5 HA22 10M — —

9/32 1.281 17.0 HA220 HA1 HA498 9/32

3/8 1.394 10.0 HA250 HA3 HA499 3/8

1/2 1.512 13.0 HA280 HA5 HA500 1/2

5/8 1.630 16.0 HA290 HA6 HA501 5/8

3/4 1.787 20.0 HA300 HA7 HA502 3/4

7/8 1.875 22.0 HA320 HA8 HA503 —

1 1.024 26.0 HA330 HA9 HA504 —

11/4 1.260 32.0 HA350 HA11 HA505 —

How to select and order the proper chain sling

1. Determine the weight and configuration of the load(s)to be lifted.

2. Determine the type of chain sling required according toweight and configuration.

3. Determine the size of the body chain according to the working load limits. Be sure to take into considera-tion the effect of the required angle. *Working load limit: The working load limit is the maxi-mum load in pounds which should ever be applied to chain, even when chain is new, and when load isuniformly applied in direct tension to a straight lengthof chain.

4. Determine the reach required to give the desiredangle. The reach is measured from the upper bearingsurface of the master link to the bearing surface of thelower attachment.

If chain slings are to be used in pairs and are to bematched for reach, please indicate when ordering.

5. Be sure to specify type, sizeand reach when ordering chainslings. For specifications onadditional hooks, attachmentsand accessories, see the follow-ing pages.

6. Product UPC code representsthe last five digits of the com-plete UPC code. Each productUPC code must be preceded byCM Identification No. 43927 inorder to obtain complete UPCcode number. Example: 43927-00000.


* WARNING• Do not exceed working load limit.• Use only alloy chain and attach-

ments for overhead lifting.

74


Wear allowances of CM Herc-Alloy 800 chainMeasure cross section at link ends to determine wear. If chain is worn to less than the minimum allowable thickness, remove from service.

Chain size Minimum allowable thickness (T)

Inches mm Inches mm

7/32 15.5 0.185 14.7

9/32 17.0 0.239 16.1

3/8 10.0 0.335 18.5

1/2 13.0 0.435 11.1

5/8 16.0 0.536 13.6

3/4 20.0 0.669 17.0

7/8 22.0 0.744 18.9

1 26.0 0.870 22.1

11/4 32.0 1.071 27.2

Note: For sizes not listed, the Minimum Allowable Thicknesscan be calculated as 85% of the original material diameter.

Use of chain under extreme temperature conditionsWhen the chain itself is subjected to temperatures shownhere, working load limits should be reduced as indicated.

PermanentTemperature Working load limit reduction inof chain (°F) while at temperature1 working load limit2

<-40 not recommended none

-40 to 400 100% none

>400 to 600 0.9 none

>600 to 750 75% 10%

>750 not recommended Contact LAMCO

1 While chain is at temperature shown in first column.2 When chain is used at room temperature after having been

subjected to temperatures shown in first column.

NOTE: HAMMERLOK COUPLING LINKS MUST NOT BESUBJECTED TO TEMPERATURES EXCEEDING 300o F.

IdentificationThe identification tag found on the master coupling linkof each chain sling contains this information:• Grade • Size • Reach• Type • Serial number• Working load limit (at a specific angle of lift)

Care, use and inspection (continued)

Hooks

Product code

CM single chain slings - Grade 80

**Latch is available as an option. See page 87.

WorkingChain load Oblong Hammerlok Clevlok Cradle size limit master coupling Cradle Clevlok Grab Sling Foundry(in.) (lbs.)* link link Grab sling** Latchlok (eye) (eye)** (eye)

7/32 82,100 554931 664220 — — — 559318 458544 —

9/32 83,500 554932 664228 659222 658338 674514 559325 458722 474498

3/8 87,100 554935 664241 659225 658339 674518 559337 458725 474499

1/2 12,000 554938 664250 659228 658340 674524 559350 458728 474500

5/8 18,100 554938 664262 659229 658341 674530 559362 458729 474501

3/4 28,300 554940 664275 659430 658342 674530 559575 458730 474502

7/8 34,200 554943 664287 — — — 559387 458732 474503

1 47,700 554946 664300 — — — 559100 458733 474504

11/4 72,300 554949 664325 — — — 559124 458735 474505




75

Chain Oblong Hammerlok Clevlok Cradlesize master coupling Cradle Clevlok Grab Sling Foundry(in.) 60° 45° 30° link link Grab sling** Latchlok (eye) (eye)** (eye)

7/32 113,600 113,000 12,100 554931 664220 — — — 559318 458544 —

9/32 116,100 114,900 13,500 554932 664228 659222 658338 674514 559325 458722 474498

3/8 112,300 110,000 17,100 554935 664241 659225 658339 674518 559337 458725 474499

1/2 120,800 117,000 12,000 554938 664250 659228 658340 674524 559350 458728 474500

5/8 131,300 125,600 18,100 554940 664262 659229 658341 674530 559362 458729 474501

3/4 149,000 140,000 28,300 554943 664275 659430 658342 674530 559575 458730 474502

7/8 159,200 148,400 34,200 554946 664287 — — — 559387 458732 474503

1 182,600 167,400 47,700 554949 664300 — — — 559100 458733 474504

11/4 125,200 102,200 72,300 554951 664325 — — — 559124 458735 474505

CM double chain slings - Grade 80

Working load limit (lbs.)*

Hooks

Product code


MADE IN U.S.A.

OblongChain master Hammerlok Clevlok Cradlesize link sub- coupling Cradle Clevlok Grab Sling Foundry(in.) 60° 45° 30° assembly link Grab sling** Latchlok (eye) (eye)** (eye)

7/32 115,450 114,450 113,150 554974 664220 — — — 559318 458544 —

9/32 119,100 117,400 115,200 554975 664228 659222 658338 674514 559325 458722 474498

3/8 118,400 115,100 110,600 554976 664241 659225 658339 674518 559337 458725 474499

1/2 131,200 125,500 118,000 554977 664250 659228 658340 674524 559350 458728 474500

5/8 147,000 138,400 127,100 554978 664262 659229 658341 674530 559362 458729 474501

3/4 173,500 160,000 142,400 554979 664275 659430 658342 674530 559575 458730 474502

7/8 188,900 172,500 151,300 554980 664287 — — — 559387 458732 474503

1 123,900 101,200 171,500 554981 664300 — — — 559100 458733 474504

11/4 187,800 153,400 108,400 554983 664325 — — — 559124 458735 474505


Working load limit (lbs.)*

Hooks

Product code

CM triple & quad chain slings - Grade 80




76

MADE IN U.S.A.

Single DoubleWorking Working Oblong

Chain load limit Oblong Hammerlok Clevlok Cradle load limit master Hammerlok Clevlok Cradle size (lbs.)* master coupling Cradle Grab (lbs.)* link sub- coupling Cradle Grab(in.) 60° link link Grab (eye) 60° assembly link Grab (eye)

7/32 113,600 554931 664220 — 559318 115,450 554974 664221 — 559318

9/32 116,100 554932 664228 659222 559325 119,100 554975 664228 659222 559325

3/8 112,300 554935 664241 659225 559337 118,400 554976 664241 659225 559337

1/2 120,800 554938 664250 659228 559350 131,200 554977 664250 659228 559350

5/8 131,300 554940 664262 659229 559362 147,000 554978 664262 659229 559362

3/4 149,000 554943 664275 659430 559575 173,500 554979 664275 659430 559575

7/8 159,200 554946 664287 — 559387 188,900 554980 664287 — 559387

1 182,600 554949 664300 — 559100 123,900 554981 664300 — 559100

11/4 125,200 554951 664325 — 559124 187,800 554983 664325 — 559124

CM adjustable single & double loop chain slings

Product code

Hooks

Product code

Hooks

Master Diameter Inside Inside Sub- Diameter Inside Insidelink material width length assembly material width length

(in.) (mm) Single Double number A B C number A B C

7/32 15.5 12,100 13,600 HA40 15/32 11/2 13 HA50 1/2 21/2 15

9/32 17 13,500 16,100 HA50 1/2 21/2 15 HA75 3/4 23/4 151/2

3/8 10 17,100 12,300 HA75 3/4 23/4 151/2 HA100 1 31/2 17

1/2 13 12,000 20,800 HA100 1 31/2 17 HA125 11/4 43/8 183/4

5/8 16 18,100 31,300 HA125 11/4 43/8 183/4 HA150 11/2 51/4 101/2

3/4 20 28,300 49,000 HA150 11/2 51/4 101/2 HA175 13/4 6 12

7/8 22 34,200 59,200 HA175 13/4 6 12 HA200 2 7 14

Single basket

90° 60°

Double basketWorking load limit (lbs.)*

Oblong master link

Chain size

CM welded endless basket chain slingsingle & double

GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY 800—WELDED CHAIN SLINGS




77

GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY 800—LINKS & RINGS

HA Sub-chain assembly Product UPC Weight(in.) number code 43927- A B 1C D E F (lbs.)

7/32 HA50-SA 554974 23575 1/2 21/2 15 11/32 5/8 11/8 111.0

9/32 HA75-SA 554975 23576 3/4 23/4 151/2 15/32 7/8 19/16 112.6

3/8 HA100-SA 554976 23577 1 31/2 17 21/32 11/4 21/4 116.1

1/2 HA125-SA 554977 23578 11/4 43/8 18 3/4 29/32 13/4 31/8 113.3

5/8 HA150-SA 554978 23579 11/2 51/4 101/2 15/32 21/4 4 124.3

3/4 HA175-SA 554979 23580 13/4 6 12 19/32 2 3/8 4 3/8 136.1

7/8 HA200-SA 554980 23581 2 7 14 117/32 2 3/4 51/4 157.4

1 HA225-SA 554981 23582 21/4 8 16 125/32 3 6 183.9

11/4 HA275-SA 554983 23583 23/4 9 16 21/32 31/2 7 129.7

**Consisting of oblong master link and two welded master coupling links.

CM oblong master link sub-assembly**—proof testedfor triple and quad branch chain slings

Link size (inches)Type & size of chain sling

on which used

CM oblong master link—proof tested

Working Diameter Inside Inside Single Double Triple Quad WeightLink Product UPC load limit material width length type type type type eachno. code 43927- (lbs.)*† A B C S & C D T Q (lbs.)

HA40 554931 23327 113,600 13/32 11/2 13 7/32 7/32 — — 11.33

HA50 554932 23328 116,100 1/2 21/2 15 9/32 9/32 7/32 7/32 11.8

HA75 554935 23329 112,300 3/4 2 3/4 151/2 3/8 3/8 9/32 9/32 12.1

HA100 554938 23330 120,800 1 31/2 17 1/2 or 5/8 1/2 3/8 3/8 14.6

HA125 554940 23331 131,300 11/4 43/8 18 3/4 3/4 5/8 1/2 1/2 19.2

HA150 554943 23333 149,000 11/2 51/4 101/2 7/8 3/4 5/8 5/8 15.7

HA175 554946 23335 173,500 13/4 6 12 1 7/8 3/4 3/4 24.5

HA200 554949 23337 188,900 2 7 14 11/4 1 7/8 7/8 37.3

HA225 554951 23339 125,200 21/4 8 16 — 11/4 1 1 54.0

HA275 554957 23342 187,800 2 3/4 9 16 — — 11/4 11/4 84.8

†Working load limit of master link only. For sling WLL see pages 74-76.

Oblong master Master couplinglink size link size(inches) (inches)

MADE IN U.S.A.

CM oblong master link—special sizes—proof tested• Heat treated Approx.

Working weightDiameter Product UPC load limit each(in.) code 43927- (lbs.)*† A B C (lbs.)

1 554969 23345 118,200 1 14 18 115.3

11/4 554942 23332 122,800 11/4 16 12 112.1

11/2 554970 23346 142,900 11/2 16 12 117.6

11/2 554944 23334 136,700 11/2 17 14 120.1

13/4 554945 23359 163,000 13/4 17 14 127.9

2 554952 23340 177,800 2 18 16 141.9

21/2 554954 23341 147,300 21/2 18 16 167.0

3 554958 — 228,000 3 19 18 111.0

31/4 554959 — 262,200 31/4 10 20 144.0

31/2 554960 — 279,000 31/2 12 24 197.0


Dimensions (inches)



78

GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY 800—LINKS & RINGS

Type & size ofchain sling on

which usedWorkingload Diameter Inside Single Double Weight

Link limit Product UPC material Inside widths length type type eachno. (lbs.)*† code 43927- G H I J S&C D (lbs.)

HA51 116,100 554702 23403 1/2 11/4 21/2 15 5/16 9/32 9/32 11.8

HA79 112,300 554706 23405 3/4 2 23/4 15 5/8 3/8 3/8 12.1

HA103 120,800 554710 23408 1 2 5/8 31/2 171/4 1/2 or 5/8 1/2 14.6

HA129 131,300 554714 23410 11/4 31/4 4 5/8 18 3/4 3/4 5/8 19.2

HA153 149,000 554719 23413 11/2 37/8 51/4 101/2 7/8 3/4 15.3

HA179 159,200 554723 23414 13/4 41/2 6 12 1 7/8 23.9

HA201 182,600 554726 23415 2 31/2 7 14 11/4 1 35.9

HA229 125,200 554731 23416 21/4 6 8 16 — 11/4 52.8


CM pear-shaped master link—proof tested

Link size (inches)

Ring size (inches)

CM master ring—proof tested

Working Diameter Inside Single Double Triple Quad WeightProduct UPC load limit material dia. of ring type type type type eachcode 43927- (lbs.)*† K L S & C D T Q (lbs.)

554611 23494 13,500 1/2 21/2 9/32 — — — 11.5

554613 23495 16,100 5/8 3 — 9/32 — — 11.0

554615 23496 19,100 3/4 4 3/8 — 9/32 9/32 11.8

554617 23497 12,300 7/8 4 — 3/8 — — 12.6

554619 23499 18,400 1 4 1/2 — 3/8 3/8 13.4

554623 23502 20,800 11/4 5 5/8 or 3/4 1/2 — — 16.9

554627 23504 31,300 11/2 6 7/8 5/8 1/2 1/2 11.7

554630 23506 49,000 13/4 7 1 3/4 5/8 5/8 18.6

554635 23509 73,500 2 8 — 7/8 3/4 3/4 27.9

554636 23510 88,900 21/4 9 11/4 1 7/8 7/8 39.9


Type & size of chain slingon which used

WorkingChain load Weightsize limit Product UPC each(in.) (lbs.)* code 43927- A 1B C D (lbs.)

9/32 13,500 554320 23782 1/2 151/2 21/2 37/64 10.79

3/8 17,100 554326 23783 3/4 161/16 2 3/4 5/8 12.1

1/2 12,000 554332 23785 1 175/8 31/2 3/4 14.6

5/8 18,100 554337 23786 11/4 191/4 4 3/8 1 19.2

3/4 28,300 554342 23787 13/8 111/4 6 11/8 14.3

7/8 34,200 554347 20291 11/2 113/4 51/4 13/8 16.8

1 47,700 554352 23788 13/4 13 3/4 7 11/2 26.7

11/4 72,300 554362 20292 21/4 171/2 9 21/4 57.2

NOTE: Although CM can supply these types of master links and rings, the oblong link is recommended for general use.

CM grab link—proof tested



79

WARNINGSee warning and use limitations prior to use.

80

GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY 800—ATTACHMENTS

Working DiameterChain load hole to Weightsize limit Product UPC Max. accept each(in.) (lbs.)* code 43927- A B C E† width male leg (lbs.)

7/32 12,100 664220 23087 1/4 113/32 31/64 13/32 15/16 1/2 11.12

9/32 13,500 664228 23097 5/16 113/16 5/8 1/2 111/16 35/64 11.23

3/8 17,100 664241 23107 1/2 213/32 53/64 3/4 2 7/32 47/64 11.65

1/2 12,000 664250 23118 11/16 3 3/8 17/32 1 31/8 59/64 11.5

5/8 18,100 664262 23130 13/16 41/16 11/2 11/4 311/16 11/16 12.6

3/4 28,300 664275 23142 15/16 4 25/32 151/64 11/2 4 5/16 11/4 13.8

7/8 34,200 664287 23152 13/64 51/8 129/32 13/4 5 5/16 111/32 16.3

1 47,700 664300 23163 11/4 5 3/4 2 3/16 2 6 3/16 19/16 19.3

11/4 72,300 664325 23173 117/32 613/16 2 5/8 21/4 7 3/4 2 17.3

†Diameter of stock of largest master link intended to be used with Hammerlok.

CM Hammerlok coupling link—proof tested

Dimensions (inches)

Dependable and easy to use for fastassembly on the job, for attaching chain tomaster links and eye type hooks and forinstalling new body chain in old slings.C.V.S.A. approved.

* WARNING• Do not exceed working

load limit.

• Use only alloy chain andattachments for overheadlifting.

KUPLERS

Fits:Safety Hooks

OF & OTF MasterLinks

Eye Hooks

Kuplers act as a connection device between Master Links andChain on all multiple leg Kuplex II Chain Slings. On singleleg assemblies they can be used in lieu of the popular KuplexII Kuplink. Resembling a shackle in appearance the Kuplersprovide a high strength, high integrity connection when usedto connect a special attachment to the alloy chain assembly.

Specifications

StockNumber

KuplerNo.

Size of ChainAccoloyWorking

LoadLimitsLbs.

AIn.

BIn.

CIn.

DIn.

EIn.

GIn.

HIn.

IIn.

JIn.

WeightLbs.In. mm.

5981-00020 K-20 9/32 7 3,500 7/16 13/16 1-5/16 5/16 1/8 23/32 13/32 11/32 5/8 .25981-00021 K-21 3/8 10 7,100 19/32 1-1/16 1-7/8 7/16 5/32 15/16 9/16 15/32 7/8 .5

5981-00022 K-22 1/2 13 12,000 3/4 1-5/16 2-9/16 9/16 3/16 1-3/32 3/4 21/32 1-1/8 1.1

5981-00023 K-23 5/8 16 18,100 15/16 1-5/8 3 11/16 1/4 1-11/32 15/16 13/16 1-1/2 2.0

5981-00024 K-24 3/4 20 28,300 1 1-15/16 3-13/32 13/16 5/16 1-19/32 1-7/32 1 1-3/4 3.2

5981-00025 K-25 7/8 22 34,200 1-1/8 2-1/4 3-7/8 15/16 3/8 1-27/32 1-9/32 1-1/16 2 4.7

5991-00026 K-26 1 26 35,900† 1-1/4 2-3/4 4-3/8 1-1/32 NA 2 1-1/4 1-1/8 2-3/8 6.6

5991-00028 K-28 1-1/4 32 56,100† 1-1/2 3-1/2 5-1/8 1-5/16 NA 2-9/32 1-1/2 1-7/16 2-7/8 11.6

81

† Values shown for these sizes are grade 63.

82

GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY 800—HOOKS

Working load Weight limit Product UPC each

(in.) (mm) (lbs.)* code 43927- B D 1E 1G 1H I 1K 1.L 1M 1P (lbs.)

7/32 15.5 12,100 559318 45060 1.19 1.75 0.36 12.69 0.38 1.19 0.96 0.63 11.63 1.70 10.35

9/32 17 13,500 559325 44959 1.38 1.81 0.36 13.44 0.38 1.19 0.99 0.63 12.36 1.70 10.40

3/8 10 17,100 559337 44922 1.78 2.63 0.45 14.67 0.50 1.75 1.48 0.78 13.11 1.06 11.06

1/2 13 12,000 559350 45265 2.28 3.34 0.59 15.86 0.63 1.88 1.98 1.03 13.94 1.30 12.26

5/8 16 18,100 559362 44917 2.75 4.08 0.75 17.13 0.75 2.25 2.63 1.25 14.78 1.59 14.36

3/4 20 28,300 559575 45063 3.19 5.23 0.88 18.99 0.88 2.88 3.50 1.44 16.25 1.88 18.82

7/8 22 34,200 559387 42060 3.75 5.69 1.00 19.63 1.00 3.00 3.75 1.75 16.50 2.12 10.40

1 26 47,700 559100 44989 4.31 7.00 1.19 12.44 1.22 3.88 4.31 1.88 18.09 3.12 20.90

11/4† 32 72,300 559124 42052 5.38 8.50 1.50 15.56 1.56 3.50 5.50 2.25 10.50 3.50 40.00

Chain size

CM Cradle Grabhook—100% proof tested

†Not cradle type

Dimensions (inches)

PROOF TESTED

Working L Weightload limit Product UPC Pin each

(in.) (mm) (lbs.)* code 43927- B D Dim. Tol. G .H 1.K Dia. M 1.P T (lbs.)

9/32 17 13,500 659222 42108 1.250 1.781 .359 ±.016 3.000 .328 1.984 .357 1.625 1.718 1.187 1.46

3/8 10 17,100 659225 42111 1.812 2 .562 .468 ±.031 4.078 .453 1.406 .507 2.109 1.062 1.750 1.23

1/2 13 12,000 659228 42114 2.156 3.250 .594 ±.031 5.266 .593 1.875 .625 2.875 1.281 2.125 2.40

5/8 16 18,100 659229 42117 2.687 4.078 .750 ±.031 6.531 .750 2.375 .750 3.562 1.593 2.500 4.17

3/4 20 28,300 659430 42120 3.125 5.234 .875 ±.031 9.083 .875 3.503 .906 5.500 1.867 2.875 9.56

Dimensions (inches)

E

CM Clevlok Cradle Grab hook—100% proof testedCombines CM’s unique CradleGrab design with a simple, depend-able clevis device for do-it-yourselfhook attachment. Replacementload pins and retainer pins avail-able.

Chain size



83

For ChainCodeG80Alloy

Work Load4:1 G80

Alloy

CodeG100Alloy

Work Load4:1

G100 Alloye b d1 d2

Weightlb/pc.

7/32 XK 5.5 2100 XK 5.50 2700 3.58 1.33 .82 .31 .60

9/32 XK 7 3500 XK 70 4300 4.84 2.08 .94 .43 1.50

5/16 XK 8 4500 XK 80 5700 4.80 2.08 .94 .43 1.50

3/8 XK 10 7100 XK 100 8800 6.26 2.73 1.22 .55 2.70

1/2 XK 13 12000 XK 130 15000 8.03 3.62 1.53 .66 6.00

5/8 XK 16 18100 XK 160 22600 8.70 4.01 1.57 .78 8.80

CLEVIS Shortening Hook XK

Chain Working Weightsize load limit Product UPC each(in.) (lbs.)* code 43927- A B C D L 1M N T R W (lbs.)

9/32 13,600 462528 23675 2 13/4 21/2 15/16 1 1311/16 1/8 5/8 5/16 21/2 12.8

3/8 17,050 462537 23676 2 5/8 3 45/16 13/16 11/8 16 3/8 3/16 3/4 3/8 2 3/4 15.7

1/2 11,400 462550 23677 31/2 4 43/8 11/2 11/2 173/8 1/4 1 1/2 31/2 13.0

5/8 17,800 462562 23678 43/8 5 57/16 17/8 17/8 191/4 5/16 11/4 5/8 5 26.5

3/4 25,600 462575 23679 5 3/16 6 61/2 23/8 21/4 107/8 3/8 11/2 3/4 5 3/4 42.0

7/8 34,900 462587 23680 6 7 75/8 21/2 2 5/8 131/16 7/16 13/4 1 6 65.0

Dimensions (inches)

CM plate hook—proof tested

NOTE: For mechanical assembled slings, next larger size Hammerlok coupling link is required in addition to regular size Hammerlok coupling link.




Chain Current style latch Old style latch

size Product UPC Product UPC (in.) code 43927- code 43927-

7/32 — — 595461 42087

9/32 595523 44919 595461 42087

3/8 595525 45260 595463 42088

1/2 595528 35990 595474 42095

5/8 595529 44975 595465 42090

3/4 595530 44984 595466 42091

7/8 595532 45081 595467 42092

1 595533 45082 595468 42093

11/4 595535 44988 595469 42094

CM hook latch kitsKit includes all hardware for easy installation on CM eye and Clevlok sling hooks.

Current StyleLatch

Old StyleLatch

84

MADE IN U.S.A.


(in.) (mm) (lbs.)* code 43927- B 1D E 1G 1H I K 1L 1M N O R (lbs.)

9/32 17 13,500 474498 42073 1.56 14.75 2.50 16.45 0.47 1.00 1.56 0.63 14.75 2.50 1.23 .25 12.4

3/8 10 17,100 474499 42074 2.00 15.75 3.00 17.88 0.63 1.27 1.88 0.75 15.75 3.00 1.50 .31 14.5

1/2 13 12,000 474500 42075 2.50 16.75 3.50 19.38 0.75 1.50 2.22 1.00 16.88 3.50 1.75 .37 17.1

5/8 16 18,100 474501 42076 3.00 17.81 4.00 10.97 0.88 1.81 2.63 1.25 18.06 4.00 2.03 .43 11.6

3/4 20 28,300 474502 42077 3.50 19.13 4.50 12.81 1.00 2.20 3.00 1.50 19.25 4.50 2.56 .50 20.0

7/8 22 34,200 474503 42078 4.00 10.14 5.00 14.23 1.13 2.25 3.38 1.75 10.38 5.00 2.78 .56 26.0

1 26 47,700 474504 42079 4.50 11.13 5.50 15.84 1.25 2.59 3.75 2.13 11.56 5.50 3.03 .62 36.8

11/4 32 72,300 474505 42080 5.13 12.84 6.00 18.03 1.38 3.17 4.25 2.38 12.88 6.00 3.81 .75 58.4

Chain size

CM foundry hook—100% proof tested

Dimensions (inches)



CLEVIS TYPE FOUNDRY HOOKS

Kuplex II Foundry Hooks when properly used are designed formaximum service such as those applications encountered infoundry work. The throat of the hook is designed to accommo-date standard trunnions. The tip of the hook is designed for easeof insertion into holes in the casting.

Specifications

StockNumber

KuplerNo.

Size of ChainAccoloyWorking

LoadLimits*

Lbs.AIn.

BIn.

CIn.

DIn.

EIn.

FIn.

GIn.

HIn.

IIn.

JIn.

WeightLbs.In. mm.

5982-00498 K-498 9/32 7 3,500 1-1/8 1-9/16 4-3/8 4-7/8 2-1/2 1/8 3/8 13/32 11/32 7/8 2.1

5982-00499 K-499 3/8 10 7,100 1-3/8 1-7/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3 5/32 1/2 9/16 15/32 1-1/8 3.9

5982-00500 K-500 1/2 13 12,000 1-5/8 2-1/4 6-5/8 7 3-1/2 3/16 5/8 3/4 21/32 1-1/2 7.6

5982-00501 K-501 5/8 16 18,100 2-3/16 2-5/8 7-3/4 8-9/32 4 1/4 3/4 15/16 13/16 1-3/4 13.5

5982-00502 K-502 3/4 20 28,300 2-5/8 3-1/8 8-7/8 9-5/8 4-5/8 5/16 7/8 1-7/32 1 2 23.2

5982-00503 K-503 7/8 22 34,200 2-7/8 3-1/2 10-1/16 10-3/4 5-1/4 3/8 1 1-9/32 1-1/16 2-1/4 32.1

5992-00504 K-504 1 26 47,700 2.8 3.8 11.6 11.0 5.6 - 1.4 1.2 1.1 2.5 35.0

* Working load limits should not be exceeded. Do not point load hooks.

85


(in.) (mm) (lbs.)* code 43927- B 1D E 1G 1H 1I K 1L 1M N O 1P (lbs.)

7/32 15.5 12,100 458544 42023 — 13.31 1.44 14.30 0.38 0.78 1.25 0.75 13.06 1.25 1.00 0.86 10.7

9/32 17 13,500 458722 42000 1.62 13.50 1.50 15.25 0.44 0.73 1.59 0.75 13.75 1.19 1.20 1.05 11.1

3/8 10 17,100 458725 44887 2.06 14.34 1.88 16.64 0.56 0.95 2.19 0.94 14.78 1.44 1.45 1.28 11.9

1/2 13 12,000 458728 45259 2.63 15.50 2.25 18.16 0.75 1.17 2.56 1.13 15.69 1.78 1.94 1.66 14.5

5/8 16 18,100 458729 44951 3.06 16.34 2.63 19.66 0.88 1.44 2.63 1.31 16.50 2.03 2.38 2.19 17.3

3/4 20 28,300 458730 44992 3.50 17.83 3.00 11.38 1.00 1.69 3.44 1.50 17.81 2.50 2.83 2.51 11.4

7/8 22 34,200 458732 44994 3.88 18.59 3.38 12.72 1.09 1.94 3.88 1.69 18.75 2.78 3.22 2.84 18.1

1 26 47,700 458733 45079 4.31 19.59 4.00 14.23 1.22 2.14 4.25 1.88 19.88 3.13 3.55 3.09 22.6

11/4 32 72,300 458735 45103 5.31 11.56 4.66 17.00 1.50 2.62 4.64 2.31 11.50 3.88 4.25 3.89 36.0

Chain size

CM sling hook** without latch—100% proof tested

**Available from stock with/without latch. Replacement latch kits are also available, see page 87. User must determine if latch is requiredon the hook.

Dimensions (inches)

PROOF TESTED


Working Weightload limit Product UPC each

(in.) (mm) (lbs.)* code 43927- D E 1G H 1I K L M N O P (lbs.)

9/32 17 13,500 658338 45077 3.500 1.500 15.156 .328 0.734 1.594 .357 3.437 1.187 1.203 1.051 10.64

3/8 10 17,100 658339 45100 4.343 1.875 16.672 .453 0.953 2.187 .507 4.468 1.437 1.453 1.281 11.91

1/2 13 12,000 658340 45070 5.500 2.250 18.000 .593 1.172 2.562 .625 5.265 1.781 1.938 1.656 14.33

5/8 16 18,100 658341 45147 6.281 2.625 19.687 .750 1.438 2.281 .750 6.078 2.031 2.375 2.188 15.20

3/4 20 28,300 658342 45177 7.827 3.000 11.688 .875 1.688 3.437 .906 7.344 2.500 2.828 2.563 11.40

CM Clevlok sling hook without latch**—100% proof tested

Chain size Dimensions (inches)

**Latches available either as an option or in kit form, see page 87. User must determine whether latch is required on the hook.Replacement load pins and retainer pins available.



WARNINGSEE WARNINGS AND USE LIMITATIONS

ALLOY CHAIN - GRADE 100

Model

ChainSize

Inches

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs) OD E H

Weight100 ft.(Lbs)

*Design factor 4

DØ

E

H

KLA-8-10KLA-10-10KLA-13-10KLA-16-10

5/16”3/8”1/2”5/8”

0.320.400.520.63

0.951.21.51.9

0.45 0.58 0.72 0.87

97151253450

5,700 8,800 15,000 22,600

MASTER GRAB TYPE MGAn all in one fitting, combining master link, connector and shortening function for single leg sling.

Model

ChainSize

Inches

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs) L (In) A B H

WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4

L

B

AH

MG-8-10MG-10-10MG-13-10MG-16-10

5/16”3/8”1/2”5/8”

6.7 8.3 10.3 12.2

3.7 4.6 5.6 6.4

2.4 3.0 3.5 4.1

2.2 4.0 7.7 12.8

5,700 8,800 15,000 22,600

0.71 0.87 1.0 1.2

MASTER GRAB DUAL TYPE MGDAn all in one fitting, combining master link, connector and shortening function for a two leg sling.

Model

ChainSize

Inches

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs) at 60° L (In) A B H

WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4

B

L

HA

MGD-8-10MGD-10-10MGD-13-10MGD-16-10

5/16”3/8”1/2”5/8”

6.7 8.3 10.3 12.2

3.9 4.9 5.8 6.9

3.0 3.5 4.1 4.7

3.1 5.5 11.0 19.6

9,900 15,200 26,000 39,100

0.83 0.95 1.1 1.4

OBLONG MASTER LINK - MFFor 1, 2, 3, or 4 leg chain slings when used with C-Grab and C-Lok connectors

Model

TradeSize

Inches1-Leg90°

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs)

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs)

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs)2-Legs

60°3-4 Legs

60° L B D

WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4

B

LD

Ø

MF-86-10MF-108-10MF-1310-10MF-1613-10MF-2016-10MF-2220-10

1/2”5/8”7/8”1”

1 3/8”1 1/2”

5/16”3/8”1/2”5/8”

--

-5/16”3/8”1/2”5/8”

-

- 9,900 15,200 26,000 39,100 -

--

5/16”3/8”1/2”5/8”

--

14,80022,90039,00058,700

4.75.56.37.59.49.8

2.83.23.74.35.55.9

0.55 0.67 0.87 0.99 1.3 1.5

0.9 1.5 3.3 4.8 11.2 15.9

5,700 8,800 15,000 22,600 - -

86


OBLONG MASTER LINK - MFXOVERSIZED FOR LARGE CRANE HOOKSFor 1 or 2 leg chain slings when used with C-Grab and C-Lok connectors

Model

TradeSize

Inches

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs)

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs) L B D

WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4

1-Leg90°

2-Legs60°

B

L

DØ

MFX-108-10MFX-108-10MFX-1310-10MFX-1613-10MFX-1916-10

1”1”

1 1/8”1 3/8”1 1/2”

13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4

7.1 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.1

8.2 8.2 10.4 15.4 19.6

5,700 8,800 15,000 22,600 -

- 9,900 15,200 26,000 39,100

0.99 0.99 1.1 1.3 1.5

5/16”3/8”1/2”5/8”

-

-5/16”3/8”1/2”5/8”

OBLONG MASTER LINK - MTXOVERSIZED FOR LARGE CRANE HOOKSFor 3 or 4 leg chain slings when used with C-Grab and C-Lok connectors

Model

TradeSize

Inches3-4 Legs

60°

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs) L B D I b d

WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4**Does not require sub assembly

LD

ØB

b

l

MTX-8-10MTX-10-10MTX-13-10MTX-16-10**

1 1/8”1 3/8”1 1/2”1 3/4”

13.4 13.4 13.413.4

7.1 7.1 7.1 7.1

1.1 1.3 1.5 1.8

13.7 23.1 28.4 30.2

14,800 22,900 39,000 58,700

5/16”3/8”1/2”5/8”

6.3 7.9 7.9 -

3.7 4.7 4.7 -

0.87 1.2 1.3 -

dØ

E

HL

B

C-GRAB TYPE CGA connecting link used with MF, MFX, or MTX master links to attach one leg of chain.Can also be used as an adjustable sliding choker.Fitting includes built-in chain pocket for shortening or creating leg loops

Model

ChainSize

Inches

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs) at 90° L B E H

WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4

CG-8-10CG-10-10CG-13-10CG-16-10

5/16”3/8”1/2”5/8”

4.25.26.88.5

0.47 0.59 0.71 0.87

1.3 1.6 2.0 2.5

1.8 3.3 7.1 13.4

5,700 8,800 15,000 22,600

0.95 1.1 1.5 1.9

HL

E

B

C-GRAB DUAL TYPE CGDA connecting link used with MF, MFX, or MTX master links to attach two legs of chain.Fitting includes built-in chain pockets for shortening or creating leg loops.

Model

ChainSize

Inches

WorkingLoad Limit


WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4

CGD-8-10CGD-10-10CGD-13-10CGD-16-10

5/16”3/8”1/2”5/8”

4.2 5.2 6.8 8.5

0.47 0.59 0.71 0.87

1.3 1.6 2.0 2.5

2.9 5.5 12.1 22.5

9,900 15,200 26,000 39,100

1.1 1.5 1.8 2.2

87


C-LOK TYPE CLA connecting link used with MF, MFX, or MTX master links to attach one leg of chain.The C-Lok can also be used at the bottom of a sling as a sliding choker.

Model

ChainSize

Inches

WorkingLoad Limit


WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4

HL

B

E

CL-8-10CL-10-10CL-13-10CL-16-10

5/16”3/8”1/2”5/8”

2.3 2.9 3.8 4.7

0.47 0.59 0.71 0.87

1.3 1.6 2.0 2.5

1.1 2.0 4.4 8.4

5,700 8,800 15,000 22,600

0.95 1.1 1.5 1.9

E

H

BL

C-LOK DUAL TYPE CLDA connecting link used with MF, MFX, or MTX master links to attach two legs

Model

ChainSize

Inches

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs) at 60° BL E H

WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4

CLD-8-10

CLD-10-10

CLD-13-10

CLD-16-10

5/16”

3/8”

1/2”

5/8”

9,900

15,200

26,000

39,100

0.47

0.59

0.71

0.99

1.3

1.6

2.0

2.5

1.1

1.5

1.8

2.2

1.8

3.3

7.3

13.2

2.2

2.8

3.7

4.5

Model

ChainSize

Inches

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs) BL

WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4:1

GG GRAB HOOK (CLEVIS CRADLE TYPE)

GG-8-10

GG-10-10

GG-13-10

GG-16-10

5/16”

3/8”

1/2”

5/8”

5,700

8,800

15,000

22,600

0.41

0.47

0.63

0.79

0.88

1.8

3.7

6.8

2.2

3.3

3.8

4.9

B

L

Model

ChainSize

Inches

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs) at 90° BL G H

WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4

EGKN SLING HOOK

EGKN-8-10

EGKN-10-10

EGKN-13-10

EGKN-16-10

5/16”

3/8”

1/2”

5/8”

5,700

8,800

15,000

22,600

1.2

1.6

1.9

2.3

0.67

0.9

1.1

1.4

0.87

1.2

1.5

1.8

1.1

2.2

4.4

8.4

3.7

4.8

5.7

6.7

LB

H

G

88


Model

ChainSize

Inches

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs) BL G E

WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4:1

G ALLOY COUPLING LINKS

G-8-10

G-10-10

G-13-10

G-16-10

5/16”

3/8”

1/2”

5/8”

5,700

8,800

15,000

22,600

0.71

0.98

1.1

1.4

0.35

0.47

0.59

0.75

0.87

1.0

1.3

1.6

0.44

0.66

1.5

2.6

2.2

2.7

3.5

4.1

B

L

E

Model

ChainSize

Inches

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs) BL E F

WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4:1

OKE FOUNDRY HOOK (EYE TYPE)

OKE-7/8-10

OKE-10-10

OKE-13-10

OKE-16-10

5/16”

3/8”

1/2”

5/8”

5,700

8,800

15,000

22,600

2.5

3.0

3.5

4.0

1.1

1.3

1.7

2.2

0.45

0.6

0.7

0.9

1.5

2.9

6.2

10.8

4.8

5.9

7.2

8.5

G

0.79

1.0

1.3

1.6

H

1.0

1.1

1.5

1.8

H

G

F

E

L

B

Model

ChainSize

Inches

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs) at 90° BL G H

WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4

GBK SELF LOCKING HOOK

GBK-8-10

GBK-10-10

GBK-13-10

GBK-16-10

5/16”

3/8”

1/2”

5/8”

5,700

8,800

15,000

22,600

1.5

1.9

2.1

2.4

0.79

0.94

1.1

1.5

0.87

1.1

1.4

2.0

1.8

2.9

5.3

12.3

4.7

5.9

6.8

8.5

L

B

H

G

G

LBK SWIVEL EYE GRIP LATCH SELF-LOCKING HOOK (WITH BRONZE BUSHING)

Model

ChainSize

Inches

WorkingLoad Limit

*(Lbs) BL C E

WeightEach(Lbs)

*Design factor 4:1

LBK-7/8-10

LBK-10-10

LBK-13-10

5/16”

3/8”

1/2”

5,700

8,800

15,000

1.5

1.9

2.1

1.1

1.4

1.9

1.5

1.7

1.9

1.8

4.0

8.4

6.9

8.4

9.3

F

0.47

0.59

0.75

G

0.79

0.87

1.1

H

0.87

1.1

1.4

L B

H

E

C

89

90


91

WEAR ALLOWANCES OF HERC-ALLOY 1000 CHAINMeasure cross section at link ends to determine wear. If chain is worn to less than the minimum allowable thickness, remove from service.

CHAIN SIZE MINIMUM ALLOWABLE THICKNESS (T)INCHES mm INCHES mm7/32 15.5 0.185 14.79/32 17.0 0.239 16.13/8 10.0 0.335 18.51/2 13.0 0.435 11.15/8 16.0 0.536 13.63/4 20.0 0.669 17.07/8 22.0 0.744 18.91 26.0 0.870 22.111/4 32.0 1.071 27.2

Note: For sizes not listed, the Minimum Allowable Thickness can be calculated as 85% of the original material diameter.

USE OF CHAIN UNDER EXTREME TEMPERATURE CONDITIONSWhen the chain itself is subjected to temperatures shown here, working load limits should be reduced as indicated.

REDUCTION OFREDUCTION OF WORKING LOAD WORKING LOAD LIMIT AFTER LIMIT WHILE AT EXPOSURE TO

(°F) (°C) TEMPERATURE TEMPERATUREBelow 400 Below 204 None None1400 204 15% None1500 260 25% 5%1600 316 30% 15%1700 371 40% 20%1800 427 50% 25%1900 482 60% 30%1000 538 70% 35%

The identification tag found on the master coupling link of eachchain sling contains this information:• Grade • Size• Reach • Type• Working load limit (at a specific angle of lift)• Serial number

NOTE: HAMMERLOK COUPLING LINKS MUST NOT BESUBJECTED TO TEMPERATURES EXCEEDING 300o F.

The life and strength of Herc-Alloy 1000 chain slings depend onproper inspection, maintenance and use. For additional informa-tion, refer to ANSI B30.9 and OSHA 1910.184.

CAREChain requires careful storage and regular maintenance.• Store chains on an A frame in a clean, dry place.• To avoid corrosion, oil chains before prolonged storage.• Do not heat Herc-Alloy 1000 chain; this will alter its

thermal treatment.• Do not plate or change surface finish of chain. Contact

LAMCO for special requirements.

USETo protect both operators and materials, observe these precautions when using chain slings:• Before use, inspect chain and attachments following the

instructions under “Inspection” below.• Do not exceed working load limit. Any of the factors listed

here can reduce the load the chain will hold:• Acceleration in rate of load application—can produce

dangerous overloading.• Variation in the angle of the load to the sling—as the angle

decreases, the working load of the sling will increase.• Twisting, knotting or kinking—subjects links to unusual

loading, decreasing the working load of the sling.• Use for purposes other than those for which slings are

intended—can reduce the working load of the sling.• Free chain of all twists, knots and kinks.• Center load in hook(s); hook latches must not support load.• Avoid sudden jerks when lifting and lowering.• Balance all loads; avoid tipping of loads.• Use pads around sharp corners.• Do not drop load on chains.• Match the size and working load limit of attachments such as

hooks or rings to the size and working load limit of the chain.• For overhead lifting, use only alloy chain and attachments.

INSPECTIONIt is important both to inspect chain slings regularly and to keep a record of all chain inspections. Follow this guide forsuch an inspection system.• Before inspecting, clean chains with a non-acid/non-caustic

solvent so that marks, nicks, wear and other defects are visi-ble.

• Inspect each link for these conditions:• Twists or bends.• Nicks or gouges.• Excessive wear at bearing points.• Stretch.• Distorted or damaged master links, coupling links or

attachments, especially spread in throat opening of hooks.• Mark plainly with paint each link or attachment showing any

of the conditions listed here to indicate rejection; remove fromservice until properly repaired.

HERC-ALLOY 1000—CARE, USE AND INSPECTION

TEMPERATURE

GRADE 100



92

APPROX. APPROX.NO. WEIGHT PER FOOT DRUM FEET

INSIDE INSIDE LINKS PER 100 FT. PRODUCT PRODUCT PER ( IN.) (mm) LENGTH WIDTH PER FT. (LBS.) CODE CODE DRUM7/32 15.5 1.670 1.284 17.9 11144.7 607321 677310 8009/32 17.0 1.868 1.380 13.8 11173.1 607328 677311 50013/8 10.0 1.181 1.512 19.8 11148.0 607339 677313 50011/2 13.0 1.535 1.688 18.5 11255.0 607351 677315 30015/8 16.0 1.890 1.819 16.9 11383.0 607363 677316 20013/4 20.0 2.362 1.024 15.5 11625.0 607378 677317 1001

HERC-ALLOY 1000 CHAIN SIZES AND WORKING LOAD LIMITS

CHAIN SIZE

NOMINALDIMENSIONS

(INCHES)

( IN.) (mm)7/32 15.5 12,700 14,700 13,800 12,700 17,000 15,700 14,0009/32 17.0 14,300 17,400 16,100 14,300 11,200 19,100 16,4003/8 10.0 18,800 15,200 12,400 18,800 22,900 18,700 13,2001/2 13.0 15,000 26,000 21,200 15,000 39,000 31,800 22,5005/8 16.0 22,600 39,100 32,000 22,600 58,700 47,900 33,9003/4 20.0 35,300 61,100 49,900 35,300 91,700 74,900 53,000

WORKING LOAD LIMITS (LBS.)*SINGLE DOUBLE TRIPLE & QUAD

90° 60° 45° 30° 60° 45° 30°CHAIN SIZE

HERC-ALLOY 1000—CHAIN SLINGS

WORKING DIAMETER INSIDE INSIDELOAD LIMIT MATERIAL WIDTH LENGTH TYPE SOS

(IN.) (mm) (LBS.)* A B C 5 FT. REACH7/32 15.5 12,700 13/32 11/2 13 1149/32 17 14,300 1/2 21/2 15 1153/8 10 18,800 3/4 23/4 151/2 1101/2 13 15,000 1 31/2 17 1185/8 16 22,600 1 31/2 17 1253/4 20 35,300 11/4 43/8 183/4 138

SINGLE CHAIN SLING TYPE S & C

CHAIN SIZE

OBLONG MASTER LINKDIMENSIONS (INCHES)

APPROX.WEIGHT

(LBS.)

Made in U.S.A.

* WARNINGDO NOT EXCEED

WORKING LOAD LIMIT.USE ONLY ALLOY CHAIN WITHCOMPATIBLE COMPONENTSOF EQUAL WORKING LOAD

LIMIT FOR OVERHEAD LIFTING.

LLAAMMCCOO MMaannuuffaaccttuurreedd PPrroodduucctt

93

DIAMETER INSIDE INSIDE TYPEMATERIAL WIDTH LENGTH DOS

(IN.) (mm) 60° 45° 30° A B C 5' REACH7/32 15.5 114,700 113,800 12,700 13/32 11/2 13 289/32 17 117,400 116,100 14,300 1/2 21/2 15 193/8 10 115,200 112,400 18,800 3/4 2 3/4 151/2 181/2 13 126,000 121,200 15,000 1 31/2 17 315/8 16 139,100 132,000 22,600 11/4 4 3/8 18 3/4 493/4 20 161,100 149,900 35,300 11/2 51/4 101/2 71

DIMENSIONS (INCHES)OBLONG MASTER LINK

DOUBLE CHAIN SLING TYPE D - GRADE 100

WORKING LOAD LIMIT(LBS.)*CHAIN SIZE

APPROX. WEIGHT

(LBS.)

Made in U.S.A.

DIAMETER INSIDE INSIDE TYPE TYPEMATERIAL WIDTH LENGTH TOS QOS

(IN.) (mm) 60° 45° 30° A B C 5' REACH 5' REACH7/32 15.5 117,000 115,700 114,000 1/2 21/2 15 112 1169/32 17 111,200 119,100 116,400 3/4 2 3/4 151/2 114 1183/8 10 122,900 118,700 113,200 1 3 1/2 17 128 1361/2 13 139,000 131,800 122,500 11/4 4 3/8 18 3/4 150 1625/8 16 158,700 147,900 133,900 11/2 51/4 101/2 179 1973/4 20 191,700 174,900 153,000 13/4 6 12 112 137

TRIPLE & QUAD CHAIN SLING TYPE T& Q

DIMENSIONS (INCHES)

OBLONG MASTER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY

WORKING LOAD LIMIT(LBS.)*CHAIN SIZE

APPROX. WEIGHT

(LBS.)

Made in U.S.A.





94

HERC-ALLOY 1000—ATTACHMENTS

LINK SIZE (INCHES)TYPE & SIZE OF CHAIN SLING

ON WHICH USED

OBLONG MASTER LINK—PROOF TESTED

WORKING DIAMETER INSIDE INSIDE SINGLE DOUBLE TRIPLE QUAD WEIGHTPRODUCT LOAD LIMIT MATERIAL WIDTH LENGTH TYPE TYPE TYPE TYPE EACHCODE (LBS.)*† A B C S & C D T Q (LBS.)555231 115,400 13/32 (.406) 11/2 13 7/32 7/32 — — 11.33555232 118,600 1/2 (.512) 21/2 15 9/32 9/32 7/32 7/32 11.8 11555235 117,600 3/4 (.750) 2 3/4 151/2 3/8 3/8 9/32 9/32 12.1 11555238 130,000 1 (1.024) 31/2 17 1/2 or 5/8 1/2 3/8 3/8 14.6 11555240 145,200 11/4 (1.260) 43/8 18 3/4 3/4 5/8 1/2 1/2 19.2 11555243 170,600 11/2 (1.500) 51/4 101/2 — 3/4 5/8 5/8 15.7 1555246 105,900 13/4 (1.750) 6 12 — — 3/4 3/4 24.5 1

† Working load limit of master link only. For sling WLL see pages 92-93.

HACHAIN PRODUCT WEIGHT(IN.) CODE A B C D E F (LBS.)7/32 555274 1/2 21/2 15 11/32 5/8 11/8 12.09/32 555275 3/4 23/4 151/2 1.468 7/8 19/16 12.0

113/8 555276 1 31/2 17 1.656 11/4 21/4 14.5 11/2 555277 11/4 43/8 18 3/4 1.906 13/4 31/8 19.0 15/8 555278 11/2 51/4 101/2 1.156 21/4 4 16.0 13/4 555279 13/4 6 12 1.260 2 3/8 4 3/8 25.0 1

**Consisting of oblong master link and two welded master coupling links.

OBLONG MASTER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY**—PROOF TESTED for triple and quad branch chain slings

OBLONG MASTER MASTER COUPLINGLINK SIZE LINK SIZE(INCHES) (INCHES)




95


GRADE 100 HAMMERLOK COUPLING LINKS

9/32 (7) 667028 467025 596028 597028 598028 .365 .435 1.978 .708 .541 1.688 4,300 0.2763/8 (10) 667038 467038 596038 597038 598038 .502 .591 3.002 1.157 .910 2.500 8,800 0.8361/2 (13) 667050 467050 596050 597050 598050 .678 .780 3.795 1.429 1.097 3.188 15,000 1.8675/8 (16) 667062 467062 596062 597062 598062 .804 .905 4.539 1.738 1.317 3.875 22,600 3.1333/4 (20) 667075 467075 596075 597075 598075 .973 1.071 5.357 2.085 1.516 4.688 35,300 5.746

PRODUCTCODE

BODYPRODUCT

CODE (2 REQ’D)

LOAD PINPRODUCT

CODE (1 REQ’D)

LOAD PINBUSHINGPRODUCT

CODE(1 REQ’D)

LOAD PINRETAINERPRODUCT

CODE(1 REQ’D) A

MAXB

MAXC D

EMIN F

MAXIMUMWLL

4:1 (lb)

WEIGHTAPPROX.

(lb)HAMMERLOKSIZE IN. (mm)

DIMENSIONS

WORKING LOAD WEIGHTLIMIT PRODUCT EACH PRICE

(IN.) (mm) (LBS.)* CODE B D E G H I K L M P (LBS.) EACH7/32 15.5 12,700 Use 9/32” Hook9/32 17 14,300 559725 1.38 1.91 0.36 13.70 0.38 1.06 1.04 0.63 12.56 1.76 10.553/8 10 18,800 559737 1.78 2.78 0.47 14.81 0.50 1.38 1.49 0.78 13.28 1.04 11.391/2 13 15,000 559750 2.28 3.63 0.59 16.19 0.63 1.81 1.98 1.03 14.22 1.51 13.055/8 16 22,600 559762 2.75 4.08 0.75 17.13 0.75 2.25 2.63 1.25 14.78 1.59 14.363/4 20 35,300 559775 3.19 5.23 0.88 18.99 0.88 2.88 3.50 1.44 16.25 1.88 18.82

CHAIN SIZE

CRADLE GRABHOOK—100% PROOF TESTED

DIMENSIONS (INCHES)

Made in U.S.A.


WORKING LOAD LIMIT.USE ONLY ALLOY CHAIN WITH COMPATIBLECOMPONENTS OF EQUAL WORKING LOAD


96

WORKING LOAD WEIGHTLIMIT PRODUCT EACH

(IN.) (MM) (LBS.)* CODE B D E G H I K L M N O P (LBS.)7/32 15.5 12,700 Use 9/32” Hook9/32 17 15,700 458622 1.62 3.50 1.50 15.25 0.44 0.73 1.59 0.75 3.75 1.19 1.20 1.05 11.13/8 10 18,800 458625 2.06 4.34 1.88 16.64 0.56 0.95 2.19 0.94 4.78 1.44 1.45 1.28 11.91/2 13 15,000 458628 2.63 5.50 2.25 18.16 0.75 1.17 2.56 1.13 5.69 1.78 1.94 1.66 14.55/8 16 22,600 458629 3.06 6.34 2.63 19.66 0.88 1.44 2.63 1.31 6.50 2.03 2.38 2.19 17.33/4 20 35,300 458630 3.50 7.83 3.00 11.38 1.00 1.69 3.44 1.50 7.81 2.50 2.83 2.51 11.4

**Available from stock with/without latch. Replacement latch kits are also available. User must determine if latch is required on the hook.

CHAIN SIZE

SLING HOOK** WITHOUT LATCH—100% PROOF TESTED

DIMENSIONS (INCHES)

CHAIN CURRENT STYLE LATCH

SIZE PRODUCT(IN.) CODE7/32 —9/32 5955233/8 5955251/2 5955285/8 5955293/4 595530

Kit includes all hardware for easyinstallation on CM eye and Clevloksling hooks.

HOOK LATCH KITS

Current StyleLatch

Made in U.S.A.


SLING HOOK WITH LATCH—100% PROOF TESTED

L

CHAIN SIZE DIMENSIONS (INCHES)WORKING LOAD WEIGHTLIMIT PRODUCT EACH

(IN.) (mm) (LBS.)* CODE B D G H I L M O P R S (LBS.)7/32 15.5 12,700 Use 9/32” Hook9/32 17 15,700 558622 1.63 3.50 15.25 0.44 0.73 0.75 3.75 1.20 1.05 1.06 1.06 11.13/8 10 18,800 558625 2.06 4.34 06.64 0.56 0.95 0.94 4.78 1.45 1.28 1.31 1.31 11.911/2 13 15,000 558628 2.63 5.50 18.16 0.75 1.17 1.13 5.69 1.94 1.66 1.56 1.63 14.515/8 16 22,600 558629 3.06 6.34 19.66 0.88 1.44 1.31 6.50 2.38 2.19 1.75 1.75 17.313/4 20 35,300 558630 3.50 7.83 11.38 1.00 1.69 1.50 7.81 2.83 2.51 2.19 2.19 11.4

* WARNINGDO NOT EXCEED WORKING LOAD LIMIT.

USE ONLY ALLOY CHAIN WITH COMPATIBLECOMPONENTS OF EQUAL WORKING LOAD


97

The new generation of high performance overheadlifting equipment - Pewag Grade 120

The key advantages of Grade 120 are:• Higher Work Load LImits - up to 50% higher compared to G80• Weight Reduction• Higher Safety Factors• Improved Wear Resistance• For Severe Applications

The goals were achieved by:• New design concept of a profile lifting chain• Redesign of all components• Optimized heat-treatment methods• Use of the highest-quality alloys

Code 1-leg 2-leg 3- and 4-leg

angle at 90° at 30° at 45° at 60° at 30° at 45° at 60°Code dim. WLL

NI 720NI 1020NI 1320

9/32”3/8”1/2”

52001060017900

52001060017900

74001500025300

90001840031000

78001590026900

110002250038000

135002750046500

For asymmetrical loaddistribution use single legvalue for all angles of 2 leg sling use 2 leg values for 3 and 4 leg sling

Angle 30° 45° 60° 30° 45° 60°Load factor with symmetrical load distribution 1 1.4 1.7 1.5 2.1 2.6Load factor with asymmetrical load distribution 1 1 1 1 1.4 1.7

R larger than 2x chain dim. R larger than chain dim. R smaller than chain dim.

Reduction factor 1 0.7 0.5

Grade 120 Attachments:

Enlarged MasterLinks M-G120Master link for singleleg slings or end link.

Enlarged Master LinkAssemblies VM-G120Master link assembly formulti leg slings

Connex-Connecting Link C-G120General connecting link for connection ofMaster links to chain or chain to components

Eye Sling HookHS-G120General purpose hookwith forged safety latch.

Grab Hook P-G120May be used as a shorteningdevice.

4:1

98

MADE IN U.S.A.

CARBON—WELDED CHAIN

Working Weightload limit per 100 ft.

Inches Decimal (lbs.)* Length Width (lbs.)

3/16 1.218 11,800 1.95 1.40 1,038

1/4 1.276 11,300 1.00 1.47 1,066

5/16 1.327 11,900 1.10 1.50 1,098

3/8 1.390 12,650 1.23 1.62 1,144

7/16 1.468 13,700 1.37 1.75 1,210

1/2 1.531 14,500 1.50 1.81 1,278

5/8 1.656 16,900 1.87 1.00 1,422

3/4 1.787 10,600 2.12 1.12 1,628

1 1.031 17,900 2.75 1.50 1,069

1/4 1.281 12,600 1.00 1.47 1,071

5/16 1.327 13,900 1.10 1.50 1,098

3/8 1.390 15,400 1.23 1.62 1,144

7/16 1.468 17,200 1.37 1.75 1,210

1/2 1.531 19,200 1.50 1.81 1,278

5/8 1.656 13,000 1.87 1.00 1,422

3/4 1.781 20,200 2.12 1.12 1,606

7/8 1.875 24,500 2.25 1.14 1,776

1 1.000 34,100 2.75 1.50 1,050

1/4 1.281 13,150 1.84 1.47 1,074

5/16 1.327 14,700 1.98 1.46 1,100

3/8 1.406 16,600 1.14 1.54 1,156

7/16 1.468 18,750 1.33 1.62 1,204

1/2 1.531 11,300 1.43 1.72 1,259

Dimensions and weights are approximate and subject to variations.

Chain specifications

CM Welded graded chainWelded graded chain is an industrial grade chain used

extensively in rigging, towing and overhead lifting applica-

tions.

CM graded chains are manufactured in accordance with

the NACM Specification for chain, ASTM Standard A391

and ASTM Standard A413. The standardized grade desig-

nations are 30, 43 and 70 for carbon steel chain, and 63

and 80 for alloy steel chain. The grade number relates to

the strength level of the chain, with the grade number

increasing as the strength of the chain increases.

Only Herc-Alloy 800 and Herc-Alloy 63 chain is designed

for overhead lifting. The other grade designated chains

are not made from alloy steel and should not be used for

overhead lifting.

CMGRADE 30PROOF COILCHAIN

CMGRADE 43HIGH TESTCHAIN

CMGRADE 70TRANSPORT(BINDING) CHAIN



CatalogNumber

SizeInches

InsideWidth

InsideLength

Weight PerFoot Limit

WorkingLoad Limit

CHS012WSCHS019WSCHS025WSCHS031WSCHS038WSCHS050WSCHS063WSCHS075WSCHS100WS

0.130.190.250.310.380.500.630.751.00

0.290.400.500.500.630.811.001.131.37

0.890.951.001.101.231.501.872.123.58

0.220.400.711.051.502.703.715.808.53

375120020002850355065009500

1500022500

L E T E L L I E R - Stainless Steel Chain - Grade 316L

• All stainless chain slings and stainless riggingcomponents are also available.

• Specialty chain is also available in some 304,Nitronic 50 (UNS S20910), Monel, Incalloy,Hanes 230, Alloy 20.

99

ALLOY GRADE 63 CHAIN SLINGS

Working Load Limits* - Pounds

Size ofChain In.

Single Chainat 90° Lbs.

Double Chain Slings/Lbs. – Type D Triple and Quad Chain Slings/Lbs.Type T and Type Q

9/32 2,800 4,800 4,000 2,800 7,300 5,900 4,200

3/8 5,000 8,700 7,100 5,000 13,000 10,600 7,500

1/2 9,000 15,600 12,700 9,000 23,400 19,100 13,500

5/8 14,000 24,250 19,800 14,000 36,400 29,700 21,000

3/4 20,200 35,000 28,600 20,200 52,500 42,850 30,300

7/8 27,500 47,600 38,900 27,500 71,400 58,300 41,300

1 35,900 62,200 50,800 35,900 93,300 76,200 53,900

1-1/4 56,100 97,200 79,300 56,100 145,800 119,000 84,200

1-1/2 80,000 138,600 113,100 80,000 207,800 169,700 120,000

1-3/4 100,000 173,200 141,400 100,000 259,800 212,100 150,000

2 130,000 225,200 183,800 130,000 337,700 275,800 195,000

Paint System Chains

Grade 63 alloy chain fills a niche for paint line systemsthat require a higher working load limit chain and thatutilize acidic solutions in the painting process. Acidicsolutions can cause physical changes to Grade 80 orhigher alloy chain which severely weakens the chain.Due to the manufacturing processes used for Grade 63alloy chain, this chain resists these physical changes.Every link embossed AS – Matte Grey Finish with RustInhibiter.

Contact Lamco to discuss the details of your paintingprocess to ensure the safety of your employees.

* Working Load Limits should not be exceeded.

100

Liftex PAC-FLEX® Alloy Chain Mesh Slings are specified formultiple lifting uses in metalworking and other applicationswhere the loads are abrasive, hot or will ten to cut other typesof slings. PAC-FLEX fills a niche that web slings cannot fill.PAC-FLEX is vastly superior in many respects to the wiremesh sling.Pac-Flex Slings Feature

• Flat, smoother bearing surfaces• High tensile strength alloy steel chain• Flexibility to conform to irregular shapes• Withstands temperatures to 550°F.• Excellent resistance to abrasion and cutting• Easy to inspect – use the same inspection criteria used

for other alloy sling chainsCompare Liftex Pac-Flex Alloy Chain MeshSlings To Wire Mesh Slings

• More capacity per sling width• Our 2” wide sling is 260% stronger than 2” wide wire

mesh slings.• Our 4” wide sling is 200% stronger than 4” wide wire

mesh slings.• BI-DIRECTIONAL FLEXIBILITY

Pac-Flex Materials Of ConstructionPAC-FLEX is a uniquely engineered and patented arrangement ofalloy steel chain and 1/8” wire rope. End fittings are heat treatedalloy steel.

Pac-Flex Fitting Dimensions (in inches)A-1 A-2 B D Thickness

PAC-4 6.88 4.75 3.50 2.25 .75PAC-7 8.50 6.25 4.25 3.25 .75PAC-5HD 12.00 9.19 7.13 3.63 1.00PAC-8HD 12.75 9.75 6.82 4.75 1.00

Pac-Flex Chain Mesh Sling Specifications

SlingType

PartNo.

Nominalslingwidth

*Rated Capacity (lbs.) Approx. Weight(lbs.)

3’ sling 1’bodyChokerhitch

Verticalhitch

Baskethitch

Type II PAC-4B 2” - 6000 12000 7.9 1.8

Type I PAC-4C 2” 6000 6000 12000 9.4 1.8

Type II PAC-7B 4” - 10000 20000 13.1 3.2

Type I PAC-7C 4” 10000 10000 20000 15.2 3.2

Type II PAC-5B/HD 4” - 18000 36000 18.6 4.3

Type I PAC-5C/HD 4” 18000 18000 36000 22.1 4.3

Type II PAC-8B/HD 6” - 30000 60000 26.8 6.3

Type I PAC-8C/HD 6” 30000 30000 60000 31.9 6.3

To Order Specify:• Sling Width • Sling Length • Part Number

* Do not exceed rated capacity

101

NOTHING OUT-GRABS AGRIPPER® SLING

Cambridge metal mesh GRIPPER Slings out-tough thetoughest loads, outwear any other sling.

®

Cambridge GRIPPER Slings arestrong enough to handle any-thing you can wrap them aroundand their flexible, woven wirefabric gives you absolute grip.They are simple to rig in eitherchoke or basket hitch. Riggingand unhitching time arereduced...there’s no need for atwo legged sling.

Lengths and widths are availablefor handling a variety of loadswith a design factor of 5. GRIP-PER Slings out-tough heavyloads, sharp edges, rugged use.Sunlight won’t kill them. Mostchemicals won’t touch them.

Flat, flexible metal mesh weaveresists kinking, tangling andtwisting, and the broad bearingsurface is ideal for single slingbalance loads.

GRIPPER Slings conform tocontours of loads. Machined orpolished surfaces can be furtherprotected with urethane coat-ings.

23

1,6003,000

3,2006,000

46

4,4006,600

8,80013,200

810

8,80011,000

17,60022,000

1214

13,20015,400

26,40030,800

1618

17,60019,800

35,20039,600

20 22,000 44,000

NominalWidth of

Sling(inches) Choker (lbs.)

VerticalBasket (lbs.)


Ergonomic & Custom Lifting Devices

103

LAMCO ERGONOMIC&

CUSTOM LIFTING DEVICES

At LAMCO we can design and fabricate standard and special liftingdevices to meet your specific needs. We have over 20 years experi-ence in the design and manufacture of ergonomic lifting devices. Alllifting devices are made to OSHA and ASME/ANSI specifications.

All standard hooks are made from alloy steel that is heat treated forextra strength and durability. Heat treating is also available for otherspecially designed lifting devices.

The following pages contain specifications on the standard fabricateditems that we offer. If you do not see an item that meets your specificneed, drawings are included that can be copied and used to designlifting devices that can be specifically matched to your application.

We also offer Structural Engineering services for larger overhead lift-ing projects such as bridge cranes or for exceptional lifting devices.

In addition to the standard fabricated products, we have included newergonomically designed items that are manufactured by other compa-nies to assist you in lifting applications. These items range from jobspecific lifting and positioning equipment to enclosed track bridgecrane systems and are valuable in protecting your employees fromrisks due to repetitive or awkward lifts.

Our capabilities are not limited to these items only. Any time that youhave a lifting need that can not be satisfied by a standard liftingdevice give us a call and together we will develop a solution to yourneeds.

Thanks for your trust in LAMCO!

LAMCO Ergonomic & Custom Lifting Devices

104

• Ideal where headroom is not limited• Alloy swivel hooks w/latches standard• Available with alternative rigging angles

for varying headroom

• Available with chain or wire rope• Designed/manufactured to ANSI B30.20

LAMCO SPREADER BEAMS

RATED CAPACITY(TONS)* 3 4 6 8 10 12 OTHER

DIMENSIONSALLOY HOOK

SIZE

1/2HEADROOM@45°

29” 35” 47” 59” 71” 83”A = 1/2”B = 2 1/2”C = 5”

1TON

1HEADROOM@45°

29” 35” 47” 59” 71” 83”A = 1/2”B = 2 1/2”C = 5”

1TON

2HEADROOM@45°

29” 35” 47” 59” 71” 83”A = 1/2”B = 2 1/2”C = 5”

1 1/2TON

3HEADROOM@45°

30” 36” 48” 60” 72” 84”A = 3/4”B = 2 3/4”C = 5 1/2”

2TON

5HEADROOM@45°

31” 37” 49” 61” 73” 85”A = 3/4”B = 2 3/4”C = 5 1/2”

3TON

7 1/2HEADROOM@45°

33” 39” 51” 63” 76” 88”A = 1”B = 3 1/2”C = 7”

4 1/2TON

10HEADROOM@45°

36” 42” 54” 67” 80” 92”A = 1 1/4”B = 4 3/8”C = 8 3/4”

7TON

Crane Hook Dimensions

LLAAMMCCOO MMaannuuffaaccttuurreedd bbyy LLAAMMCCOO

* Larger sizes available upon request

SPAN IN FEET

105

LAMCO MODEL LMXLOW HEADROOM LIFTING BEAM

• Ideal where headroom is limited • Designed and manufactured to ANSI B30.20• Alloy swivel hooks with latches • Wide range of sizes and capacities available• Available with various bottom hooks • Structurally designed for up to 500,000 stress

cycles

RATED CAPACITY(TONS)* 3 4 6 8 10 12 OTHER

DIMENSIONSALLOY HOOK

SIZE

1/2 HEADROOM 12” 12” 12” 12” 13” 14”

A = 1 1/2”B = 3”C = 5”

1TON

1 HEADROOM 12” 12” 13” 14” 15” 16”

A = 1 1/2”B = 3”C = 5”

1TON

2 HEADROOM 13” 13” 14” 15” 17” 18”

A = 1 1/2”B = 3”C = 5”

1 1/2TON

3 HEADROOM 14” 15” 16” 18” 19” 20”

A = 1 1/2”B = 3”C = 5”

2TON

5 HEADROOM 18” 18” 20” 22” 22” 27”

A = 1 1/2”B = 4”C = 7”

3TON

7 1/2 HEADROOM 19” 20” 22” 23” 25” 28”

A = 2”B = 4”C = 7”

5TON

10 HEADROOM 22” 23” 25” 27” 30” 30”

A = 2”B = 4”C = 7”

7TON

SPAN IN FEET

Optional Ultra LowHeadroom

LAMCO Manufactured by LAMCO

* Larger sizes available upon request

106

MATERIALDIAMETER

(A)

CATALOGNUMBER (B) (C) (D) (E)

RATEDCAPACITY

(lbs.)

1/45/163/8

LMXJH025LMXJH031LMXJH038

556

.75

.75

.75

1.251.251.50

.88

.881.13

150250350

1/25/83/4

LMXJH050LMXJH063LMXJH075

89

10

.751.001.00

2.002.503.00

1.501.882.25

650850

1,000

7/81

LMXJH088LMXJH100

1214

1.001.25

3.504.00

2.633.00

1,5002,000

HEAT TREATED ALLOY J-HOOKS

STANDARD DIMENSIONS (in.)

SPECIAL APPLICATION DIMENSIONS

A:

B:

C:

D:

E:

DEGREES:

RATED CAPACITY :

RADIUS:

STYLE:


Special coatings and latchesavailable

107

MATERIALDIAMETER

(A)

CATALOGNUMBER (B) (C) (D)

RATEDCAPACITY

(lbs.)

1/45/163/8

LMXSH025LMXSH031LMXSH038

2.752.754.13

.75

.751.13

.75

.751.13

100225450

1/25/83/4

LMXSH050LMXSH063LMXSH075

5.507.008.25

1.501.882.25

1.501.882.25

9001,3501,800

7/81

LMXSH088LMXSH100

9.5011.00

2.633.00

2.633.00

2,4002,900

SPECIAL APPLICATION DIMENSIONS

A:

B:

C:

D:

RATED CAPACITY:

NOTES:

HEAT TREATED ALLOY S-HOOKS

STANDARD DIMENSIONS (in.)


108

A:

B:

C:

D:

E:

R1:

R2:

W:

DIA:

ANGLE 1:

ANGLE 2:

STYLE:

RATED CAPACITY:

NOTES:


109

A:

B:

C:

D:

E:

F:

G:

W:

THK:

ANGLE 1:

ANGLE 2:

ANGLE 3:

RATED CAPACITY:

NOTES:

PLATE HOOKLLAAMMCCOO MMaannuuffaaccttuurreedd bbyy LLAAMMCCOO

110

Model 82-NC – Narrow Coil “C” Hook

PRODUCT FEATURES:

• Handles narrow coils with less coil edge damage.• More durable than web slings.• Light weight for easier handling.• Built in guide handle for ease of coil positioning.• Available with optional curved coil saddle.• Inside radius on hooks avoid coil edge contact.• Designed and manufactured to ASME B30.20.

NOTE:”E” dimension equals one-half the dimension of “L”.

SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions in InchesCAPACITY COIL LIFTING ARM PLATE BAIL DIMENSIONS

CATALOG IN WIDTH THROAT LENGTH DEPTH THK. HDRM THK. OPENING WGT.NO. TONS MAX. L D T H A B C (LBS.)

82NC-1/2-8 1/2 8 14-1/2 8 2-1/4 1/2 18-1/2 13/16 2 3-1/4 1482NC-1/2-12 12 14-1/2 12 2-5/8 1/2 18-1/2 13/16 2 3-1/4 17

82NC-1-8 1 8 17-1/2 8 2 1/2 21-1/2 13/16 2 3-1/4 1582NC-1-16 16 17-1/2 16 2-1/2 1/2 21-1/2 13/16 2 3-1/4 2082NC-2-8 2 8 19-1/2 8 2-1/8 3/4 24-9/16 1 2-9/16 4-1/16 2282NC-2-16 16 19-1/2 16 3 3/4 24-9/16 1 2-9/16 4-1/16 40

82NC-3 1/2-12 3-1/2 12 21-1/2 12 2-7/8 1 28-1/8 1-3/16 3-5/8 5-5/16 5082NC-3 1/2-16 16 21-1/2 16 3-3/8 1 28-1/8 1-3/16 3-5/8 5-5/16 63

82NC-5-16 5 16 25-1/2 16 3-1/2 1-1/4 32-13/16 1-1/2 4 5-13/16 9482NC-5-20 20 25-1/2 20 4 1-1/4 32-13/16 1-1/2 4 5-13/16 110

CAUTION: Center of gravity must becentered under crane hook to preventtilting of the lifter and load.

THROAT

A

*Will not hang level when empty.

111

Model 80H – Dixon Coil Hook with Pivoting WedgePRODUCT FEATURES:• Easy horizontal to vertical up-ending of coils.• Pivoting wedge for easy tilting of stacked coils.• Wedge acts as retainer.• Efficient and easy to use.• Popular for use with small, light weight coils.• For use where overhead clearance is limited.• Specially designed heat treated pivoting wedge.• Designed and manufactured to ASME B30.20.

SPECIFICATIONS

EASY HORIZONTAL TO VERTICAL MOVEMENT. DO NOT USE FOR VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT.

Providing spacer blocksbetween stacked coils permitseasy insertion of the wedge.Light weight and pivotingwedge makes it easy to posi-tion the hook.

With the hook in place, thewedge pivots as the lift is start-ed, and the coil begins to turnto a vertical position for trans-porting it.

Coil is in vertical position afterbeing lifted from its pallet. Theweight of the coil holds the piv-oting wedge in the vertical posi-tion during transportation.

Coil being loaded on a stockreel. Hook is easily removedfrom the coil after releasing thehoist.

Dimensions in inchesCapacity Weight

Catalog In Max. Max. Min. A B C D T W (Lbs.)No. Tons Width Radial I.D.

80H-1/2-6/13 1/2 6 13 9 1 2 3-1/2 6 1/2 3-1/2 10

80H-1/2-12/13 1/2 12 13 13 1 2 3-1/2 6 1/2 3-1/2 20

80H-1-8/16 1 8 16 10 1 2 3-1/2 6 1/2 3-1/2 22

80H-2-10/18 2 10 18 12-1/2 1 2-1/2 4 6-3/4 3/4 2 45

80H-3.5-12/20 3-1/2 12 20 14-1/2 1-1/2 3-1/4 5-1/4 7-3/4 1 2-1/2 65Other sizes available, contact LAMCO.

Pivot Wedge

112

Model 82-RC – Close Stacking “C” Hook

NOTE:”E” dimension is always one-half of maximum coil width.

Counter weight extends beyond arm one-half of the counter weight width, in capacities 25 Ton and Greater.

SPECIFICATIONS

PRODUCT FEATURES:• Recessed Counterweight allows for close stacking of coils

which maximizes floor space.• Handles a wide range of coil widths.• Designed for heavy duty application.• High tensile alloy steel plate reduces physical size and weight.• Counter balanced to hang level.• Inside radius on hooks avoid coil edge contact.• Curved coil saddle is standard.• Guide handle for ease of coil positioning.• Available with optional padding for additional coil protection.• Designed and manufactured to ASME B30.20.

DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

Other sizes available, contact LAMCO.


CAP. LIFTING ARM BAIL DIMENSIONS

CATALOG IN COIL WIDTH THROAT LENGTH DEPTH WIDTH HDRM OPENING THK. WGT.

NO. TONS MAX. MIN. L D W H A B C T (LBS.)

82RC-5-36 36 24 24 30 5-5/16 4 37-1/4 1-1/2 4 7 1-1/4 550

82RC-5-48 5 48 30 24 39 6-1/8 4 38-1/16 1-1/2 4 7 1-1/4 707

82RC-5-60 60 36 24 48 6-15/16 4 38-15/16 1-1/2 4 7 1-1/4 853

82RC-7 1/2-36 36 24 24 30 5-5/8 4 37-1/2 1-1/2 4 7 1-1/2 750

82RC-7 1/2-48 7-1/2 48 30 24 39 6-3/8 4 38-1/4 1-1/2 4 7 1-1/2 996

82RC-7 1/2-60 60 36 24 48 6-15/16 4 39 1-1/2 4 7 1-1/2 1161

82RC-10-48 48 30 24 39 7-3/16 4 41-1/4 2 5 9 1-3/4 1200

82RC-10-60 10 60 36 24 48 7-5/8 4 41-1/2 2 5 9 1-3/4 1645

82RC-10-72 72 42 24 57 7-1/4 4 41-1/8 2 5 9 1-3/4 2100

82RC-15-48 48 30 30 39 7-1/4 4 47-7/8 2-1/4 5 9 1-3/4 2054

82RC-15-60 15 60 36 30 48 8 4 48 2-1/4 5 9 1-3/4 2410

82RC-15-72 72 42 30 57 8-3/4 4 48-3/4 2-1/4 5 9 1-3/4 2814

82RC-20-60 60 36 30 48 9-1/8 4 52-1/8 2-1/4 6 12 2 2864

82RC-20-72 20 72 42 30 57 9-3/4 4 52-1/2 2-1/4 6 12 2 2951

82RC-25-60 60 36 34 48 9 4 57-3/4 2-1/2 6 14 2-1/4 3077

82RC-25-72 25 72 42 34 57 9-3/4 4 58-3/4 2-1/2 6 14 2-1/4 3570

82RC-30-60 60 36 34 48 9-7/8 4 58-3/4 2-3/4 6 14 2-1/2 3480

82RC-30-72 30 72 42 34 57 10-5/8 4 59-3/8 2-3/4 6 14 2-1/2 4260

82RC-40-72 40 72 42 38 57 11 5 68 3-1/4 7 18 3 6100

SPECIFICATIONS

113

Model 90 – Standard Fixed Forks Pallet Lifter

Model 95 – Heavy Duty Fixed Forks Pallet LifterPRODUCT FEATURES:

• Double frame design for heavy capacities.• Counter balanced to hang level.• Maintenance free.• Designed and manufactured to ASME B30.20.

PRODUCT FEATURES:• Converts overhead crane to lift truck.• Counter balanced to hang level.• Maintenance free.• Allows for ease of loading/unloading in not easily accessi-

ble areas.• Designed and manufactured to ASME B30.20.


Cap. Dimensions in InchesCatalog In Forks Bail Reach Wgt.

No. Tons A B C D E F G H J K (Lbs.)90-1-36 1 36 2 2 25 18 1 3 5 48 60-1/2 37090-1-42 1 42 2 2 25 21 1 3 5 48 60-1/2 39290-1-48 1 48 2 2 25 24 1 3 5 48 60-1/2 405

90-1 1/2-36 1-1/2 36 3 2 25 18 1 3 5 48 60-1/2 41090-1 1/2-42 1-1/2 42 3 2 25 21 1 3 5 48 61-1/2 60190-1 1/2-48 1-1/2 48 3 2 25 24 1 3 5 48 61-1/2 628

90-2-36 2 36 3 2 25 18 1 3 5 48 61-1/2 56490-2-42 2 42 4 2 25 21 1 3 5 48 61-1/2 66190-2-48 2 48 4 2 25 24 1 3 5 48 61-1/2 69290-3-42 3 42 4-1/2 2-1/2 25 21 1-1/2 4 7 48 64 72590-3-48 3 48 4-1/2 2-1/2 27 24 1-1/2 4 7 48 65 91090-3-54 3 54 4-1/2 2-1/2 30 27 1-1/2 4 7 48 65 96590-4-48 4 48 5 3 27 24 1-1/2 4 7 48 66-1/2 118690-4-60 4 60 5 3 30 30 1-1/2 4 7 60 78-1/2 158090-5-48 5 48 5 3 30 24 1-1/2 4 7 48 68-1/2 152290-5-60 5 60 4-1/2 2-1/2 38 30 1-1/2 4 7 60 80-1/2 2094

Cap. Dimensions in InchesCatalog In Forks Bail Reach

Wgt.No. Tons A B C D E F G H J K (Lbs.)

95-7 1/2-48 7-1/2 48 6 2-1/2 30 24 2 5 9 48 65 191095-7 1/2-60 7-1/2 60 10 3 38 30 2 5 9 60 79 200095-10-48 10 48 10 3 30 24 2 5 9 48 69 195095-10-60 10 60 12 3 38 30 2 5 9 60 81 250095-15-48 15 48 7-1/4 3 38 24 2 6 12 60 84 225095-15-60 15 60 10 3 38 30 2 6 12 60 75 380095-20-60 20 60 7 4 38 30 2-1/4 6 12 60 88 4300

114

Model 88 – Heavy Duty Coil Upender

SPECIFICATIONS

* Platform over 42” x 42” will have height of 30”. Pallets must not extend over platform sides.Other sizes available, contact LAMCO.

PRODUCT FEATURES:

• Fast and convenient way to upend coils to 90°.• Heavy Duty disc brake will stop load in any position.• Reversing magnetic starter with 115 volt pendant control.• Stop travel/over travel limit switches.

PRODUCT OPTIONS:

• Larger platforms available.• V Block, either standard or faced.• 180° horizontal rotation which permits loading, and unload-

ing from same side.• Fork lift truck pick-up pockets.

Overall Height:A + C = D

DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

NOTE: If load is nota coil, specify cen-ter of gravity of loadbeing rotated.

Shown with V Block Option

CAPACITY PLATFORM HEIGHT BASECATALOG IN LENGTH WIDTH PLATFORM OVERALL LENGTH WIDTH OVERALL WGT

NO. TONS A B C D E F G (LBS.)88-1-36 1 36 36 24* 60 48 36 51 1,50088-2-36 2 36 36 24* 60 48 36 51 1,60088-3-42 3 42 42 24* 66 56 42 60 2,00088-4-42 4 42 42 24* 66 56 42 60 2,20088-5-48 5 48 48 30 78 61 48 66 2,750

88-7 1/2-48 7-1/2 48 48 30 78 61 48 66 2,90088-10-54 10 54 54 30 84 60 55 74 3,700

88-12 1/2-54 12-1/2 54 54 36 90 69 55 74 4,00088-15-60 15 60 60 36 96 73 60 80 4,50088-20-60 20 60 60 36 96 73 60 80 6,20088-25-72 25 72 72 43 115 88 72 96 10,00088-30-72 30 72 72 48 120 88 72 96 12,000

115

PRODUCT FEATURES:

• Versatile handling of bundled, sheets, plates and othermaterials stacked horizontally.

• Low headroom design for optimum lifting capabilities.• One person operation minimizes handling cost.• Self-locking worm-gear for leg adjustment drive is stan-

dard.• Easy adjustment for different sheet widths.• Rack and pinion leg drive.• Designed for ease of maintenance.• Designed for greater sheet width range.• Designed and manufactured to ASME B30.20.

PRODUCT OPTIONS:• Hand Wheel lockout.• Motorized leg adjustment. • Chain-wheel leg adjustment. • Extended length hand wheel leg adjustment. • End chains with plate hooks (recommended for all widths

72” and greater). • Extended grabshoe lengths available.• Additional bundle clearance available (longer legs).

Model 60 – Heavy Duty Sheet Lifters

Dimensions in Inches

CAUTION: Exceptionally thin or oiled sheets could pose a handling problem. Other sizes available, contact LAMCO.

SPECIFICATIONS

Catalog Cap. In Bundle Width Hdrm. Shoe Min. Bail Opening (in.) Wt.No. Tons Min. Max. H D Aisle A B C T (Lbs.)

60-3-48 16 48 97560-3-60 3 16 60 28 2.63 9 1.5 3 5 .75 101060-3-72 16 72 104060-5-48 16 48 112560-5-60 16 60 117060-5-72 5 16 72 29 2.63 9 2 4 6 1 122060-5-84 16 84 127060-5-96 16 96 155060-10-48 16 48 151060-10-60 16 60 157060-10-72 10 16 72 30 3.5 11 2 4 7 1.5 164060-10-84 16 84 170060-10-96 16 96 177060-15-48 16 48 157060-15-60 16 60 164060-15-72 15 16 72 32 3.5 12 2.5 5 9 1.5 170060-15-84 38 84 196060-15-96 38 96 203060-15-94 38 94 32 3.5 12 2.5 5 9 1.5 1960

A TB

C

117

The Custom SourcePositech builds the largest selection of lifting and positioning equipment in the industry. All models are available in floor mount or space-saving overhead mount. Each can be hydraulically, electrically or pneumatically powered. If our standard models don't meet your needs, customized manipulators can be built to your specifications.

• Taurus™Designed to emulate the humanarm, Positech's high-capacityTaurus positioning arm (TPA)handles the heaviest loads withprecision - up to 1,500 pounds.

• Transfer Arm™Incorporates the low headroomflexibility of the Articulated JibBoom combined with the straightvertical lift of the Vertical LiftCylinder. Positech's low-profileTransfer Arm allows placement inareas too confined to accommo-date larger material handling equip-ment and handles loads up to 500pounds.

• ReactionArm®

Positech's ReactionArm absorbsshock, torsional forces, and impactforce from power tools; thereforereducing carpal tunnel injury andcumulative trauma disorders.

• SAM™ (Simple AirManipulator)For jobs that require the complianceand float of a pneumatic manipulator,this machine gives the highest levelof feel to position the payload..Positech's SAM uses pneumaticpower to provide quick response andsuperior maneuverability with loadsup to 900 pounds.

• AJB (Articulated JibBoom)Designed for low headroomoperations and to maneuveraround work-area obstructions,our standard models support upto 2,000 pounds and allow 360°rotation around the main post.

• World Manipulator™

The World Manipulator combines the strengthof the Taurus and the agility of the SAM whileincorporating metric specifications for easyservice anywhere in the world. Designed for lowheadroom applications that require extendedreach. Handles loads up to 200 kilograms(440bs).

• LodeArm™ and LodeArm™ IIOur LodeArm and LodeArm IIlightweight manipulators provideexcellent maneuverability of pay-loads up to 225 pounds, increas-ing employees' capacity to per-form physically stressful, repeti-tive lifting tasks.

• Vertical Lift CylinderWith up to 6,000-pounds capaci-ty, Positech's Vertical Lift Cylinderis ideal for straight line transfer,over-the-assembly line handlingand reach-in operations whencombined with overhead rail sys-tem or a Positech Articulated JibBoom.

118

High overhead clearancearm with vacuum head and180° power flip to allow fullinspection and secondarywork. Tilt ranges from 0° to180° can be easily attained.Tilts beyond 180° can alsobe designed.

GGCCIIGGCCII“Lifting Solutions”

Leading the Industry in Design Flexibility• Manipulator Arms • Jib Cranes • End of Hook Handling Devices • Roll Handlers

• Custom Engineered End Effectors • Anti-torque Arms • Tool Balancing Arms

Overhead fixed or trackmounted drum lifter.With or without rotationfor controlled contentemptying. Floor mount-ing also available.

Overhead mounted rollhandler on lightweightaluminum bridge cranefor large work areas.

Optional stainless steelpower gripper for washdown application.

Expanding probes for rollhandling or other ID gripperapplications. Optional 3”/6”probe shown with power tilt

Heavy Duty FreeStanding orOverhead Mount

Low profile roll handler withexpanding probe to handle3” or 6” cores.

Multi-cup vacuum withpower tilt. Non-tiltingvacuum applications arealso quite common withboth venturi and blowervacuum sources.

GCI Manipulator Arms have virtually unlimited applications with ends specifically designedto your needs. Use for off center loads, reaching in or under and to keep work pieces squareand stable.

Manual, Air or Electric Powered Arms

Power Grippers

Torque Balancers and Anti-Torque Arms

Expanding Probes

Vacuum Ends

Other Options:• Parking Brakes• Balance Control• 360° Manifold

Optional Portable Base

119

120

• Limitless start/stop cycles for reliable performance and productivity

• Exclusive lost load protection system

• Extra safety with exclusive lock out-tag out device that makes thebalancer inoperable in the event of damage or required maintenance

• Unique pressure compensated flow control maintains lifting speedregardless of fluctuations in plant air pressure

• Chain lift eliminates spinning or fraying plus delivers long wear life

• 18 pocket liftwheel for smooth balancer operation

• True vertical chain travel (80" max.)

• Ergonomic pendant control station

• Forged steel latch type lower hook with bearing for free rotation

• Supplied complete with chain container for loose end chain

• Optional Series 0980 low headroom trolley to operate 25/8" through 55/8"flange beams

• Optional Latchlok hook

• Optional balance control for full 8 feet float capabilities

• Operates on 90 P.S.I. plant air, not 100 P.S.I. like comparable units

• Standard pendant drop 9'-6"

• Made in U.S.A.

Pendant control

Max air balancer

CM Max balancer specifications

Product Rated capacity* Control Working range Reach Net weightcode (lbs.) options (in.)** (in.)† (lbs.)††

0950 120 Pendant control 80 144 60

0953 120 Balance control 80 144 60






0947 120 Dual balance 80 144 60

0948 200 Dual balance 80 144 68

0949 300 Dual balance 80 144 86




** Working range: Vertical lift from the hook in the lowest position to the hook in the highest position.

† Reach: Vertical distance from the bottom of the balancer to the hook in the lowest position. Actual reach may be adjusted at installationand under no circumstances should it be less than 84 inches.

†† Weights listed are for units with pendant controls and do not include the low headroom trolley or suspension plate. For units with balance control, reduce the listed weights by 4 lbs.

CM offers precise positioning or repetitive transferring of loads as heavyas 600 pounds. With up to 8" of float, the operator can position the loadeasily and precisely by hand.

121

Latchlokhook(optional)

M10 x 1.5-6g sockethead cap screw &lockwasher. Two ofeach are furnished.Suspension slot 1.06 deep, .51 wide.

10.69

3.12 dia.wheel tread

5.00

3.94

8.00 dia.

.88

2.00

.84 2.69

50to bottom of slot

.62

10.38

1.00

1.00

.06 minimum witha S4 x 7.7 lb.beam. Clearance will begreater for largerS-beams.

3/8 NPT auxiliary port

3/8 NPT air inlet port

Low headroom trolley (optional)

D

B

C

*81 up161 down

A****

*72 up152 down

3.62

.37 min.

6.50

1.37

Max clearance dimensions (in.)

Rated A**** Dcapacity** headroom B C diameter(lbs.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.)

120 18.85 2.00 20.33 7.75

200 18.85 1.38 20.33 9.63

300 18.85 .38 20.45 11.63

500 18.85 .38 31.00 11.63

120 extended lift*** 18.85 2.00 26.70 7.75

200 extended lift*** 18.85 1.38 26.70 9.63

300 extended lift*** 18.85 .38 27.70 11.63

Note: Dimensions are in inches. Double reeved units available in all models except 500 lb. Doublereeving does not change down dimension as supplied; it doubles the capacity of the unit, anddecreases vertical travel by half.

* Nominal dimension based on the standard length of chain supplied with the CM Max. The chain may be shortened by the customer.

** 90 psi air input is required to operate at the rated capacity.

*** Extended lift provides 130" of lift.

**** Headroom with chain shortened to minimum allowed in up position and with optional lowheadroom trolley as shown. Headroom will be 2.5" longer with optional double reeve. To getthe down dimension add 80" to the up dimension for the standard max and 130" for theextended lift (add half of this dimension for double reeved). Headroom may vary dependingon mounting bracket and truck used.

Max air balancer

* WARNINGOverloading and improper use can result in injury.

To avoid injury:• Do not exceed working load limit, load rating capacity• Do not use to lift people or loads over people.• use only alloy chain for overhead lifting.• Read and follow all instructions.

122

Tool BalancersTool Balancers are the economical choice for balancing heavytools. The molded plastic housing has a smooth exterior withrounded edges for maximum ergonomic convenience. Hand-windable spring tension adjustment knob is flush with thehousing. Push-button tension release simplifies decrease intension. Adjustment screw adds drag to spool for fine tuningof tension. Rugged steel upper swivel hook. Oversized cableopening with direct in-line pull to reduce cable wear.Adjustable cable stop and lower safety snap hook. Springoperation - no electricity needed.

• Swivel Hook• Push Button• Safety Cable

Provision• Rotate Clockwise

to Increase Tension

• Adjustable SafetyStop

• Snap Hook

Load Arrestor3700300

Protect valuable equipment and materials with DBI/SALA's sturdy, self-con-tained backup load arrestors. They are designed and engineered to com-pletely stop a dropping load if it breaks free from the main support unit.

#3700300 Load Arrestor’s maximum load is 660 lbs., length of cable is 40 ft.Other models are available for loads up to 2,200 lbs. and lengths of 8 ft. to 99 ft.All models have the following features:

• Inertia activated brake with brake indicator button

• Shock absorbing system

• 3/16" self retracting steel cable

• Meets or exceeds all applicable industry standards including OSHA and ANSI

Similar Models:

3700400 : 880 lb. capacity, 26' of cable3700801 : 1,760 lb. capacity, 13' of cable3700501 : 1,100 lb. capacity, 17' of cable

123

TMM-140 Air Manipulator Hoist

Ideal Applications Include:

• Assembly lines

• Machine shops

• Cleaning and/or dippingoperations

• Manufacturing plants

• Power generating stations

• Shipping departments

• Chemical facilities

• Fabricating shops

• Repetitive lifting applications

• Auto and truck repair

• Handling fixtures and dies

Specifications:

300 Lb./140Kg Air Manipulator Hoist

The CM TMM-140 is ideal for workstation applications.Lightweight and portable, the unit weighs less than 20 pounds and operates at 100% (A5) duty cycle.

• Smooth operator - Efficient rotary vane motor provides high uniform torque for quick response, and smooth, quiet operation.

• Easy to use - Handle-mounted pendant control for one-handed operation and load positioning.

• Variable speeds - Precise and infinite speed control for accurate load spotting.

• Wire rope design - Self-winding lifting cable storesconveniently inside unit.

• Suspension - Swivel top and bottom hooks with hook latches standard, for portability and quick installation.

• Disc brake - Secures load and eliminates drift when pendant is released.

• Note - A 3/8" NPT air filter-regulator-lubricator is needed foreffective operation. Spark resistant features are not available.

Std. Max air Net Capacity Model Product lift Load No load Headroom pres. wt.

(lb.) number code (ft.) (up) (Down) (up) (Down) (m3/min) (ft3/min) (in.) D W L (psi) (lb.)

300 TMM-140 17050W 6' 6" 36 59 49 39 0.6 21/2 223/4 72/3 77/8 233/4 70-95 18.7

Lift speeds (FPM)Air consumption Housing dimen. (in.)



124

125

Posi-Turner® Load Rotation SystemsSuspends and rotates objects 360 degrees or more with controlled rotation.

PRODUCT FEATURES:Applications for the Posi-Turner® are endless.Some common applications are:• Composite Molds• Fabrication & Assembly• Materials/Metal Handling• Machining• Die & Mold Maintenance• Assembly Line• Mold Production Removal• Inspection & Repair

126

Counterweight BasesPortable counterweight bases are available for freestandingworkstation jibs, which allows the jib to be moved by fork liftanywhere in the facility. • Available in capacities to 500 lbs.

and spans to 16 ft., depending on combination of span and capacity. • Portable cranes eliminate the need for unnecessary hoisting

equipment. One unit can service multiple areas.

Cost-effective Solutions For Lifting and Moving

Heavy Material

ENCLOSED TRACK WORKSTATION JIB CRANES

FREESTANDING

• SPANCO can custom design and manufacture jib cranes for any application.

• SPANCO freestanding 360° rotation workstation jib cranes are an ideal, lightweight ergonomic solution for smaller capacity loads up to 1,000 lbs., spans to 16 ft. Lightweight boom design makes the jib easier to rotate and position.

FREE STANDING

WORKSTATIONJIB CRANES

127

WALL MOUNTED

• SPANCO’s wall mounted200° rotation enclosed trackworkstation jibcranes can be tie rodsupported for the lowest cost or compression braced for maximumhead room.

• Tie rod supported models can be fabricated with trussed track for spansup to 34 ft.

WARNING:Jib cranes should not be hung from any existing building structure without first consulting a qualified architect or engi-neer for the purpose of determining if the structure is adequate. Severe bodily injury and property damage can resultif this procedure is not followed.

WALL MOUNTEDWORKSTATIONJIB CRANES

128

standard bridge lengths to 34'custom designs available

standard capacities to 2 tons

trolley clevis height above floor determined by ceiling structure

Pre-engineered system kit. Everything

supplied excepthoist and sway

bracing.standard runway lengths to 103'

SPANCO ceiling mounted workstation bridge cranes provide ideal, cost effectivematerial handling solutions…

• If work floor space is limited: Ceiling mounted systems provide infinite coverage without interfering supportcolumns. Systems can be linked to a monorail or another bridge crane using crane interlock sections.

• Easy, ergonomic movement: An operator pushing a 1000 lb. load, will experience a force of approximately 10 lb.to begin moving the load and 8 lb. to continue moving the load (100 to 1 ratio). Manual cranes also operatemore quickly than motorized cranes making them ideal for fast paced work environments.

However, if the application requires moving heavier loads up to two tons or bridge travel over an inaccessible area,then a motorized system can be used efficiently. SPANCO can provide motorized systems in 1,000, 2,000 and 4,000 lb. capacities.

Ceiling mounted systems are supported by the building structure. Aqualified architect or engineer should be consult-ed to determine the adequacy of the building structure intended to support the crane system.

SOLVING YOUR MATERIAL HANDLING PROBLEMS WITH CEILING MOUNTED WORKSTATION BRIDGE CRANES

CEILING MOUNTED

WORKSTATIONBRIDGE CRANES

AvailableCapacities (lbs)

250500

1,0002,0004,000

129

DESIGN FACTORS• Nameplate bridge capacity represents the rated load on the hoist hook. The load rating of a hoist shall not exceed the bridge rating. SPANCO’s design includes an allowance of 15% of nameplate capacity for dead weight of the trol-ley and hoist. An additional allowance of 25% of nameplate capacity is also included for impact.

SERVICE FACTORAll SPANCO workstation cranes are designed for frequent usage (heavy service) as defined:

• System or equipment is used where operational time is up to 100% of the work period and lifted load is at 50% orbelow rated capacity.

• System or equipment is used where operational time is less than 50% of work period and lifted load is greater than50% of rated capacity.

• Applications involving vacuums, magnets, or other high impact lifters are considered severe usage (continuousservice) and require special design considerations. Please contact factory for special design pricing.

• Consult factory for usage other than moderate and all instances of high cycle rates or high impact applications suchas high speed air or electric hoists, vacuum lifters, or magnets. FACTORY MUST APPROVE ALL SUCHAPPLICATIONS.

DETERMINING CAPACITY, WIDTH, LENGTH, AND HEIGHT

• Capacity: Load weights should be predetermined in order to avoid buying extra, unneeded capacity. Bridgedead weight will add more weight to the load the operator will be moving.

• Width: Bridge span is the length of a bridge between centers of two runways. SPANCO’s standard design pro-vides a standard bridge overhang of 12 in. on each end beyond the runway centerline. Bridge length is theoverall length.

• Length: Runway length is determined by the length of a specific area requiring coverage. Runways are support-ed on maximum 20, 25, or 30 ft. support centers. Plain track runways are supported every 6 ft. for 400, 500,600, and 900 series and every 9 ft. for 700 series.

• Height: In order to attain minimal resistance, it is recommended that the trolley clevis height be kept as low aspossible, with practical consideration given to minimum headroom requirements. Height is measured from thefloor to the trolley clevis from which a hoist is suspended.

130

Cantilevered Bridges

• One or both ends of the crane bridge can be can-tilevered beyond the standard 12 in. overhang in order tocover a wider area.

• For specific applications, consult factory for an engi-neered solution.

SPANCO ceiling mounted bridge crane dimensional charts are organized according to the length of themaximum support centers for each runway. Generally, considering the following points is helpful for determining spe-cific runway support centers:

• The size of the building or specific area requiring coverage: Will the system cover the full building perimeter or a smaller specific area within a building?

• Location of fixed structures such as machinery, building columns, overhead lighting, and fixtures.

• Specific logistics of the area requiring coverage: Is the system moving material to an assembly line, into storage,or from one workstation to another?

CONSIDERATIONS FOR PLAIN TRACK

• Maximum runway support centers are 6 feet for 400, 500, 600, and 900 series track. Support centers Are 9 feetfor 700 series track.

• Specific headroom requirements: Runways can be flush mounted to overhead building steel if conditions permit,allowing the lowest possible headroom constraint.

CONSIDERATIONS FOR TRUSSED TRACK

• Maximum runway support centers are 20, 25, and 30 feet.

• Specific headroom requirements: 20 ft. runway support centers allow for runway trusses with the shortest depth,maximizing headroom space under the hoist.

SPECIFICATION CHARTS

Telescoping Bridges

• Provide extended reach to areas beyond a column orunder mezzanines or shelving; a neighboring worksta-tion; or into a specific area or opening requiring coverage.

• Steel anti-kickup wheels prevent bridge binding, ensur-ing smooth movement.

• Range in capacities up to 2000 lb. For specific applications, consult factory for an engineered solution.

TRUSSEDCANTILEVERED SYSTEM

CANTILEVERED SYSTEM

TELESCOPINGSYSTEM

131

CEILING MOUNTED WORKSTATION BRIDGE CRANES

RUNWAY TRUSS ORPLAINTRACK, ENDTRUCK, & TRUSSHANGERS

BRIDGE (TRUSS TYPE SHOWN) ROOF BEAM OR OTHER STRUCTURE (BYOTHERS) SPECIFY WHEN ORDERING

BRIDGE SPAN (BS)

BRIDGE LENGTH (BL)

CLEAR SPAN (CS)

B/R

ASS

EMBL

Y(B

RH

)

BRIDGE HOOK APPROACH 1 (BHA1)

BRIDGE HOOK APPROACH 2 (BHA 2)

BRIDGE FESTOON

RUNWAY LENGTH (RL)

C = TROLLEY DIMENSION (bottom of the bridge to trolley clevis) BH = BRIDGE HEIGHT RH = RUNWAY HEIGHT

STANDARD UP TO 103'

(LONGER RUNWAYS AVAILABLE)

END STOPS (OR TRACK SPLICE @LONGER RUNWAYS)

END TRUCKTROLLEY (DIMENSIONS BASED ON STANDARD) (C)

RUNWAY FESTOON CONTINUES TO BRIDGEFESTOON & HOIST

BRIDGE (TRUSS TYPE SHOWN)

B/R

ASSE

MBL

Y(B

RH

) 1' 0"

1' 0" MAXIMUMCANTILEVER

RUNWAY LENGTH (RL) STANDARD UP TO 103'

(LONGER RUNWAYS AVAILABLE)

END STOPS (ORTRACK SPLICE @ LONGER RUNWAYS)

END TRUCKTROLLEY (DIMENSIONS BASED ON STANDARD) (C)

RUNWAY FESTOON CONTINUES TO BRIDGE FESTOON & HOIST

BRIDGE (TRUSS TYPE SHOWN) SPLICE PLATES @ LONGER RUNWAYS

SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C)

B/R

ASSE

MBL

Y(B

RH

) 1' - 6" 1' - 6"

1' - 2

3/1

6"(S

TD)

1' - 5

3/8

"(S

TD)

TRO

LLEY

CLE

VIS

HT.

(TC

H)

RUNWAY HOOK APPROACH (RHA)



RUNWAY TRUSS

FESTOON TRACK EXTENSION (FTE)


PLAIN TRACK RUNWAY

TRUSSED TRACK RUNWAY4' - 0" MAXIMUMCANTILEVER

1' 0"

TRO

LLEY

CLE

VIS

HT.

(TC

H)

TO POWERSUPPLY

TRO

LLEY

CLE

VIS

HT.

(TC

H)

2" SIDE CLEARANCE

(BH)

2" SIDE CLEARANCE

12" TO 54" (STANDARD FESTOON TRACK EXTENSIONS) SPECIAL LENGTHS AVAILABLE

(RH)

FSA


MAXIMUM SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C)

TO POWERSUPPLY

TROLLEY (DIMENSIONSBASED ON STANDARD) (C)

™

132

SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FOR CEILING MOUNTED KITS

SPANCO Ceiling Mounted Workstation Bridge Crane kits include:

BRIDGE KITS1. Plain bridge, tube reinforced bridge, or trussed bridge as required2. Hoist trolley3. Bridge end stops4. Festoon cable with trolleys5. End trucks

RUNWAY KITS1. Hangers2. Runway end stops3. Festoon cables with trolleys4. Standard festoon track extension5. Plain or trussed runways

• Ceiling mounted system kits include appropriate number of hanger rods, hangers, adjustable beam clamps, and track supportbrackets.

• Ceiling mounted system kits do not include hoist or required sway bracing.• All ceiling mounted systems must be properly braced to existing structure using proper sway bracing. To achieve desired rigidi-

ty for specific application, SPANCO recommends consulting a professional architect or engineer in your local area to satisfyall codes and ordinances.

• Dimensions shown are approximate and subject to change without notice. All catalog dimensions are developed using stan-dard components for the spans and capacities required. Substitution of optional trolleys or other components will affect cer-tain dimensions. If specific clearances are required, specify at time of order.

CUSTOMER:TRACK SERIES: CAPACITY:NUMBER OF UNITS:TROLLEY CLEVIS HT. (TCH):CEILING HEIGHT:BRIDGE / RUNWAYMODEL NUMBER:BRIDGE LENGTH (BL):CLEAR SPAN (CS):OVERALL RUNWAY LENGTH (RL):

STANDARD SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C):RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C1):RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C2):RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C3):RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C4):RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C5):HANGER ROD LENGTH:ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:FESTOON TRACK EXTENSION (FTE):FESTOON CABLE LENGTH (FCL):

BRIDGE CRANE KITS & CEILING MOUNTED KITS

Applies to all runway lengths up to 103'

CEILING MOUNTED WORKSTATION BRIDGE CRANESEND APPROACH

™

133

SOLVING YOUR MATERIAL HANDLING PROBLEMS WITHSTAND ALONE WORKSTATION BRIDGE CRANES

SPANCO stand alone workstation bridge cranes provide ideal, cost effective material handling solutions…

If you rent your building: Stand alone systems do not become a permanent part of a structure onceinstalled, allowing for relocation.

Your structural building support is inadequate for an overhead ceiling mounted crane: The onlymounting requirement is a standard concrete building floor (in most cases).

A specific area needs coverage, however you don’t want to tie up your existing overhead crane:Stand alone SPANCO workstation bridge crane systems can provide coverage for individual work areas.

STAND ALONEWORKSTATIONBRIDGE CRANES

standard bridge lengths to 34'custom designs available

standard capacities to 2 tons

standard heights 10' - 12' - 14'

standard runway lengths to 124'

AvailableCapacities (lbs)

250500

1,0002,0004,000

Pre-engineered system kit. Everything

supplied excepthoist and sway

bracing.

134

STAND ALONE WORKSTATION BRIDGE CRANES

DETERMINING CAPACITY, WIDTH, LENGTH, AND HEIGHT

• Capacity: Load weights should be predetermined in order to avoid buying extra, unneeded capacity.Bridge dead weight will add more weight to the load the operator will be moving.

• Width: Bridge span is the length of a bridge between centers of two runways. SPANCO’s standard designprovides a standard bridge overhang of 12 in. on each end beyond the runway centerline. Bridge lengthis the overall length.

• Length: Runway length is determined by the length of a specific area requiring coverage. Runways aresupported on maximum 20, 25, or 30 ft. support centers.

• Height: In order to attain minimal resistance, it is recommended that the trolley clevis height be kept aslow as possible, with practical consideration given to minimum headroom requirements. Height is meas-ured from the floor to the trolley clevis from which a hoist is suspended. The specification charts give theoverall height of each system.

HEADER LENGTH (HL)

RUNWAYTRUSS,

END TRUCK, & TRUSS

HANGERS

1' - 0"

2"

TROLLEY (DIMENSIONSBASED ON STANDARD)


BRIDGE FESTOON

BRIDGE SPAN (BS)

BRIDGE LENGTH (BL)COLUMN CENTERS (C/C)

CLEAR SPAN (CS)

OVERALL WIDTH (OAW) AT BASE

SLAB OR FOUNDATION DESIGN NOTBY SPANCO

B/R

ASS

EMBL

Y(B

RH

)

HEA

DER

(HD

R)

OVE

RAL

LH

EIG

HT

(OAH

)

TRO

LLEY

CLE

VIS

HT.

(TC

H)

COLUMN

1' - 0"

2"

COLUMN

BHA1 BHA2

OVERALL RUNWAY LENGTH(RL):

STANDARD SUPPORT CENTERS(S/C):

RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C1):





OVERALL HEIGHT (OAH):

ELECTRICAL REQMNTS:

FESTOON TRACK EXTENSION (FTE):

FESTOON CABLE LENGTH (FCL):

CUSTOMER:

TRACK SERIES: CAPACITY:

NUMBER OF UNITS:

TROLLEY CLEVIS HT. (TCH):

BRIDGE / RUNWAY:

MODEL NUMBER:

RUNWAY SUPPORT ASSEMBLY:

MODEL NUMBER:

BRIDGE LENGTH(BL):

CLEAR SPAN (CS):

OVERALL WIDTH (OAW):

135

COLUMN

RUNWAY LENGTH (RL) STANDARD UP TO 103'

(LONGER RUNWAYSAVAILABLE)

END STOPS (OR TRACKSPLICE @LONGER

RUNWAYS)

END TRUCK

TROLLEY (DIMENSIONSBASED ON STANDARD)

RUNWAY FESTOONTO POWERSUPPLY

RUNWAY TRUSS

CONTINUES TO BRIDGEFESTOON & HOIST


RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (SEE CHARTS)SPECIFY S/C1, S/C2, S/C3, ETC. FOR CUSTOM PRODUCTS

COLUMNSLAB OR

FOUNDATION DESIGNNOT BY SPANCO

12" TO 54" (STANDARD FESTOON TRACK EXTENSIONS, SPECIAL LENGTHS AVAILABLE)

SPLICE PLATES@ LONGERRUNWAYS

COLUMN SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C)

B/R

ASSE

MBL

Y(B

RH)

HEA

DER

(HD

R) 1' - 6"

1' - 6"

4' - 0" MAXIMUMCANTILEVER


S/C1, S/C2, S/C3, S/C4, S/C5, ETC.

SPECIFY IF NON-STANDARD

TRO

LLEY

CLE

VIS

HT.

(TC

H)

RHARHA

FTE

BRIDGE CRANE KITS & STAND ALONE KITS

136

CO

L. +

6"

CO

L. +

5"

CO

L. +

3"

CO

LUM

N

CO

LUM

N

CO

LUM

N

CO

L. +

5"

CO

L. +

3"

CO

L. +

2"

BASE DETAIL “A”125# CAP. w/ 3" COLS. (10', 12', 14' TCH)250# CAP. w/ 3" COLS. (10', 12', 14' TCH)500# CAP. w/ 3" COLS. (10' TCH)

BASE DETAIL “B”250# CAP. w/ 4" COLS. (10', 12', 14' TCH)500# CAP. w/ 4" COLS. (10', 12', 14' TCH)

1000# CAP. w/4" COLS. (10', 12' TCH)4000# CAP. w/7" COLS. (10', 12',14' TCH)

BASE DETAIL “C”1000# CAP. w/5" COLS. (14 TCH)2000# CAP. w/5" COLS. (10', 12',14' TCH)

SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FOR STAND ALONE KITS

SPANCO Stand Alone Workstation Bridge Crane kits include:1. Plain, reinforced, or trussed crane bridge with end trucks2. Hoist trolley3. Runway support columns4. Runway trusses5. Header beams6. Hanger clamps, end stops, and flat wire electrification festooning system for both runway and bridge

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS: • Bracing to building steel for lateral and longitudinal stability required (furnished by others). To achieve desired rigidity for an application,

SPANCO recommends consulting a professional engineer in your area to satisfy all codes and ordinances.• Four 3/4" diameter anchor bolts required per column (furnished by others).• Hoist supplied by others.

OTHER SYSTEM CONSIDERATIONS:• Per SPANCO’s design standard, at maximum load conditions, deflection is restricted to approximately 1/450 of span. SPANCO candesign to meet any higher customer standard.• SPANCO Stand Alone Workstations are for frequent usage in a normal industrial environment.• Maximum support spacing for trussed track at rated capacity shall not exceed:

400 Series = 20' or 25' 700 Series = 20', 25', or 30'500 Series = 20', 25', or 30' 900 Series = 20' or 25'600 Series = 20', 25', or 30'

• Dimensions shown are approximate and are subject to change without notice. All catalog dimensions are developed using standardcomponents for the spans and capacities required. Substitution of optional trolleys or other components will affect certain dimensions ifspecific clearances are required at the time of order.

COLUMN DETAILS

Applies to all runway lengths up to 108'

STAND ALONE WORKSTATION BRIDGE CRANESEND APPROACH

Chain HoistFEATURES AND BENEFITS

Overload Protection This is standard on all hoists and is factory set. The overload is integral with the hoist and prevents the operator from overloading the hoist. When activated, the overload will not allow hoist operation. When the overload is activated, lower the load, if lifting, or release the load, if pulling. Then select a larger capacity hoist, or consult a lifting specialist for another means of operation.

Minimal Load Lifting Effort

These hoists require 20% - 30% less effort than the competition. Lift heavy loads with ease. Ideal for frequent lifting/pulling applications.

Fully Enclosed Gearing This protects the gears from contamination and debris.

All Steel Construction These hoists are strong, durable and rugged, providing a long and dependable service life.

Malleable Hooks with Cast Steel Safety Latches

These hooks open when overloaded, thus providing the operator with a hook load reference point. Each heavy duty cast steel safety latch has a bolt and lock nut connection rather than roller pins used by most competitors. This feature facilitates changing latches in the fi eld.

Weather Proof Load Holding Brake

Both hoists have a protected Weston Brake which holds the load during the entire operation. The hoists are also equipped with a unique twin pawl design.

All Gears and Shafts Run on Roller Bearings

This feature provides smooth controlled operation as well as maintenance free lubrication.

Stainless Steel Riveted ID Tags

These tags will not rust and will maintain clear distinct information for easy identifi cation.

Safety Yellow Powder Coating

This process provides a long lasting fi nish in hostile environments.

Maintenance Hoists can be quickly disassembled for fast and easy maintenance.

Certifi cation Each hoist is load tested and comes with a serial number and test certifi cate dedicated to each hoist. This provides complete traceability throughout the manufacturing process.

EATURE

verload Prverload Pr

inimal Loaffort

ully Enclos

ll Steel Co

alleable Hast Steel Satches

Weather Proolding Bra

ll Gears anun on Roll

tainless StD Tags

afety Yellooating

aintenanc

Certifi cation

FE

OvOv

MEf

Fu

Al

MCaLa

WHo

AlRu

StID

SaCo

M

138

SPECIFICATIONS (0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5 and 10 tons)

DIMENSIONS (0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5 and 10 tons)

FEATURES AND BENEFITS

Product Code OZ005CHOP OZ010CHOP OZ015CHOP OZ020CHOP OZ030CHOP OZ050CHOP OZ100CHOP

Safe Working Load (tons) .5 (t) 1 (t) 1.5 (t) 2 (t) 3 (t) 5 (t) 10 (t)

Falls of Chain 1 1 1 1 2 2 4

Effort to Lift S.W.L (pounds) 50.10 (lbs) 66.14 (lbs) 70.46 (lbs) 77.16 (lbs) 59.52 (lbs) 90.39 (lbs) 85.98 (lbs)

Loadchain Diameter (millimeters)

6 (mm) 6 (mm) 8 (mm) 8 (mm) 8 (mm) 10 (mm) 10 (mm)

Dimensional Information (inches)

ABC

10.62 (in)5.00 (in)5.15 (in)

12.48 (in)6.22 (in)5.51 (in)

15.70 (in)7.36 (in)6.33 (in)

16.29 (in)7.36 (in)6.33 (in)

18.30 (in)8.26 (in)6.33 (in)

25.03 (in)9.96 (in)6.33 (in)

29.52 (in)14.68 (in)7.24 (in)

Hook-opening, upper & lower (inches)

1.18 (in) 1.10 (in) 1.41 (in) 1.31 (in) 1.57 (in) 1.96 (in) 2.51 (in)

Net Weight of Head Only (pounds)

12 (lbs) 17 (lbs) 25 (lbs) 29 (lbs) 49 (lbs) 60 (lbs) 113 (lbs)

Fully Machined Lift Wheel - This feature perfectly accepts the chain allowing for a smooth long lasting operation.

Totally Enclosed Gearing - This design protects gears from contamination and debris.

Thrust Bearing on Lower Hook - Allows easy rotation of load while suspended & prevents load chain twisting.

Lifting or Pulling - This hand hoist can be used for lifting or pulling which makes for a more fl exible and versatile tool.

Unique Hand Wheel Design - This feature enables the hand chain to successfully feed directly into the wheel sprocket from many directions and angles. The operator can work the hoist, while standing above or to the side of the load, without jamming the hand chain.

Low Headroom - Provides maximum lift by minimizing space taken up by the hoist, making it ideal in restricted space applications.

Electro Zinc Plated Hand Chain - Provides a durable fi nish.

Tempered Load Chain - Provides a long, reliable lifting life.

with overload protection

FEATURES AND BENEFITSFully Machined Lift Wheel This feature perfectly accepts the chain allowing for

with overload proteecd p ceewith overload proteo e oad p o eeith oveChain Hoist

139

140

• Most interchangeability of parts inthe industry

• Standard Load Limiter for simple,automatic overload protection

• Enclosed contoured Weston-typeautomatic brake for positive loadcontrol

• High-efficiency spur gearing forgreater lift with minimum effort

• Rugged Hoistaloy chain for addedstrength and durability

• Fully machined, forged liftwheelpockets for easier lifting and smoothfree chaining

• High-strength aluminum alloycastings in frame and covers

• Inspected over 75 times to meet orexceed HMI and ASME/ANSIperformance and safety standards

• Standard hand chain drop is 2 feetless than lift, (example: 8 foot lifthoist has 6 foot hand chain drop)

• Lifetime warranty

• Metric rated

• Made in U.S.A.

Cyclone hand chain hoistOne of the most popular and reliable hoists ever designed, the Cyclone combines superiorengineering, efficiency and durability. Available in a variety of capacities from 1/4 ton to 10tons, Cyclone features:



• Options Include

• Fabric chain bags

• Metal chain containers

• Zinc-plated load and hand chain

• Unwelded hand chain

• Latchlok hooks

• Bronze hooks

• Bullard hooks

• Eye-type suspension

Geared trolley Plain trolley

Fabricchainbag

Metalchaincontainer

142

Specifications

Minimum Chain Rated Standard distance overhauled Chain pull Shippingcapacity* Product lift† between to lift load to lift full weight(tons) code (ft.) Reeving hooks (in.) one foot (ft.) load (lbs.) (lbs.)1/4 4621 8 1 127/8 221/2 23 371/2 4622 8 1 127/8 221/2 46 37

1 4624 8 1 14 30 69 40

11/2 4625 8 1 175/16 401/2 80 65

2 4626 8 1 175/16 52 83 64

3 4627 8 2 211/2 81 85 96

4 4628 8 2 211/2 104 88 96

5 4629 8 3 241/4 156 75 128

6 4630 8 3 251/4 156 90 132

8 4631 8 4 341/2 208 89 235

10 4632 8 5 351/2 260 95 249

† Can be supplied with longer lifts

Clearance dimensions (in.)

Dimen-1/4 1/2 1 11/2 & 2 3 & 4 5 6 8 10sion

A 127/8 127/8 14 175/16 211/2 241/4 251/4 341/2 351/2

B 311/16 311/16 311/16 43/16 35/16 43/16 43/16 43/4 43/4

C 73/16 73/16 73/16 611/16 815/16 105/16 105/16 123/4 123/4

D 41/8 41/8 41/8 51/16 51/16 47/8 47/8 513/16 513/16

E 31/4 31/4 31/4 413/16 413/16 5 5 41/16 41/16

F 21/16 21/16 21/16 31/8 3 215/16 215/16 33/4 33/4

G 37/8 37/8 33/4 53/16 81/4 1113/16 1113/16 173/16 173/16

H 11/16 11/16 13/16 11/8 11/4 11/4 13/8 111/16 113/16

I 33/4 33/4 33/4 413/16 41/4 43/16 43/16 61/16 61/16

J 25/8 25/8 215/16 35/8 41/8 41/8 45/8 55/8 61/8

JJ 25/8 25/8 39/16 311/16 47/8 — — — —

K 15/16 15/16 11/8 11/2 111/16 111/16 17/8 21/4 29/16

L 13/4 13/4 13/4 11/4 31/2 47/8 47/8 75/16 75/16

M 71/16 71/16 71/16 85/8 85/8 85/8 85/8 85/8 85/8

N — — — — 107/8 107/8 107/8 107/8 107/8

R 57/16 57/16 57/16 57/16 — — — — —

S 411/16 411/16 411/16 411/16 — — — — —

T — — — — 37/8 4 4 63/8 63/8

W — — — — 41/2 61/4 61/4 67/16 67/16

X 11/32 11/32 11/8 15/16 15/8 15/8 13/4 21/16 25/16

Y — — — — 51/8 57/8 57/8 59/16 59/16

Rated capacity*(tons)

Cyclone hand chain hoist



143

Optional upperLatchlok Hook3/4 – 11/2 ton

Optionalanchor sling

OptionalLoad Limiter

• Easy one-hand operation• Lever pull range is 45 to 62 pounds to lift

full load• Handle that rotates 360°, making it easy to

operate in any position and in small spaces

• Tough yet lightweight aluminumconstruction and powder coat finish

• Hoistaloy hardened steel load chain forstrength, long wear life and flexibility

• Free chaining for fast, easy attachment toload

• Forged upper and lower hooks withlatches

• Simple construction with fewer parts forease of maintenance

• Optional Load Limiter device protectsagainst overload

• Lifetime warranty • Made in U.S.A.

Specifications - Short handle puller without chain

Approx.Rated shippingcapacity* Product weight(tons) code (lbs.)3/4 7301P 12

11/2 7321P 21

3 7331P 28

Optional kits

Approx. Rated Product shipping capacity*code weight (lbs.) (tons)

Load Limiter7310P 1 3/4

7311P 2 11/2-3

Anchor Sling7309P 2 3/4

7312P 3 11/2

1001 2 3/4

upper 1003 2 11/2

Latchlok Hook1004 3 3

1001 2 3/4

lower 1003 2 11/2

1005 3 3

Optional upper LatchlokHook3 ton

Specifications - Short handle puller

Pull to Minimum Hook Approx.Rated Standard lift full distance Lever throat shippingcapacity* Product lift loads between length openings weight(tons) code (ft.) (lbs.) hooks (in.) (in.) Reeving (in.) (lbs.)3/4 7300P 5 45 121/4 12 1 11/32 16

11/2 7320P 5 55 143/4 163/4 1 11/8 27

3 7330P 5 62 175/8 163/4 2 13/16 40

Short handle puller

144

•Plated load chain is standard.

• Weston type load brake.

• Rubber grip for better comfort andsecurity.

• Lightweight design weighs only 5 lbs. forease of operation and portability. Use inconfined conditions with one hand oper-ation.

• Forged upper and lower hooks withlatches standard.

• Impact resistant all-steel frame, gearcase and cover

• Hardened link type steel load chainfor strength and long wear.

• Free chaining feature serves toquickly attach the load.

•Conforms with ASME B30.21.

• Standard five-ft. lift. Units with ten-ft.lift available - Product Code # 0214

CM Series 602 mini ratchet lever hoist

The CM Series 602 mini hoist is themost compact ratchet lever hoist inthe market.

Convenient Carry Bag - Product Code # 0212

• 50% wider hardened ratchet gear• Grade 100 alloy chain for more strength

with less weight• Chain guide system allows for horizontal

operation• High impact resistant gear case and

brake cover

• Precision Bearings• Disc Brake• Braking capacity is 4 times rated capacity• Manufactured to ISO-9002 quality

standard• Triple chain guide for consistent up and

down FREE WHEELING with one hand

Professional Lever Hoists (disc brake)

Each unit comesstandard with arugged storagebag. Additionalbags are avail-able, modelBAG-12

MODELNUMBER

CAPACITY(POUNDS)

STANDARDLIFT (FEET)

MINIMUM DISTANCEBETWEEN HOOKS

HANDLELENGTH

NET WT.(POUNDS)

PLH-15-5PLH-15-10PLH-15-20

1,5001,5001,500

51020

11”11”11”

11”11”11”

151822

PLH-30-5PLH-30-10PLH-30-20

3,0003,0003,000

51020

15-1/2”15-1/2”15-1/2”

16”16”16”

232735

PLH-60-5PLH-60-10PLH-60-20

6,0006,0006,000

51020

22-7/16”22-7/16”22-7/16”

16”16”16”

354249

PROFESSIONAL LEVER HOISTseries PLH

This Mini-but-Mighty Hoist Lifts Up To 550 Lbs. Easy Toolbox Storage

145

ALLDIMENSIONS

ARE ININCHES

Product code # 0210

Capacity 550 lbs.

Standard lift 5 ft.

Number of chain parts 1

Chain dimensions

d x t (in inches) . 16 x .47

Lift with one full lever turn 3.15 in.

Handle pull at W.L.L. 58.0 lbs.

Weight with standard lift 5.0 lbs.



Series 602 mini ratchet lever hoist

146

Series 653Lever operated hoistIdeal for constructionand industrial applicationsThe Series 653 lever operated hoist is a high quality, rugged, steel tool for close quarter pulling, stretching, and hoisting applications. Its characteristic short handle, along with minimal lever pull effort, make this tool ideal for a broad range of applications.

• Capacities from 3/4 to 3 tons

• Impact resistant, stamped steel frame, gear case and cover for durability andlight weight.

• Powder coated finish for added corrosion protection.

• Hardened steel load sharing gears.

• Double pawl arrangement for assured load control.

• Two chain guide rollers for positive chain engagement.

• Weston type braking system for positive load control and positioning.

• Simple one-handed, free chaining for fast load attachment.

• Hardened steel chain for strength and long wear life.

• Forged upper and lower hooks with heavy cast steel latches.

• Rubber handle grip for added operator comfort.

• Minimal maintenance with no special tools required.

• 5-year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship.

• Metric rated.

• Meets ASME B30.21 – Manually Lever Operated Hoist Standard andEuropean CE Standard.

• Designed and manufactured by Columbus McKinnon Corporation.

Load Lift or Lever pull Approx.Product rating reach to lift rated ship wt.code (tonnes) (ft.) load (lbs.) (lbs.) A B C D E F G H J K L

5310 3/4 5 33 15.0 125/8 15/16 11/8 11/16 11 43/8 23/16 23/16 515/16 23/8 39/16

5311 3/4 10 33 15.8 125/8 15/16 11/8 11/16 11 43/8 23/16 23/16 515/16 23/8 39/16

5312 3/4 15 33 16.6 125/8 15/16 11/8 11/16 11 43/8 23/16 23/16 515/16 23/8 39/16

5313 3/4 20 33 17.3 125/8 15/16 11/8 11/16 11 43/8 23/16 23/16 515/16 23/8 39/16

5328 1 5 44 15.0 125/8 15/16 11/8 11/16 11 43/8 23/16 23/16 515/16 23/8 39/16

5315 11/2 5 51 27.0 143/16 11/8 11/4 13/16 161/4 43/8 23/8 23/8 67/8 3 315/16

5316 11/2 10 51 31.4 143/16 11/8 11/4 13/16 161/4 43/8 23/8 23/8 67/8 3 315/16

5317 11/2 15 51 35.8 143/16 11/8 11/4 13/16 161/4 43/8 23/8 23/8 67/8 3 315/16

5318 11/2 20 51 40.2 143/16 11/8 11/4 13/16 161/4 43/8 23/8 23/8 67/8 3 315/16

5329 2 5 68 27.0 1413/16 11/8 11/4 13/16 161/4 43/8 23/8 23/8 67/8 3 315/165320 3 5 77 45.0 1811/16 113/16 19/16 11/4 161/4 71/2 33/8 43/16 77/8 33/8 49/16

5321 3 10 77 52.3 1811/16 113/16 19/16 11/4 161/4 71/2 33/8 43/16 77/8 33/8 49/16

Specifications



147

with overload protection Lever HoistFEATURES AND BENEFITS FEATURES A

Overload ProtectionOverload Protection This is standard on all hoists and is factory set. The overload is integral with the hoist and prevents the operator from overloading the hoist. When activated, the overload will not allow hoist operation. When the overload is activated, lower the load, if lifting, or release the load, if pulling. Then select a larger capacity hoist, or consult a lifting specialist for another means of operation.

Minimal Load Lifting Effort

These hoists require 20% - 30% less effort than the competition. Lift heavy loads with ease. Ideal for frequent lifting/pulling applications.

Fully Enclosed Gearing This protects the gears from contamination and debris.

All Steel Construction These hoists are strong, durable and rugged, providing a long and dependable service life.

Malleable Hooks with Cast Steel Safety Latches

These hooks open when overloaded, thus providing the operator with a hook load reference point. Each heavy duty cast steel safety latch has a bolt and lock nut connection rather than roller pins used by most competitors. This feature facilitates changing latches in the fi eld.

Weather Proof Load Holding Brake

Both hoists have a protected Weston Brake which holds the load during the entire operation. The hoists are also equipped with a unique twin pawl design.

All Gears and Shafts Run on Roller Bearings

This feature provides smooth controlled operation as well as maintenance free lubrication.

Stainless Steel Riveted ID Tags

These tags will not rust and will maintain clear distinct information for easy identifi cation.

Safety Yellow Powder Coating

This process provides a long lasting fi nish in hostile environments.

Maintenance Hoists can be quickly disassembled for fast and easy maintenance.

Certifi cation Each hoist is load tested and comes with a serial number and test certifi cate dedicated to each hoist. This provides complete traceability throughout the manufacturing process.

148

Lever Hoist

Pull HandleSafety Chain Stop

Lower Block

with overload protectionwith overload protection

DIMENSIONS (0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, and 9 tons)

FEATURES AND BENEFITSFree Wheel Feature - When not under load, the operator can disengage the gearing by positioning the selection switch to the center position. This allows for a quick adjustment of chain for faster operation.

Machined Lift Wheel - This wheel perfectly accepts the chain allowing for a smooth long lasting operation.

Pull Handle / Safety Chain Stop - When not under load, this feature allows for quick disengagement of gearing, which allows for fast movement of the load hook. The safety chain stop is designed to

hold the load in the event that the entire load chain is transmitted through the hoist.

360 Degree Handle Rotation - This allows the operator to work in confi ned spaces.

Corrosion Protection - Hoist components are powder coated to prevent corrosion. Product I.D. labels are made from stainless steel.

Fully Enclosed Lift Wheel - This maintains smooth operation while distributing the load over more links of chain. It also helps keep debris from contaminating the lift wheel and self cleans the chain as it enters the wheel.

Steel Handle with Rubber Grip - This handle provides a non slip, sure grip, surface.

Cast Steel Hand Wheel - Rotates to allow positive load chain positioning.

Lower Block - Included with multistrand hoists.

Product Code OZ075LHOP OZ150LHOP OZ300LHOP OZ600LHOP OZ900LHOP

Safe Working Lift (tons) 0.75 (t) 1.5 (t) 3 (t) 6 (t) 9 (t)

Headroom (inches) 12.79 (in) 14.96 (in) 18.90 (in) 24.41 (in) 27.56 (in)

Effort on lever to lift full load (pounds) 30.86 (lbs) 48.50 (lbs) 70.55 (lbs) 74.96 (lbs) 79.37 (lbs)

Number of Load Chain Falls 1 1 1 2 3

Diameter of Load Chain (millimeters) 6 (mm) 8 (mm) 10 (mm) 10 (mm) 10 (mm)

Length of Lever Handle (inches) 11.02 (in) 16.14 (in) 16.14 (in) 16.14 (in) 16.14 (in)

Dimensional Information (inches)

ABCDE

12.79 (in)5.35 (in)5.82 (in)11.02 (in)3.54 (in)

14.96 (in)6.29 (in)6.77 (in)16.14 (in)3.85 (in)

18.89 (in)7.08 (in)7.87 (in)16.14 (in)4.52 (in)

24.40 (in)9.25 (in)7.87 (in)16.14 (in)4.52 (in)

27.55 (in)12.44 (in)7.87 (in)

16.14 (in)4.52 (in)

Hook-opening, upper & lower (inches) 1.18 (in) 1.41 (in) 1.57 (in) 1.96 (in) 2.28 (in)

Net Weight of Head Only (pounds) 12 (lbs) 20 (lbs) 36 (lbs) 51 (lbs) 67 (lbs)

SPECIFICATIONS (0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, and 9 tons)

149

150

ShopStar electric chain hoist

• H4 duty cycle (300 motor starts/hour)

• Easy installation and maintenance

• Standard protector overload device

• 10 pocket oblique lay liftwheel provides longer chain wear

• Epoxy powder coat finish

• 61/2 ft. power cord with molded 3 prongplug on 115 volt units

• NEMA 4 industrial rated control station

• Optional impact-resistant chain containeravailable

• Gear train lifetime lubricated with non-oxidizing grease

• CM Hoist Alloy Load Chain (zinc platedoptional)

• Thermally protected hoist duty motor

• Dual braking system — D.C. plus regenerative

• Rugged cast aluminum alloy hoist frame

• 5:1 design factor

• Small, compact design for commercial &industrial applications

• Rigid hook suspension prevents tangling of power cord

• Hardened forged steel latch style lowerhook rotates 360°

• Totally enclosed non-ventilated hoistframe protects motor from environmentalcontamination

• True vertical lift

• Precision bearings used throughout hoist


• Made in U.S.A.

The ShopStar electric chain hoist features rugged construction and high H4 duty cycle. It keeps lifting and lifting, up to 1,000 pounds and 300 motor starts per hour. Additional features and benefits include:



151

SpecificationsMax. Lifting Approx.capacity speed Lift shipping Motor

115-1-60 230-1-60 230-3-60 460-3-60 lbs. F.P.M. Reeving ft. wt., (lbs.) H.P.

2070 — — — 250 16 single 10 26 1/6

— 2069 2071 2072 250 16 single 10 28 1/6

— — 2076 2077 250 24 single 10 28 1/6

— — 2081 2082 250 40 single 10 28 1/6

2000 — — — 300 16 single 10 26 1/6

— 2047 2026 2029 300 16 single 10 28 1/6

— — 2086 2087 300 24 single 10 28 1/6

— — 2074 2075 300 40 single 10 28 1/6

2095 — — — 500 8 double 10 32 1/6

— 2094 2096 2097 500 8 double 10 34 1/6

2090 — — — 500 12 single 10 26 1/6

— 2089 2091 2092 500 12 single 10 28 1/6

— — 2080 2084 500 16 single 10 28 1/6

— — 2101 2102 500 20 double 10 34 1/6

— — 2099 2100 500 24 single 10 28 1/6

2001 — — — 600 8 double 10 32 1/6

— 2048 2035 2038 600 8 double 10 34 1/6

— — 2106 2107 600 12 double 10 34 1/6

— — 2105 2114 600 20 double 10 34 1/6

2110 — — — 1000 6 double 10 32 1/6

— 2109 2111 2112 1000 6 double 10 34 1/6

— — 2116 2117 1000 8 double 10 32 1/6

— — 2119 2121 1000 12 double 10 32 1/6

Clearance dimensions (in.)Reeving A B C D

Single 111/16 3 215/16 37/8

Double 1115/16 39/16 23/8 53/4

Approx.Product Single Double Shippingcode reeved reeved wt., lbs.

2063 10 5 1

2064 20 10 1.4

2065 40 20 1.4

2066 80 40 1.4

2067 120 60 2.2

Product Code

ShopStar

152

• Up to 3 ton capacities for heavy-duty industrial applications

• Gear train lifetime lubricated withnon-oxidizing grease

• Precision machined and hardenedliftwheel with hardened chainguides for precise chain liftwheel fit

• Gearing designed for exceptionallylong life and quiet operation

• H4 duty standard

• Rugged control station (NEMA 4)

• Hoist duty motor, standardProtector overload device and standard screw type limit switches

• Designed for greater productivity,efficiency and economy

• Hardened, forged steel, latch typehooks and Hoistaloy load chain forlong, dependable service

• Easy to install and maintain

• No special tools required to disassemble

• High reliability and long life


• Each hoist thoroughly inspectedand tested to over 125% of rated load prior to shipment

• Meets ASME B30.16

• Metric rated

• Made in U.S.A.

Specifications — two speed

Rated Standard LiftProduct code†

Approximatecapacity* lift speed Motor

less suspensionshipping

(tons) (ft.) (F.P.M.) H.P. Model Reeving 230-3-60 460-3-60 weight (lbs.)

1/8 10 10/32 1/4 A2 1 2707 2708 70

10 20/60 1/2 AA2 1 2717 2718 74

1/4 10 5/16 1/4 B2 1 2727 2728 70

10 10/32 1/2 C2 1 2737 2738 74

1/2 10 2.5/8 1/4 E2 2 2747 2748 79

10 5/16 1/2 F2 1 2757 2758 74

10 10/32 1 J2 1 3502 3503 116

10 21/64 2 JJ2 1 3549 3550 130

1 10 2.5/8 1/2 H2 2 2767 2768 83

10 5/16 1 L2 1 3504 3505 116

10 10/32 2 LL2 1 3553 3554 130

2 10 2.5/8 1 R2 2 3506 3507 136

10 5/16 2 RR2 2 3561 3562 150

3 10 1.75/5.5 1 RT2 3 9511 9513 161

10 3.5/11 2 RRT2 3 9512 9514 175

†Specify voltage 230 or 460

Lodestar electric chain hoist

Special applications• Harsh environment hoists available for severe duty of plating,

galvanizing and washdown applications

• Hoists with climbing capability available for temporary rigging or lifting applications — mustbe used in inverted position only

• Hoists with creep control allow precise positioning through field adjustment within the time delay range of .05 sec. to 3 sec.

• Articulating suspension 3 ton only

The balanced, integrated, proven design of the Lodestar has made it the most popular electric chain hoist in the industry. Lodestar gives you more value for your money including:

153

Specifications — single speed

Rated Standard LiftProduct code†

Approximatecapacity* lift speed Motor

less suspensionshipping

(tons) (ft.) (F.P.M.) H.P. Model Reeving 115-1-60 230/460-3-60 weight (lbs.)

10 32 1/4 A 1 2702 2705 60

10 60 1/2 AA 1 2712 2715 66

15 32 1/4 A 1 3101 3103 64

15 60 1/2 AA 1 3111 3113 70

20 32 1/4 A 1 3102 3104 68

20 60 1/2 AA 1 3112 3114 74

10 16 1/4 B 1 2722 2725 60

10 32 1/2 C 1 2732 2735 66

15 16 1/4 B 1 3121 3123 64

15 32 1/2 C 1 3131 3133 70

20 16 1/4 B 1 3122 3124 68

20 32 1/2 C 1 3132 3134 74

10 8 1/4 E 2 2742 2745 69

10 16 1/2 F 1 2752 2755 66

10 32 1 J 1 3512 3515 110

10 64 2 JJ 1 — 3545 117

15 8 1/4 E 2 3141 3143 76

15 16 1/2 F 1 3151 3153 70

15 32 1 J 1 4212 4214 116

15 64 2 JJ 1 — 4244 123

20 8 1/4 E 2 3142 3144 83

20 16 1/2 F 1 3152 3154 74

20 32 1 J 1 4213 4215 121

20 64 2 JJ 1 — 4245 128

10 8 1/2 H 2 2762 2765 75

10 16 1 L 1 3522 3525 110

10 32 2 LL 1 — 3555 117

15 8 1/2 H 2 3161 3163 82

15 16 1 L 1 4222 4224 116

15 32 2 LL 1 — 4254 123

20 8 1/2 H 2 3162 3164 89

20 16 1 L 1 4223 4225 121

20 32 2 LL 1 — 4255 128

10 8 1 R 2 3532 3535 130

10 16 2 RR 2 — 3565 137

15 8 1 R 2 4232 4234 140

15 16 2 RR 2 — 4264 147

20 8 1 R 2 4233 4235 150

20 16 2 RR 2 — 4265 157

10 5.5 1 RT 3 9501 9505 155

10 11 2 RRT 3 — 9508 162

15 5.5 1 RT 3 9502 9506 169

15 11 2 RRT 3 — 9509 176

20 5.5 1 RT 3 9503 9507 183

20 11 2 RRT 3 — 9510 190

†Single speed hoist factory wired 460V, convertible to 230V.

1/8

1/4

1/2

1

2

3

Lodestar electric chain hoist

154


A,B,C,F J, L, JJ RT andDimension and AA E and H and LL R RR RRT

A 161/4 195/8 189/16 241/8 241/8 299/16

B 61/8 61/8 75/8 75/8 75/8 75/8

C 11/16 7/8 7/8 11/8 11/8 11/8

D 11 11 91/2 91/2 91/2 91/2

F 73/4 73/4 1011/16 1011/16 1011/16 1011/16

H 1 13/16 13/16 11/2 11/2 11/2

I 413/16 37/8 71/4 63/16 63/16 63/16

J 315/16 47/8 57/16 61/2 61/2 61/2

L 111/16 111/16 7/16 7/16 7/16 7/16

M 1 11/8 11/8 15/16 15/16 15/16

P 65/8 69/16 713/16 713/16 713/16 713/16

R* 97/8 127/8 127/8 187/8 187/8 247/8

AP 91/4 99/16 1011/16 113/16 113/16 129/16

* Based on 10 ft. lift and increases proportionately with longer lifts

Suspension specificationsType Product code Models

Swivel hook 2792 A-AA-B-C-F

Swivel hook 2793 E-H

Swivel hook 3661 J-L-JJ-LL

Swivel hook 3660 R-RR

Swivel hook 9557 RT-RRT

Swivel latchlok hook 2796 A-AA-B-C-F

Swivel latchlok hook 3662 J-L-JJ-LL

Swivel latchlok hook 3663 R-RR

Rigid lug for low head trolley 2778 A-AA-B-C-F

Rigid lug for low head trolley 2779 E-H

Rigid lug for low head trolley 3677 J-L-JJ-LL

Rigid lug for low head trolley 3668 R-RR

Rigid lug for low head trolley 9561 RT-RRT

Rigid hook 2788 A-AA-B-C-F

Rigid hook 2789 E-H

Rigid hook 3651 J-L-JJ-LL

Rigid hook 3658 R-RR

Rigid hook 9559 RT-RRT

Rigid latchlok hook 2790 A-AA-B-C-F

Rigid latchlok hook 3652 J-L-JJ-LL

Note: 3 ton lug suspension prevents hoist from rotating but allows hoist to articulate below trolley

Lodestar models



Lodestar with hook suspension

155

Lodestar with Series635 low headroom trolley

Specifications For Series 635 Trolley Std. range of adjust.Am. standard S-beams

ApproximateRated Flange Tread Minimum shippingcapacity* Product Depth width diameter radius curve weight(tons) code Models (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (lbs.)1/8 to 1 3575 A – LL 4 – 15 25/8 – 55/8 31/8 24 22

2 3569 R – RR 6 – 18 33/8 – 6 43/4 24 52

3 9576 RT – RRT 8 – 15 4 – 55/8 43/4 30 58

Note: Rigid lug suspension required for attaching to hoist. Apply for other than standard beam adjustment.Beam end stop omitted for picture clarity

Lodestar with Series 635 motor driven trolley

Specifications — motor driven trolleyStandard Std. range of adj. Minimum Approx.

Rated For use travel Am. std. S-beams radius shipping capacity* Product with Power speed Motor Depth Flange curve weight(tons) code model supply (F.P.M.) H.P. (in.) width (in.) (in.) (lbs.)1/8 - 2 3670 A-RR 115-1-60 75 1/4 6 – 15 33/8 – 55/8 30 1181/8 - 2 3671 A-RR 230-3-60 75 1/4 6 – 15 33/8 – 55/8 30 1181/8 - 2 3672 A-RR 460-3-60 75 1/4 6 – 15 33/8 – 55/8 30 118

3 9577 RT-RRT 115-1-60 75 1/4 8 – 15 4 – 55/8 30 120

3 9578 RT-RRT 230-3-60 75 1/4 8 – 15 4 – 55/8 30 120

3 9579 RT-RRT 460-3-60 75 1/4 8 – 15 4 – 55/8 30 1201/8 - 2 9315 A-RR 115-1-60 30 1/4 6 – 15 33/8 – 55/8 30 1131/8 - 2 9316 A-RR 230-3-60 30 1/4 6 – 15 33/8 – 55/8 30 1131/8 - 2 9317 A-RR 460-3-60 30 1/4 6 – 15 33/8 – 55/8 30 113

3 9318 RT-RRT 115-1-60 30 1/4 8 – 15 4 – 55/8 30 120

3 9319 RT-RRT 230-3-60 30 1/4 8 – 15 4 – 55/8 30 120

3 9320 RT-RRT 460-3-60 30 1/4 8 – 15 4 – 55/8 30 120

Fabric chain bagCM’s chain bags offer an alternative to the

standard metal chain container for usewith Lodestar or Valustarelectric chain hoists. Chainbags are made from an openweave vinyl coated polyester

designed especially forextended outdoor life. Notrecommended for applications over300°F, in extremely caustic

environments or for chain weightexceeding 300 lbs.

Metal chaincontainer

156

Lodestar XLelectric chain hoist

Columbus McKinnon introduces anexpanded line of Lodestar XL electricchain hoists for lifting applications from 2 to 71/2 tons. The new offering providesheavy-duty hoists featuring faster speeds,less reeving, and higher capacities thantraditional chain hoists. Workers in auto-motive plants, heavy equipment manufac-turing, paper mills, and related ruggedwork environments will experience thesame dependability and versatility thatthey have relied on for many years.

The NEW features of the Lodestar XLElectric Chain Hoist include:• Lifting capacities up to 71/2 tons

• Increased lifting speeds throughout the line

• Double reeved units with 3-5 ton lifting capacities

• Maximum lifting speed of 30 feet per minute

A glimpse of the many features of the Lodestar XLthat have honed its reputation for durability and long life:• Heavy-duty, multiple disc braking

system

• Forged ten-pocket oblique-lay liftwheel for smooth chain operation,constant chain speed, and reducedchain wear

• Gearing operated in oil bath for increased lifting life and quiet operation

• Rated H-4, heavy-duty

• Standard overload protector

• Screw-type limit switches

• Thermally protected motor

• Factory tested at 125% of rated capacity

• Made in U.S.A.

Capacity Speed Plain Geared Motor Driven Plain Geared Motor Driven(tons) Reeving (fpm) Hook Trolley Trolley Trolley Hook Trolley Trolley Trolley

2 1 18 5201H 5201P 5201G 5201M 5231H 5231P 5231G 5231M

2 1 24 5204H 5204P 5204G 5204M 5232H 5232P 5232G 5232M

2 1 30 5265H 5265P 5265G 5265M 5266H 5266P 5266G 5266M

3 2 9 5209H 5209P 5209G 5209M 5233H 5233P 5233G 5233M

3 2 12 5212H 5212P 5212G 5212M 5234H 5234P 5234G 5234M

3 2 15 5267H 5267P 5267G 5267M 5268H 5268P 5268G 5268M

4 2 9 5215H 5215P 5215G 5215M 5235H 5235P 5235G 5235M

4 2 12 5218H 5218P 5218G 5218M 5236H 5236P 5236G 5236M

4 2 15 5269H 5269P 5269G 5269M 5278H 5278P 5278G 5278M

5 3 6 5221H 5221P 5221G 5221M 5237H 5237P 5237G 5237M

5 3 8 5224H 5224P 5224G 5224M 5238H 5238P 5238G 5238M

5 2 9 5279H 5279P 5279G 5279M 5280H 5280P 5280G 5280M

5 2 12 5283H 5283P 5283G 5283M 5284H 5284P 5284G 5284M

5 2 15 5285H 5285P 5285G 5285M 5286H 5286P 5286G 5286M

6 3 6 5227H 5227P 5227G 5227M 5239H 5239P 5239G 5239M

6 3 8 5230H 5230P 5230G 5230M 5240H 5240P 5240G 5240M

6 3 10 5287H 5287P 5287G 5287M 5288H 5288P 5288G 5288M

71/2 3 6 — 5289P 5289G 5289M — 5290P 5290G 5290M

71/2 3 10 — 5291P 5291G 5291M — 5292P 5292G 5292M

3.5 H.P. XL Models (unshaded) – Available in single speed, 3:1; two speed, variable speed

5.5 H.P. XL Models (shaded) – Available in single speed, variable speed

230/460-3-60 575-3-60

157

Lodestar XL with hook suspension


Single Reeved Double Reeved Triple ReevedDimensions 2 ton capacity 3-5 ton capacity 5-6 ton capacity

A 25 355/16 363/16

C 87/16 113/8 113/8

D 81/8 51/2 51/2

T (based on 10 ft. lift) 143/16 143/16 143/16

U (based on 10 ft. lift) 6'- 3" 6'- 3" 6'- 3"

V 11/2 21/4 21/4

W 11/8 15/8 15/8

X 15/16 21/16 21/16

Z 41/8 51/2 51/2

51/451/4

123/8

147/16 185/16

TO REMOVE COVERTO REMOVE COVER

CHAIN CONTAINER(OPTIONAL)

T

W

W

D

V

X

X

V

AU

Z

43/4 C

POWERCORD



Lodestar XL with plain trolley and geared Trolley

Geared Trolley

Lodestar XL with motor driven trolley (2 ton)

Lodestar XL with motor driven trolley (3-71/2 ton)

158

Designed specifically for general commercial applications. This compact, lightweight hoist features:

• Fully machined and heat treated liftwheel with hardened chain guides for smooth chain operation and reduced chain wear

• Standard lift 10, 15 & 20 ft.

• 5 ft. power cord length

• Heavy-duty caliper type AC brake

• Rugged NEMA 4 control station, 115 volt control circuit

• Easy to install and maintain

• Hoistaloy load chain for smooth operation and maximumchain life

• Efficient regenerative braking system to avoid heat generation in power train

• Enclosed hoist duty motor

• Gear train lifetime lubricated with non-oxidizing grease

• Latch type hooks

• Hook suspension standard

• Fully machined and heat treated gear train

• Standard overload Protector device

• H3 duty-1 phase; H-4 duty-3 phase

• One-year warranty

• Metric rated

• Made in U.S.A.

SpecificationsHoist

Max. lifting230/460 capacity speed 230/460

115-1-60 3-60 Model tons FPM 115-1-60 3-60

2401 2402 WB 1/4 16 54 58

Single2403 2404 WF 1/2 16 60 58

speed 2405 2406 WH 1 8 70 6810' lift

2407 2408 WL 1 16 105 106

2409 2410 WR 2 8 130 122

2401B 2402B WB 1/4 16 64 62

Single2403B 2404B WF 1/2 16 64 62

speed 2405B 2406B WH 1 8 77 7515' lift

2407B 2408B WL 1 16 111 112

2409B 2410B WR 2 8 136 128

2401C 2402C WB 1/4 16 68 66

Single2403C 2404C WF 1/2 16 68 66

speed 2405C 2406C WH 1 8 84 8220' lift

2407C 2408C WL 1 16 116 117

2409C 2410C WR 2 8 150 142

Longer lifts and modifications available. Apply for details.

Approximateshipping wt. (Ibs.)Product code

Valustar electric chain hoist

159

Valustar


1/4 1/2 1/2 1 1/2 1 2

Dimension Model WB Model WF Model WE Model WH Model WJ Model WL Model WR

A 141/4 141/4 177/8 177/8 159/16 159/16 221/2

B 61/8 61/8 61/8 61/8 75/8 75/8 75/8

C 11/16 11/16 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 11/8

D 8 8 8 8 9 9 9

E 161/16 161/16 161/16 161/16 203/16 203/16 203/16

F 81/16 81/16 81/16 81/16 113/16 113/16 113/16

G** 6'-3" 6'-3" 6'-3" 6'-3" 6'-3" 6'-3" 6'-3"

H 1 1 13/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 11/2

I 413/16 413/16 37/8 37/8 71/4 71/4 63/16

J 315/16 315/16 47/8 47/8 57/16 57/16 61/2

K 83/4 83/4 83/4 83/4 1211/16 1211/16 1211/16

L 111/16 111/16 111/16 111/16 7/16 7/16 7/16

M 1 1 11/8 11/8 11/8 11/8 15/16

N** 1215/16 1215/16 1515/16 1515/16 1611/16 1611/16 2211/16

O 39/16 39/16 39/16 39/16 4 4 4

P 63/16 63/16 61/2 61/2 67/8 67/8 73/8

R 1 1 13/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 11/2

S 11/16 11/16 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 11/8

T 1 1 11/8 11/8 11/8 11/8 15/16

**Based on 10 foot lift units

Rated capacity* (tons)



160

Powerstar electric chain hoist

• H-4 or better rated duty cycle

• Designed for heavy-duty industrial applications from 2 to 20 ton capacities

• Liftwheel has machined chain pockets and is heat treated alloy steel for maximum strength and wear resistance

• Efficient regenerative braking system avoids heat generation in power train

• Motors up to 7 1/2 h.p. provide a wide range of lifting speeds

• Single or two speed controls. Two speed models operate on3:1 speed ratio

• Standard adjustable upper and lower screw limit switches

• Standard overload Protector device

• Hoistaloy load chain can be easily inspected for wear and abuse

• True vertical lift

• Factory tested to 125% of rated capacity prior to shipment

• Metric rated except for 10 & 20 ton capacities

• Rugged aluminum alloy hoist frame

• Chain guide surrounds liftwheel

• Machined and hardened steel Helical gears used throughout hoist for optimum performance and mechanical efficiency.

• Extensive use of life-lubricated bearings plus sealed oil bath power train reservoir for minimum maintenance.

• Dual braking system

• Heavy duty, industrial single speed controls include magnetic reversing contactor which operates on 115 voltsprovided by a control transformer.

• Totally enclosed, ball bearing, 30 minuterated, thermally protected, hoist duty motor is standard.

• Push button control is weatherproof (NEMA 4 rated).

• Drop of push button control is 4 ft. abovehook at lowest position, unless otherwisespecified.

• External push button chain strain relief is standard.

• Power cord length is 2 1/2 ft. unless otherwise specified.

• Trolley design permits easy adjustment for installation on a broad range of beamflange widths.

• Trolley wheels have double row, tapered roller bearings plus machined and hardeneduniversal treads to permit operation onAmerican Standard or flat flanged sectionsinterchangeably.

• Spur gearing used in all motorized trolleys for improved efficiency and durability.

• Drop of hand chain on geared trolleys is 2 ft.above hook at lowest position, unlessotherwise specified.

• Designed to be maintained “on the beam.”

• Up to 600 lineal feet of chain

• Weatherproof (NEMA3R)


• Made in U.S.A.

Designed specifically as an alternative towire rope hoists for high speed lifting ofloads from 2 to 20 tons in a space savingchain hoist.



161

Specifications – standard unit

Hoist onlyapprox. shipping

weightHeadroom Headroom Single Two

Rated Lifting Lifting Std. w/lug w/trolley speed speedcapacity* speed Product code speed Product code Reeving lift** suspension suspension hoist hoist(tons) (F.P.M.) 230-3-60 460-3-60 (F.P.M.) 230-3-60 460-3-60 (single) (ft.) HP (in.) (in.) (lbs.) (lbs.)

2 20 7300 7301 20/7 7302 7303 1 20 5 2815/16 3015/16 392 402

24 7001 7002 24/8 7003 7004 1 20 5 2815/16 3015/16 392 402

32 7304 7305 32/11 7306 7037 1 20 5 2815/16 3015/16 404 414

40 7005 7006 40/13 7007 7008 1 20 5 2815/16 3015/16 404 414

48 7308 7309 48/16 7310 7311 1 20 7.5 2815/16 3015/16 408 418

3 20 7312 7313 20/7 7314 7315 1 20 5 2815/16 311/2 404 414

24 7009 7010 24/8 7011 7012 1 20 5 2815/16 311/2 404 414

32 7316 7317 32/11 7318 7319 1 20 7.5 2815/16 311/2 408 418

40 7013 7014 40/13 7015 7016 1 20 7.5 2815/16 311/2 408 418

4 10 7320 7321 10/3 7322 7323 2 20 5 34 369/16 478 488

12 7324 7325 12/4 7326 7327 2 20 5 34 369/16 490 500

16 7328 7329 16/5 7330 7331 2 20 5 34 369/16 490 500

20 7332 7333 20/7 7334 7335 2 20 7.5 34 369/16 490 500

24 7336 7337 24/8 7338 7339 2 20 7.5 34 369/16 494 504

5 10 7340 7341 10/3 7342 7343 2 20 5 34 369/16 478 488

12 7344 7345 12/4 7346 7347 2 20 5 34 369/16 478 488

16 7029 7030 16/5 7031 7032 2 20 5 34 369/16 490 500

20 7348 7349 20/7 7350 7351 2 20 7.5 34 369/16 494 500

24 7017 7018 24/8 7019 7020 2 20 7.5 34 369/16 494 504

6 10 7352 7353 10/3 7354 7355 2 20 5 34 369/16 548 558

12 7052 7053 12/4 7054 7055 2 20 5 34 369/16 548 558

16 7356 7357 16/5 7358 7359 2 20 7.5 34 369/16 552 562

20 7056 7057 20/7 7058 7059 2 20 7.5 34 369/16 552 562

71/2 7 7360 7361 7/2 7362 7363 3 20 5 Apply 393/8 594 604

8 7364 7365 8/3 7366 7367 3 20 5 Apply 393/8 606 616

11 7368 7369 11/4 7370 7371 3 20 5 Apply 393/8 606 616

14 7372 7373 14/5 7374 7375 3 20 7.5 Apply 393/8 622 632

16 7376 7377 16/5 7378 7379 3 20 7.5 Apply 393/8 622 632

9 7 7380 7381 7/2 7382 7383 3 20 5 Apply 413/16 610 620

8 7384 7385 8/3 7386 7387 3 20 5 Apply 413/16 610 620

11 7388 7389 11/4 7390 7391 3 20 7.5 Apply 413/16 626 636

13 7392 7393 13/4 7394 7395 3 20 7.5 Apply 413/16 626 636

10 7 7396 7397 7/2 7398 7399 3 20 5 Apply 413/16 610 620

8 7400 7401 8/3 7402 7403 3 20 5 Apply 413/16 610 620

11 7404 7405 11/4 7406 7407 3 20 7.5 Apply 413/16 626 636

13 7408 7409 13/4 7410 7411 3 20 7.5 Apply 413/16 626 636

12 5 7412 7413 5/2 7414 7415 4 20 5 Apply 413/16 710 720

6 7416 7417 6/2 7418 7419 4 20 5 Apply 413/16 710 720

8 7420 7421 8/3 7422 7423 4 20 7.5 Apply 413/16 726 736

10 7424 7425 10/3 7426 7427 4 20 7.5 Apply 413/16 726 736

15 4 7428 7429 4/1.3 7430 7431 5 20 5 Apply 475/16 805 815

5 7432 7433 5/1.5 7434 7435 5 20 5 Apply 475/16 805 815

6 7436 7437 6/2 7438 7439 5 20 7.5 Apply 475/16 817 827

8 7440 7441 8/2.5 7442 7443 5 20 7.5 Apply 475/16 817 827

** 20 ft. lift is standard — for other lifts, apply.

Single speed Two speed

Powerstar

162

ShopAirTM chain hoist

Compact, powerful, and precise for assembly and manufacturing applications up to 1,000 pounds.

The CM ShopAir combines superior lifting speeds, rugged design, and precise load spotting in a portable air chain hoist. As a workstationhoist or a production line hoist, the ShopAir is the ideal choice.

CAPACITIES: 250 to 1,000 Lbs.

NORMAL OPERATINGPRESSURE: 90 PSI (6.2 bar)

AIRCONSUMPTION: 34 cu.feet/min.

• Standard ProtectorTM overloaddevice.

• 10-pocket, oblique lay liftwheelprovides longer chain life.

• Epoxy powder coat finish provides a durable exterior.

• Durable reduction gearing means reliable operation

• Variable flow, two lever pendantfor precise load spotting.

• Threaded external exhaust for piping away exhaust in clean room or painting applications.

• Small, compact design for commercial & industrialapplications.

• Industrial duty air motor for tough applications.

• Gear train is lifetime - lubricatedwith non-oxidizing grease.

• Hardened forged steel, latch -type lower hook rotates 360°.

• Hardened forged steel, rigidlatch - type upper hook.

• Rugged cast aluminum alloy hoist frame.

• Alloy load chain.

• Maximum pendant drop - 36 ft.

• Lifetime warranty against defects in materials and workmanship.

• Made in U.S.A.

300 Lb. model shown with optional

chain container

163

Specifications(in.)

Speed FPMProduct Cap. Number of (under full load) Shippingcode (lbs.) A B *C load chains lifting lowering weight (lbs.)

2178 250 107/8 37/8 6’ 4” 1 31 83 302180 300 107/8 37/8 6’ 4” 1 31 83 302182 500 107/8 37/8 6’ 4” 1 21 75 302179 500 1115/16 53/4 6’ 4” 2 16 42 342181 600 1115/16 53/4 6’ 4” 2 16 42 342183 1,000 1115/16 53/4 6’ 4” 2 11 38 34

ShopAirTM air chain hoist



164

• Hoistaloy load chain for heavy duty or stainless steelchain for spark resistant, medium duty loads

• Positive action, heavy-duty shoe type brake that holds the load

• Multi-vane rotary air motor for high torque, smoothoperation

• Accurately machined heat treated alloy steel spur gears

• Spark resistant models available for hazardousenvironments

• Pull cord or pendant throttle control available

• Pull cord control hoists provide a lightweight,economical hoist for accurate control of loads

• Optional pendant throttle control hoists offer ergonomic, one-hand control for easeof operation

• Hook or lug suspension available

• Inlet air swivel with built-in strainer provides free hoist movement

• Aluminum frame and end cover contributes to thelightweight, easily portable, and rugged design

• External brake adjustment

• Limit stops prevent over-travel in upper and loweringdirections

• Equa-torque gearing of alloy steel, heat treated spur gears are accurately machined to provide a close meshed, compact gear reduction

• Tapped exhaust port 1/2 NPTF... for cleanroom applications or to add a supplemental muffler in addition to the built-in muffler for even quieter operation


• Metric rated

• Made in U.S.A.

Basic Hoist Data

Rated Loads: 1/4, 1/2 and 1 Ton (Spark resistant models are rated at 3/8 and 3/4 ton)

Air Pressure Recommended: 90 PSIAir Consumption: 48 SCFM at 90 PSINet Wt. (Basic Hoist): 36 lbs. Suspension: Hook or lug Control: Pull Cord or Pendant ThrottleAir Inlet: 3/8 NPTFAir Supply Hose: 1/2 I.D. min.

Air Exhaust: 1/2 NPTFLift: 10 foot lifts are standard. Longer lifts are an optional extra.Pendant Control: 6 foot length is standard. Longerlengths are an optional extra.Optional: For greater corrosion resistance, a platedload chain is offered as an optional extra.

AirStar chain hoistDesigned for general commercial applications where variable speed pneumatic power is preferable. Rated for 1/4, 1/2 and 1 ton capacities, this compact, lightweight hoist features:

165


Ratedcapacity* Product(tons) code A B C D E F G H J1/4 7400A 151/4 101/4 43/4 13/4 71/16 51/16

15/16 23/16 511/16

1/4 7400B 151/4 101/4 43/4 13/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 511/16

1/4 7400C 151/4 101/4 43/4 13/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 511/16

1/4 7400D 151/4 101/4 43/4 13/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 511/16

1/2 7401A 151/4 101/4 43/4 13/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 511/16

1/2 7401B 151/4 101/4 43/4 13/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 511/16

1/2 7401C 151/4 101/4 43/4 13/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 511/16

1/2 7401D 151/4 101/4 43/4 13/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 511/16

3/8 7403A 151/4 101/4 43/4 13/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 511/16

3/8 7403B 151/4 101/4 43/4 13/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 511/16

1 7402A 18 101/4 53/4 3/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 6 11/16

1 7402B 18 101/4 53/4 3/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 6 11/16

1 7402C 18 101/4 53/4 3/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 6 11/16

1 7402D 18 101/4 53/4 3/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 6 11/16

3/4 7404A 18 101/4 53/4 3/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 6 11/16

3/4 7404B 18 101/4 53/4 3/4 71/16 51/1615/16 23/16 6 11/16

SpecificationsPendant Lifting Lowering

Rated Pull cord control throttle control** speed speedcapacity* Product Net wt. Product Net wt. max.† max.†

Type (tons) code no. (lbs.) code no. (lbs.) Reeving (F.P.M.) (F.P.M.)

Standard models

Roller chain 1/4 7400A 37 7400B 47 1 65 951/2 7401A 37 7401B 47 1 45 120

1 7402A 51 7402B 61 2 23 60

Link chain 1/4 7400C 36 7400D 46 1 65 951/2 7401C 36 7401D 46 1 45 120

1 7402C 49 7402D 59 2 23 60

Spark resistant models

Link chain 3/8 7403A 36 7403B 46 1 60 1003/4 7404A 49 7404B 59 2 29 52

**Equipped with 6 ft. pendant control.

†Speeds based on 90 PSI line pressure and with full rated hoist load.

Hoist speeds are adjustable and can be reduced to 50% of full rated speed. Shipped from factory with hoisting speedset at maximum rated speed; lowering speed set at reduced speed.

Standard lift 10 feet. Longer lifts available.

1/4 and 1/2 ton standard 3/8 ton spark resistant

AirStar with hook suspension

1 ton standard 3/4 ton spark resistant

* Also available with lug suspension for direct trolley attachment.

166

• Hoistaloy load chain for heavy duty or stainless steel chain for spark resistant, medium duty loads

• Lightweight aluminum frame and cover

• Positive action, spring biased Weston-typeload brake holds the load, provides exactingload spotting and control

• Multi-vane rotary air motor with eight vanes for high torque, smooth operation, positivestarting

• Precision cut heat treated helical and spurgear combination for quiet, efficient operation

• Pendant throttle handle is full flow design forprecision throttle capabilities

• Spark resistant models available forhazardous environments

• Hook or lug suspension available

• Standard overload protector device

• Internal Muffler-reduces sound level

• Throttle Valve—precision throttle valves meter the air for smooth operation

• Chain container optional


• Metric rated

• Made in U.S.A.

Basic Hoist Data

Rated Loads: 1, 2, and 3-ton (Spark resistantmodels are rated at 1/2, 1 and 2 ton)

Air Pressure Recommended: 90 PSI

Air Consumption: 70 SCFM (full load-fullspeed) slow speed model 80 SCFM (fullload-full speed) fast speed model

Pendant Control Hose: 6 foot pendant hosestandard for 10 foot lift hoist, longer hoseassemblies up to 36 foot available.

Lift: 10 foot lifts are standard. Longer lifts arean optional extra.

Net Wt. (Basic Hoist): 100 pounds

Suspension: Hook or lug

Air Inlet Size: 3/4 NPTF

Air Supply Hose Size: 3/4 I.D. min.

AirStar 6 air hoist

Designed for general industrial applications where variable speed pneumatic power is preferable. Rated for loads of up to 3 tons. This compact, lightweight hoist features:

167

AirStar 6 with hook suspension* Also available with lug suspension for direct trolley attachments

Specifications

Rated Full load Full load Approximatecapacity* Product hoist speed** lowering speed** net

Model (tons) code Reeving (F.P.M.) (F.P.M.) weight (lbs.)

Standard model 1 7405A 1 13 18 93

1 7405B 1 30 42 95

2 7406A 2 6 9 110

2 7406B 2 15 21 112

3 7407A 3 4 6 144

3 7407B 3 10 14 146

Spark resistant model 1/2 7408A 1 16 22 95

1 7409A 2 8 11 112

2 7410A 3 5 7 146

**Hoist speeds based on 90 PSI line pressure with full load at full throttle.


Ratedcapacity* Product(tons) code A B C D E1/2 7408A 16 3/4 111/16 6 3/4 211/16 6 3/16

1 7405A 16 3/4 111/16 6 3/4 211/16 6 3/16

1 7405B 16 3/4 111/16 6 3/4 211/16 6 3/16

1 7409A 227/8 1213/16 81/16 4 7/16 4 7/8

2 7406A 227/8 1213/16 81/16 4 7/16 4 7/8

2 7406B 227/8 1213/16 81/16 4 7/16 4 7/8

2 7410A 257/8 143/8 5 13/16 5 5/8 7 1/8

3 7407A 257/8 143/8 5 13/16 5 5/8 7 1/8

3 7407B 257/8 143/8 5 13/16 5 5/8 7 1/8

168


Dimension 1/4 & 1/2 1 11/2 & 2 3Min. radius curve (in.) 7 7 10 10

B 41/4 43/8 55/8 63/16

C 57/8 6 71/2 81/16

D 3/16 3/16 3/8 11/16

E 13/16 13/16 23/16 41/16

F 23/4 23/4 31/2 31/2

G 33/8 33/8 41/2 41/2

H 7 7 9 9

J 11/8 11/8 11/2 15/8

K 33/8 31/2 43/8 413/16

L 113/16 15/8 2 25/8

M 11/16 7/8 11/8 11/8

N 7/8 1 11/4 11/4

P 3 31/8 37/8 415/16

Dimensions given are for minimum S-beam and will vary with larger beams.

• Negotiates radius curves as tight as 7 to 10 inches• Made of highest quality rolled steel• Unique double row, ball bearing wheel design

for greater wear capacity• Larger V-bars available for wider flange adjustment• For low headroom applications• Bearings prepacked with lifetime lubricant• Exclusive Dial-Fit collar quickly adapts trolley to

wide range of beams and patented rails• Dust covers shield and protect bearings• Trolleys available for larger beams, rails or tracks;

contact CM• Cast iron trolley guards available (except for 3 ton)• Lifetime warranty• Made in U.S.A.

SpecificationsAdj. for standard S-beams

Rated Depth Flange Tread Net Shipping Minimumcapacity* Product of beam width diameter weight weight radius curve(tons) code (in.) (in.) (in.) (lbs.) (lbs.) (in.)1/4-1/2 3222 4-12 25/8-51/16 23/4 9 10 7

1 3224 4-12 25/8-51/16 23/4 10 12 7

11/2-2 3226 6-15 33/8-55/8 31/2 23 25 10

3 3230 8-18 4-61/4 31/2 29 33 10

All capacities can be supplied for S-beams larger than listed and also for wide flange beams, rails or tracks with approximately equivalentflange widths.


CM Series 632 close radius trolley



With revolutionary advances, this shorter, more compacttrolley is 50% lighter than competitive trolleys, yet every bit as tough.

169

Specifications

For wide flange beam adaptation, patented track or for beams larger than standard - contact factory. † Weight less hand chain. 8 Ft. standard zinc plated hand chain drop on geared trolley. Specify curve on order.

Manufactured for heavy duty, industrial grade applications.CM Series 84A trolleys feature fully sealed, precision bearings, heavy duty side frames and fully machined wheel tread for superior performance and long life — withminimal maintenance.

Series 84A plain or geared trolley

• Available in capacities from1/4 through25 ton with 30 through 50 ton trolleysavailable as tandem construction.

• Lifetime lubricated, precision ball bear-ings on trolleys through 3 ton capacity.Trolleys with capacities 4 tons andgreater are equipped with eight sealed,Timken tapered roller bearings andgrease fittings.

• Heavy rolled steel side frames extendbeyond the wheels to provide thesetrolleys with superior strength, rigidityand added protection for the track-wheels. Units with capacities from1/4through 12 tons employ universalwheel treads for use on flat or taperedbeam flanges. Units with capacitiesfrom 16 through 25 tons operate onAmerican Standard I-beams withtapered flanges. For patented track,consult factory.

• Trolley wheels are fully machined from alloy cast iron and hardened for high strength and long life.

• Alloy steel axles and equalizer pins areheat treated for maximum strength andwear life.

• Geared versions have fully machinedtrackwheel gears and incorporate aswinging chain guide which keeps the hand chain aligned and free fromjamming.

• Available to fit a broad range of widerflange beams and patented track appli-cations not listed - contact factory.

• Made in the USA

• Spark resistant models available —add suffix “SR”

MinimumRated Beam Flange radius Approximate

Product code capacity height width curve net weightPlain Geared (tons) (in.) (in.) (in.) Plain † Geared

1641-0025 1642-0025 1/4 4 - 12 2.66 - 5.00 20 23 381641-0050 1642-0050 1/2 4 - 12 2.66 - 5.00 20 23 381641-0100 1642-0100 1 5 - 12 3.00 - 6.00 24 43 621641-0150 1642-0150 11/2 5 - 12 3.00 - 6.00 24 45 651641-0200 1642-0200 2 6 - 18 3.33 - 6.25 30 67 901641-0300 1642-0300 3 6 - 18 3.33 - 6.25 30 70 93

1641-0400 1642-0400 4 8 - 24 4.00 - 7.00 36 155 1841641-0500 1642-0500 5 8 - 24 4.00 - 7.00 36 160 1881641-0600 1642-0600 6 8 - 24 4.00 - 7.00 36 160 1881641-0800 1642-0800 8 10 - 24 4.62 - 8.00 60 300 3471641-1000 1642-1000 10 10 - 24 4.62 - 8.00 60 310 3601641-1200 1642-1200 12 10 - 24 4.62 - 8.00 60 310 3601631-1600 1632-1600 16 18 - 24 6.00 - 8.00 96 800 8951631-2000 1632-2000 20 18 - 24 6.00 - 8.00 96 845 9551631-2500 1632-2500 25 18 - 24 6.00 - 8.00 120 1045 1200

170

SpecificationsApprox.

Rated capacity* Min. beam Min. radius Adj. flange net weight(tons) Product code depth (in.) curve width (in.) (lbs.)1/4 80 4 2'-6" 25/8-45/8 13

80SR 4 2'-6" 25/8-45/8 13

80WFA 4 2'-6" 5-7 141/2 81 4 2'-6" 25/8-45/8 13

81SR 4 2'-6" 25/8-45/8 13

81WFA 4 2'-6" 5-7 14

1 82 5 3'-0" 3-5 25

82SR 5 3'-0" 3-5 25

82WFA 5 3'-0" 5-7 26

82WFB 5 3'-0" 7-9 27

2 83 6 4'-0" 33/8-6 35

83SR 6 4'-0" 35/8-6 35

83WFA 6 4'-0" 6-8 36

83WFB 6 4'-0" 8-10 37

3 905480 6 4'-0" 33/8-6 41

905481 6 4'-0" 61/8-87/8 43

905482 6 4'-0" 9-11 44

Hook Suspension • Available in 1/4 ton to

3 ton capacities

• Can be used with any hook suspended hoist

• Runs on either AmericanStandard or wide flange shapes.

• Trolley side frames featureall steel construction for strength and durability

• Steel wheels with hardenedtreads and ball bearings provide easy and long life

• Hand geared trolleys areideal for accurate positioning and long lifts

Rigid Mount • For use with lug suspend-

ed hoists such as the CM AirStar or AirStar 6

• Available in 1/2 to 3 ton Trolleys attach directly to the lug brackets on the hoist

• Offers minimum headroom

• Push, hand geared, ormotorized models available

• On hand geared models,anti-tilt rollers eliminate thetilting of the trolley whenoperating with a light load

• Features a lifetime warrantyand are made in U.S.A.

Clearance dimensions (in.)Rated † **capacity* Product Min. Min.(tons) code A B C D WD F G H J K L1/4 80 43/8 213/16 41/8 1 31/8 3/4 113/16 79/16 315/16 11/16 7/8

80SR 43/8 213/16 41/8 1 31/8 3/4 113/16 79/16 315/16 11/16 7/8

80WFA 43/8 213/16 41/8 1 31/8 3/4 113/16 97/8 315/16 31/6 7/81/2 81 43/8 213/16 41/8 1 31/8 3/4 113/16 79/16 315/16 11/16 7/8

81SR 43/8 213/16 41/8 1 31/8 3/4 113/16 79/16 315/16 11/16 7/8

81WFA 43/8 213/16 41/8 1 31/8 3/4 113/16 97/8 315/16 31/16 7/8

1 82 61/8 39/16 51/8 11/8 4 11/16 21/4 81/4 47/8 13/16 1

82SR 61/8 39/16 51/8 11/8 4 11/16 21/4 81/4 47/8 13/16 1

82WFA 61/8 39/16 51/8 11/8 4 1 23/16 103/8 47/8 213/16 1

82WFB 61/8 39/16 51/8 11/8 4 1 23/16 123/8 47/8 413/16 1

2 83 67/8 313/16 53/4 15/16 415/16 13/16 21/4 83/4 — 3/4 11/8

83SR 67/8 313/16 53/4 15/16 415/16 13/16 21/4 83/4 — 3/4 11/8

83WFA 67/8 313/16 53/4 15/16 415/16 3/4 23/16 103/4 — 33/8 11/4

83WFB 67/8 313/16 53/4 15/16 415/16 3/4 23/16 123/4 — 53/8 11/4

3 905480 67/8 43/8 15/8 415/16 415/16 9/16 23/8 12 6 11/4 113/32

905481 67/8 43/8 15/8 415/16 415/16 9/16 23/8 143/4 6 41/4 113/32

905482 67/8 43/8 15/8 415/16 415/16 9/16 23/8 175/8 6 7 113/32

†Clearance dimensions “F” and “G” are based on the largest beam on which trolley will operate. Dimension increases slightly for each smaller beam size.

**Dimension “K” occurs on smallest beam size only. On larger beams it is increased by the difference in flange width.

Series 80 trolley for hook mounted hoists push type

1/4, 1/2, 1 and 2 ton 3 ton only

171

SpecificationsAdj. for standard S-beams

Rated Depth Flange Tread Net Shippingcapacity* Product of beam width diameter weight weight(tons) code (in.) (in.) (in.) (lbs.) (lbs.)1/2 3302 3-15 21/2-55/8 29/32 15 17

1 3304 5-24 3-8 315/32 34 36

2 3306 6-24 35/8-8 315/16 50 53

3 3307 8-24 4-8 51/8 95 100

5 3309 10-24 45/8-8 61/8 172 175

• Rugged steel side plates formed to include bumpers and trolley guards

• Frames connected by steel equalizer pin, secured by two nuts on each side

• Universal tread flanged trackwheels equipped with shielded ball bearings

• Easy rolling on American standard shapes, wide flange shapes or patented rail

• Hardened wheels and axles for added strength and durability• Spacer washers can be shifted inside or outside for easy

adjustment to wide range of beams• To be used with hook suspended hoist• Suspension plate for easy attachment is standard• Bearings prepacked with lifetime lubricant• One-year warranty• Imported


Dimension 1/2 1 2 3 5

Min. radius curve (in.) 35 35 59 71 94

A 81/2 1013/16 127/32 1413/16 181/8

B** 25/32 213/32 211/16 31/16 321/32

C 51/16 69/16 625/32 713/32 8

D** 1/16 7/16 13/32 1/2 9/16

E** -1/4 11/32 25/32 17/16 23/16

F 29/32 315/32 315/16 51/8 61/8

G 4 47/8 51/2 69/16 77/8

H** 3 411/32 429/32 61/8 79/32

J** 11/32 11/32 25/32 13/16 21/8

K 13/4 23/32 21/2 313/32 313/32

L 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 13/16

M** 15/16 31/32 5/16 15/16 17/16

N** 43/32 51/16 513/16 77/16 915/16

P 17/32 13/4 25/32 29/16 323/32

Q 19/32 19/32 13/16 13/8 125/32

R 31/32 15/32 15/8 131/32 29/16

**Dimensions given are for minimum S-beam and will vary with larger beams.


CM Series 633 wide range trolley

Simple, rugged, built for trouble-free service and ease ofoperation across a wide range of beam applications. Series 633 features:

* Also available in hand geared

172


Dimension 1/8 - 2 3A 123/4 141/8

B 63/8 63/4

C** 413/16 51/4

D 39/16 315/16

E 29/16 215/16

F** 43/4 53/16

G** 6 65/16

H** 17 ft. 17 ft.

J 71/2 915/16

K 41/8 411/16

SINGLE PHASE L 123/4 153/16

THREE PHASE L 117/16 137/8

M** 11/2 215/16

N** 3/8 3/4

P** 17/16 19/16

Q** 51/8 57/8

R 1/2 3/4

S 11/16 11/16

T** 87/8 99/16

**Dimensions given are for minimum S-beam and will vary with larger beams.

• Fits wide range of beam sizesfor maximum versatility

• Universal use with any hooksuspended single speedhoists that are equipped withreversing contactor

• Steel plate side frames• Steel spur gearing for opti-

mum strength and smoothoperation

• Durable hardened cast irontrackwheels that operate onstandard S-beams or flatflanged beams

• Lifetime lubricated double rowball bearings for high

efficiency, low maintenance• Cast iron control enclosure• Four-button control

station included for operatingsingle speed hoist. Drop pro-portioned to 20' lift

• 115 volt control circuit• Trolley guards standard• One-year warranty• Metric rated• IImported


RailStar motor driven trolley



173

Tractor drive

Power tractor drives push-type hoists, trolleys and underhung cranes.Easy installation without removing or modifying existing equipment. Thisdrive also features:

• Compact design• Capacities up to 5 tons available in 230/460-3-60 operation• Monorail trolley track or twin unit synchronized drives available• Direct drive with right angle worm gear reducer• Enclosed aluminum housing for lubrication of gears and bearings• Steel plate construction with tie-rods for easy adjustment• Squirrel cage motor with permanently lubricated bearings• Fully machined trolley wheels with universal tread

operate on tapered or flat flange beams• Adjusts to standard I-beams or flat flange beams up to 8 inches wide• Standard magnetic reversing contactor with mechanical interlock

inside NEMA 1 enclosure• One-year warranty• Made in U.S.A.

Options

• 575 volt 3 phase 60 hertz operation• 2, 4, 6 & 8 button push-button station• Additional push-button cable length

(10' standard)• NEMA 12, 4 or 4X control enclosures• Motor brake• Soft start (recommended for speeds

above 70 F.P.M.)• Two speed or variable controls• Transformer for 115 volt control power• Tow bar• For other beams, options or custom

designs, consult factory

Rated Approx.capacity* Product Speed Std. beam Min. radius Max. flange shipping(tons) code (F.P.M.) size (in.) curve (in.) thickness (in.) wt. (lbs.)

1 TD 235 35 3.38-8 36 .62 110

1 TD 255 55 3.38-8 36 .62 110

1 TD 270 70 3.38-8 36 .62 110

1 TD 2105 105 3.38-8 36 .62 110

11/2 TD 335 35 3.38-8 36 .62 110

11/2 TD 355 55 3.38-8 36 .62 110

11/2 TD 370 70 3.38-8 36 .62 110

11/2 TD 3105 105 3.38-8 36 .62 110

21/2 TD 535 35 3.38-8 36 .62 110

21/2 TD 555 55 3.38-8 36 .62 110

21/2 TD 570 70 3.38-8 36 .62 110

3 TD 635 35 3.38-8 36 .62 110

3 TD 655 55 3.38-8 36 .62 110

5 TD 1035 35 3.38-8 36 .62 110

174

More Info:See page 177



175

More Info:See page 182-183




176




177

LBLever Hoists

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

NER/ER Electric Chain HoistsAvailable with:

• Hook and Lug Suspensions (NER)• Motorized Trolley (NERM)• Push (NERP) and Geared Trolley (NERG)

The NER/ER Series of electric chain hoists were designed using thelatest technology. The results are high quality, low-headroom, full-featured hoists that provide daily reliable performance in both routineworkplace situations and severe working environments.

Capacity Range1/8 Ton - 20 Ton

Reconnectible Voltage208-230/460-3-60 for

both single and dual speed hoists(optional voltages available)

Control Voltage110V (optional 24V and 48V)

Duty CycleSingle Speed—60 Min.

Dual Speed—30/10 Min.

ClassificationASME H4

ISO M5 or M4FEM 2M or 1Am

RatingsHoist—IP55

Pendant—IP65

Limit SwitchPrevents overwinding/overlifting

Standard upper

Chain FallsSingle chain fall through 3 Ton

(except NER030C)

Standard Lift10’ (longer lifts available)

Standard Pendant Drop4’ less than lift

(longer drops available)

Standard Power Supply Cord15’ (longer lengths available)

Standard Pendants2-button (Up/Down)Momentary contacts

Chain ContainersOptional

Canvas, plastic, or steel

NER vs. ER FeaturesER Model has same high-quality features as NER plus the following:

• Second brake—Weston-style mechanical load brake• Count hour meter• Large capacity—8 Ton-20 Ton

Standard Hoist Specifications

185

Proven in practice, the JDN PROFI Series air hoists excel in places where safety is paramount.Unlike electricity, compressed air does not generate sparks, making the JDN PROFI Series the hoistchoice in hazardous areas. The highest quality materials, coupled with six generations of experi-ence result in a product that is second-to-none. The PROFI is available with rope or push-button.

Features:• Rugged construction, minimum headroom • Small and handy relative to its capacity• Simple design means low maintenance cost • Impervious to dust, vapors, humidity and• Unlimited switching and operation frequency temperatures• Explosion proof • Variable speed control• Positive start system ensures a smooth start and

consistent operation

Options:Spark-resistant package Chain container Offshore paint Delta-P overload protection

mini Air HoistsSmall in size, High in Performance. From 275 Lbs. to 2200 Lbs. Capacity, Air Pressure 85PSI (6 Bar)

PROFI Air Hoists (Rental Available)Rugged, Reliable, Versatile. From 550 Lb. to 100 Ton Capacity, Air Pressure: 65PSI (4 Bar)or 85 PSI (6 Bar)

Monorail Hoists EH are special high capacity lifting systems designed to handle heavyloads over monorail systems. Because of the trolley wheel design, they can be used onstandard I-beams either with tapered or parallel flanges, or on special fabricated beams.JDN Monorail Hoists are especially suited for applications in high humidity, dust or haz-ardous environments with a high risk of explosion.

Features:• Explosion-proof • Low headroom• Small size relative to capacity • Little air consumption• High performance mutli-vane motor with • Trolleys with anti-drop and anti-climb devices

self-lubricating features and positive start-up • All-steel cast iron constructionsystem for a smooth start and consistent operation • Silencer for low noise operation

Options:Spark-resistant package Chain container Offshore paint Delta-P overload protection

Monorail Air Hoists EHSpecialized Lifting Systems for Large Capacity Loads Offshore, Underground,Anywhere. From 20 Ton to 100 Ton Capacity, Air Pressure 85 PSI (6 Bar)

The JDN “Economy Line” mini completes our PROFI series of hoists, proven in heavy-duty indus-trial applications. The mini brings that famous JDN quality to the light duty sector.

Features:• New patented wear-resistant braking system • Rugged lightweight aluminum housing• Precise variable lifting and lowering speed • Very low headroom• Easy to handle because of its low weight

JD NEUHAUS Air HoistsUp to 100 Ton Capacity

186

Standard Specifications

Capacity: 5, 7½ and 10 tonneService Class: Meets the duty cycle requirementof HMI H4 ServiceOperation: IndoorPower Supply: 460, 230 or 575/3/60Wheels: Compound tread machined steelhardened to 220 BHN, 8" diameter for the 7½and 10 tonne models and 6½" diameter for the5 tonne modelFlange Width Range: Trolley flange width rangefor the 7½ & 10 tonne models is 4 5/8 - 20" witha maximum flange thickness of 2". For the 5 tonnemodel width range is 4 5/8 -14" with a maximumflange thickness of 1¾" as standardBumpers: OptionalHoist Gearing: Triple reduction, helical for thefirst two reductions, spur for the third, heat-treated alloy steel. All gearing is oil bath lubricated,contained in a vacuum cast aluminum gear casemounted outside of the rope drumMechanical Load Brake: NoneRope Drum: Steel machined up to 50% of rope'sdiameter. Rope secured to drum with three heavyDuctile Iron clamps and three extra wrapsSheaves: Machined steelRope Guide: Heavy duty metal rope guide isstandardHeadroom: Low headroom design is standardHoist Motor Brake: D.C. disc rated at 200% ofthe motors full load torqueTrolley Brake: Optional - retardation by non-locking worm gear reducerTrolley Traverse Gearing: Totally enclosed, oil-bath lubricated single wormHoist Motor: Two speed, two winding with a 6:1ratio between the high and low speedsTrolley Motor: Two speed, two winding with a3:1 ratio between the high and low speedsControl: Magnetic contactor type. Temperatureactuated switches standard. Pushbutton stationnot furnished as standardControl Enclosure: Both hoist and trolley controlare contained in one NEMA4/12 panel mountedand wired in as standardLimit Switch: Rotary geared upper and lowerand upper block operated control circuit limitswitchBearings: Antifriction type throughout

World Series Hoist

Available Options

Trolley: Soft StartSingle Speed Trolley ControlVariable Frequency ControlTrolley BrakeTrolley BumpersDifferent Traverse SpeedsWider Flange Width on 5-Tonne B-Frame Models

Hoist: Mainline ContactorOvercapacity Lift ProtectionPushbutton Station

The Shaw-Box World Series wire rope hoist wascreated for the world market and combines over117 years of experience with the latest in manu-facturing and materials technology, rigid designstandards and the best quality components avail-able to create a feature-filled, rugged, easilymaintained hoist.The World Series hoist is metric capacity rated,low headroom, heavy-duty, rated for H4 serviceas a minimum with the higher lifting speeds andprecise positioning control demanded by industryworldwide.

187

188


LAMCO provides custom hook/nut machiningto fit your exacting needs. See page 190 for cus-tom machining dimensional requirements.

The hook at left shows a LAMCO “OpenThroat Chain” (OTC) hook latch. This customlatch provides an open throat for loading with-out pinching fingers like a spring loaded latch.

Call LAMCO for details.

189


See page 190 forcustom machining

requirements

190

Shank Hook Custom Machining

Dimensions

A:

B:

C:

D:

E:

F:

Frame Size:

Material Symbol:


191


pages 63-64

192


193


194


58-59 and 188-191.

58-59 and 188-191.

195

Universal Latch Kits

Heavy Duty J-Latch Replacement Kit

Generic design to fit most hooks. Available in standard steel or stainless steel. Neck and throat dimensions canbe combined for proper fit. (Example, neck size E with throat size L) Neck measurement must be diameter—notcircumference. Latch kit brochures available upon request. Contact Customer Service for dimensions not shown.

Latch KitProduct

Code

Neck DiameterN

(in)

Throat OpeningT

(in)

A 9/16 to 5/8 11/16 to 11/8

B 3/4 to 13/16 11/4C 7/8 to 1 1 3/8 to 11/2D 11/8 to 11/4 1 3/4 to 1 7/8E 13/8 to 11/2 2 1/16

F 15/8 to 111/16 2 1/4G 13/4 to 113/16 2 1/2H 17/8 to 2 3J 2 1/16 to 2 1/8 3 3/8K 2 3/16 to 2 1/4 3 1/2L 2 5/16 to 2 3/8 3 3/4M 2 7/16 to 2 3/4 4O 3 to 3 1/4 4 1/2

CRANEBLOCK SAFE

WORKINGLOAD

(TONS)

PARTNUMBER

J-LATCHKIT

NUMBER

WEIGHT(LBS)

HOOKPART

NUMBERS

3-5 471782 JL3-5 0.2 2590 / 10390 / 10153

10-15 471784 JL10-15 0.3 2217 / 10392

20-25 471785 JL20-25 0.4 2632

30 471786 JL30 0.6 2635

35-45 471787 JL35-45 0.8 2633

50-70 471788 JL50-70 1.7 2636 / 2637

75-110 471789 JL75-110 3.1 2638 / 2639

115-165 471790 JL115-165 3.3 2600 / 2630

NOTE: J-Latches fit onlyJohnson hooks with a lock pinhole drilled through hook tip.

197

UESCO CranesTogether LAMCO and UESCO provide total service & installation for

all your overhead crane needs.Call LAMCO for a free quote on a new overhead crane

at 309-764-7400 or 800-447-1885UESCO standard and custom engineered cranesfeature the latest technology in the overhead materialhandling industry. Single or two speed control for allmotions, two or three step infinitely variable speedadjustable frequency control, or two, three or fivespeed adjustable frequency control. Operation fromcab, pendant pushbutton or radio remote control.Many additional features are available on our standardpre-engineered cranes, or custom engineered cranesfor special applications such as bucket or magnetcranes, outdoor or harsh environments and manyother special applications.

UESCO's seventy-five plus years of experience shows best inour cost-effective pre-engineered designs: single and doublegirder in both top running and underrunning configurations; allfeaturing dual-motor drive systems. Capacities range from 1/2thru 40 tons, with spans to 100 ft. Custom designed cranes tomeet your specific needs are also available, providing the sameperformance and service-ability evident in the pre-engineeredcranes.

The best design is only as good as the care taken in fabrication.Strict specifications, rigidly adhered to during all phases of theassembly process assure you of a quality, cost-effective liftingtool. Built of structural steel girders which meet or exceed

C.M.A.A. design specifications, UESCO cranes have a minimumdeflection of 1/600, with a built-in safety factor of 5 to 1.

UESCO maintains a fleet of service trucks and installationcrews skilled in all trades related to crane erection and servicing.These technicians bring years of experience and factory trainingto the jobsite, ensuring a safe, efficient installation with allequipment adjusted to the manufacturer's operating specifications

Our service technicians are qualified to repair all makes ofoverhead material handing equipment. Our service departmentis on call around the clock, seven days a week to handle allemergency repairs. We guarantee same day service forbreakdowns and the best delivery on reworks in the industry

Call LAMCO309-764-7400 or 800-447-1885

198

Harrington Offers -• Heavy Duty Class C Single & Double

Girder Complete Cranes - Motorized,Geared or Push

• Medium Duty Series 300 & Light DutySeries 200 Complete Push Cranes

Harrington’s heavy duty cranes have side guiderollers which means these cranes operate mucheasier than flanged wheel cranes.

Complete crane system includes:• All bolted construction for ease in assembly• End trucks come standard with bumpers, drop stops, and rail

sweeps.• Drive shaft assembly with hand wheel and hand chain for

geared cranes.• Standard bridge beam assembly with bracing and capacity

labels.• Trolley hoist available in a wide selection of styles.• Power supply to trolley hoist (if required).• Optional runway electrification.• Documentation including assembly and installation instruc-

tions, crane operator’s guide, and owner’s manuals.• Touch-up paint.• One year warranty.

Capabilities to count on:• Capacities through 10 ton and spans through 60 feet.• Order with or without hoist and trolley.• Manual or electric hoists and trolley available.• Suitable for use on ASCE crane rail or square bar.

Harrington complete crane systems offer you the ability to purchase acomplete crane system and save on installation by installing it yourself.

Call LAMCO for a free quote on a new overhead craneat 309-764-7400 or 800-447-1885

199

HPC500Push End Trucks • 1/2 - 2 TON Capacities

• Up to 24’ span

200

Free standing jib cranes are available in three basic styles to suitspecific applications: base plate mounted, foundation mounted, andsleeve insert mounted. 360° rotational capability can maximize theutilization of any work area.

No additional support is needed other than the specified rein-forced concrete foundation.

FREE STANDING JIB CRANES• 360° rotation.• Allows for electrified, motor driven, powered rotation through various collector ring assemblies.• The boom or I-beam is designed to meet all specifications utilizing a 25% factor of rated load for impact and 15% of

rated load for hoist and trolley weight.• The pipe mast or column is designed to give maximum strength and minimum deflection to resist bending, buckling,

and crushing as well as wear by the trunnion roller assembly.• The top bearing assembly utilizes a Timken tapered roller bearing provided with a grease fitting for proper lubrication.• The bearings are designed for a 5000 hour, B-10 design life.

FREE STANDINGJIB CRANES

Base Plate Mounted • Utilizes a hexagonal base plate reinforced with six knee braces equally spaced

on the circumference of the mast.• The base plate assembly is secured by means of anchor bolts to a prescribed

reinforced concrete foundation, with the number of anchor bolts varying withthe capacity of the crane.

• Six bolts are used for columns less than 16" in diameter and 12 bolts forcolumns 16" in diameter and greater.

100 SERIES

standard under boom heights from 8 to 20 ft.,up to 40 ft. on request

standard capacities to 5 tons, special capacities to 15 tons

standard spans to 20 ft.up to 60 ft. on request

201

Foundation Mounted • Utilizes a square steel plate which is welded to the bottom of the

column. • The plate positions and levels the mast by anchoring it to a first-pour

concrete footing.• A second-pour foundation of reinforced concrete supports the mast.

Makes complete use of the work floor area and can be used inapplications where a base plate could hamper floor activity.

101 SERIESstandard spans to 20 ft.up to 60 ft. on request



102 SERIESstandard spans to 20 ft.up to 60 ft. on request



Sleeve Insert Mounted • 360° rotation.• Utilizes a square steel plate which is welded to the

bottom of the sleeve.• Allows for relocation of the mast.• The plate positions and levels the sleeve by anchor-

ing it to a first-pour concrete footing.• Asecond-pour foundation of reinforced concrete

supports the sleeve.• The mast is thenplaced into the sleeve where it is

leveled by wedges and welded in place. 102 seriescan be relocated without damaging the mast.*

• Makes complete use of the work floor area and canbe used in applications where a base plate couldhamper floor activity.

*New sleeve and foundation would be required.

202

• SPANCO mast mounted jib cranes offer a lower cost alternativeto free standing jib cranes.

• Full 360° rotation, without requiring a large mounting foundation(which can cost more than the crane).

• Requires top and bottom support of the mast to building floorand overhead building steel.

• Power rotation is available on all models.

WARNING:Jib cranes should not be hung from any existing building structure without firstconsulting a qualified architect or engineer for the purpose of determining if thestructure is adequate. Severe bodily injury and property damage can result ifthis procedure is not followed.

MAST JIB CRANES

Drop Cantilever

• Identical to the Series 200 with theaddition of side-plate connections whichallow the boom to be mounted perma-nently at any specified height on themast.

• Provides clearance for overheadobstructions above the boom, belowthe top of the mast.

201 SERIES

standard capacities to 5 tonsGreater spans, heights, and

capacities on request

standard spans to 20 ft.

standardheight to

20 ft.

MASTJIB CRANES

Full Cantilever

• Utilizes an I-beam for the boom and an H-beam for the column.• Two types of bearing arrangements:

1. Aself-aligning spherical bearing is used on the top bearing assem-bly.2. Abronze bearing and bronze thrust washer are used on the bottomassembly.

• Both bearing assemblies are provided with grease fittings to providelubrication and to aid rotation.

• The boom is mounted at the top of the mast in order to provide maxi-mum underboom clearance.

200 SERIES

standard capacities to 5 tonsGreater spans, heights, and

capacities on request

standard spans to 20 ft.

standardheight to

20 ft.

203

WALLMOUNTEDJIB CRANESCost-effective Solutions For Lifting and Moving

Heavy Material

Wall Cantilever Kits (shown above)Customers can fabricate their own Wall Cantilever Jib Crane using the hinge

components supplied by SPANCO. All hardware for bolting the hinges tothe jib are supplied.

standardcapacities to

5 tons,higher capaci-ties available

standard spans to 30 ft. (longer spans available)

WALL MOUNTED JIB CRANES

Wall Cantilever Jib Cranes • 200° rotation.• Offers greatest potential underboom clearance

because it can be installed more closely to the ceil-ing than other wall mounted styles.

• Two connection types:1. Awelded connection is used in most capacity and

boom spans.2. Abolted connection is used for larger spans and

capacities because of shipping considerations. Stiffeners are welded to the mast at the point

where the wall brackets are connected to stiffen theweb of the I-beam.

• Powered rotation is available on all models.• Hardware for mounting to wall or column supplied

by others.

300 SERIES

204

Wall Bracket Tie Rod Supported Jib Cranes • 200° degree rotation.• Utilizes a standard I-beam boom, a tie rod threaded

at both ends, a fabricated beam bracket, and twowall brackets; one for the tie rod and one for theboom.

• Allows maximum usage of the work area, includingwork close to the existing structure, because thereare no supporting components under the boom.

• This design is the most economical style of jib crane,provided overhead clearance or building columnstrength is not a limiting factor.

• Hardware for mounting to wall or column supplied byothers.

standard capacities to5 tons

standard spans to 30 ft.(longer spans available)

WALL BRACKET KITSInclude all componentsexcept the I-beam, tie rod,and mounting hardwarewhich if preferred, can bepurchased locally.

Wall Bracket Connection• Top and bottom wall brackets utilize a formed steel

channel, with two bronze bushings, bronze thrustwashers, and formed tie rod clevises.

• All bolted connections are in double shear.• All swivel connections utilize bronze bushings and grease

fittings to ease rotation, promoting long life and low maintenance.

WARNINGS FOR 300 AND 301 SERIES JIBS This equipment is not, in any way, designed for the lifting, supporting, or transporting humans. Failure to follow the specified load and mounting limitations canresult in serious bodily injury and/or property damage.

Jib cranes should not be hung from any existing building structure without first consulting a qualified architect or engineer for the purpose of determining if the structure is adequate. Severe bodily injury and property damage can result if this procedure is not followed.

301 SERIES

205

ARTICULATING JIB CRANESFree Standing

Bridge and CeilingMounted

• Articulating jib cranes can move loads around corners and columns,reach into machinery and containers and service an area from close tothe pivot point to the end of the boom for 360° of operation. Capacitiesfrom 150 to 2,000 lbs., spans to 16 ft.

• Articulating jibs can be floor, wall, ceiling, or bridge crane mounted tobest suit your application.

• Free standing and ceiling mounted series offer 360° rotation with options to internally pipe compressed air, vacuum or electrification to any device supported onthe end of the boom.

• SPANCO’s bridge mountedarticulating jib design offersmore headroom than thoseby other manufacturers.

• Bridge mounted jibs cansupport nearly any type ofmanipulator, balancer,or hoist.

ARTICULATINGJIB CRANES

206

SELECTING YOUR SPANCO GANTRY CRANET SERIES-3-Way Adjustable gantries, fabricated from heavy gauge square mechanical tubing, offer the greatest under I-

beam height and range of adjustability. Maximum flexibility of span, height, and tread adjustment allows use onuneven flooring. Adjustability allows travel through doorways and aisles, under mezzanines, or other overheadobstructions. Motorized option available.

• All steel construction capacities to 10 tons.-maximum overall heights to 24'-3" -standard spans to 40 ft.

• Steel construction with aluminum I-beam capacities to three tons.-maximum overall heights to 22'-6" -standard spans to 15 ft.

• All aluminum construction capacities to three tons.-maximum overall heights to 21'-11" -standard spans to 15 ft.

A SERIES gantries, fabricated from heavy gauge rectangular mechanical tubing, provide a lower cost and lighter weightlifting alternative to the T Series for applications requiring movement through doorways and under obstructions. Designdoes not require brace legs, allowing greater clear span. Adjustable span optional. Motorized option not available.

• All steel construction, adjustable and fixed height capacities to 10 tons.-maximum under beam heights to 16 ft. -standard spans to 40 ft.

• All aluminum construction, adjustable height/span capacities to two tons.-maximum under beam heights to 12'-2" -standard spans to 15 ft.

E SERIES ECONOMY gantries, fabricated from heavy gauge square mechanical tubing, offer a no-frills lifting alternativeto ASeries in fixed and adjustable heights and spans. Motorized option not available.

• Steel construction, fixed height capacities to five tons.-standard under beam height 10 ft. -standard span 12 ft.

• Steel construction, adjustable height/span standard capacities to three tons-maximum under beam heights to 14 ft. -standard span 11'-6"

PF SERIES gantries, fabricated and welded from heavy gauge steel mechanical tubing, provide solid lifting for applica-tions requiring movement of large heavy loads. Ample bracing ensures high rigidity for trackless or track-mountedmotor-driven applications. Offers greatest fixed height. Ideal for motorized applications and single leg (semi-gantry)configurations.

• All steel construction capacities to 15 tons.-maximum under beam heights to 35 ft. -standard spans to 40 ft.

Floor Protecting Casters• Standard on all gantries through 15 tons.• Wheels feature moldon polyurethane tread that provides maximum floor protection, resisting chipping

and outwearing ordinary plastic wheels.• Equipped with four-position swivel locks (except E series). Casters lock at 90° intervals to allow

travel in a straight line and to help prevent movement under load when locked in opposable directions.

• Wheel brakes and other optional accessories can be supplied on all gantries. SPANCO can supply any style of caster to meet customer specifications.

207

T SERIES

GANTRYCRANES

*capped I-beam

Adjustable Span

Adjustable Height

Adjustable Tread

208

*capped I-beam

209

*capped I-beam

T Series all aluminum up to 2 TON, 15’ span and T Series aluminum I-beam up to 3 TON, 15’ spanavailable upon request

210

A SERIES

GANTRYCRANES

*capped I-beam

211

“A Series” all aluminum up to 2 TON, 15’ span available on request.

*capped I-beam

A SERIES

GANTRYCRANES

“A Series” adjustable height gantry available. Allows loads to be moved through door-ways, under obstructions and lifted on uneven surfaces.

212

E SERIES

GANTRYCRANES

LUG-ALL winch-hoist kits not available for height adjustmentof E Series gantries.

213

PF SERIES

GANTRYCRANES

214

PF SERIES

GANTRYCRANES

215

POWER DRIVES - Available on T and PF Series onlyPower drive kit includes two-drive assemblies with either

polyurethane (trackless) or V-groove wheels, sprockets,chains, two-gear reducers, two single-speed, 230/460V-threephase TEFC motors, solid state adjustable “soft start,” andtwo-idler assemblies. Standard travel speed is 50 FPM. Otherspeeds and voltages available on request.

Trackless kit- also includes guide rollers on one drive and one idlerassembly. Idler and drive assemblies are supplied withpolyurethane bumpers.

POWER DRIVES FOR

GANTRYCRANES

TRIPODS TRIPODSQuick, easy setup for heavy

lifting in outdoor areaswith no overhead sup-port.

Steel and aluminum con-struction capacities totwo tons.

• Independently,adjustable legs permituse on uneven groundand adjust on six inchcenters.

• Standard lashing kit, included with every tripod, prevents legsfrom spreading on hard or soft surfaces.

Free swiveling eyebolt hangs

plumb to protect tri-pod head from

twist and strain.

Aluminum feet areused on all hard

surfaces. Standardon all models

unless otherwisespecified.

Mud feet are usedon soft ground.

Integral spikes firm-ly entrench legs toprevent slipping or

sinking into ground.Complete inter-

changeability withaluminum feet and

available in place ofaluminum feet or

as an optionalaccessory.

216

FESTOON SYSTEMS ANDCABLE

Electromotive Systems offers a completeline of festooning hardware and cable toefficiently complete the delivery of poweror control in a variety of material handlingapplications.

Festoon Systems• C-Track • Heavy-Duty Aluminum • Heavy-Duty I-Beam • Mill Duty I-Beam • Tag Line Wire Supported

Plug and Play Festoon Hardware

Electromotive™ Cable

ELECTROMOTIVE™

Electromotive Systems is an industry leader in providing precisionelectrification products for overhead material handling equipment.

ELECTROBAR® FS

Electrobar FS® Conductor Bar Systemfor the electrification of cranes,monorails and automated storage andretrieval systems!

Standard Features• A unique shape that maximizes

safety and performance • A UL Listed "finger safe" design

that minimizes the potential forelectrical contact

• Easy installation and maintenance,which reduces labor costs.

Available in 90, 110, 125*, 250 and 400AMP ratings, and single and doubleshoe collector assemblies. Snap-inhanger kits are available for 2, 3 and4 pole applications.

*Suitable for 125 Amp configurationsin non-UL applications.

Electrobar Elite®

A totally enclosed 4 conductorbar system available in 60, 100,130 and 200 Amp configurations.IP23 Finger Safe Rating.Lightweight, rigid design.Modular construction and otherdesign features significantlyreduce installation time and cost.

Standard Features• Snap together covers, power

feeds and hangers • Lightweight, rigid construc-

tion • Ease of installation, lower

total system cost • Low maintenance • Improved safety, (finger safe

rating of IP23).

SBP2® PENDANT PUSH-BUTTONSTATIONSFeaturing a l ightweight,ergonomic design, ElectromotiveSystems SBP2 PendantPushbutton Stations provideoptimum control andperformance with less effort andfatigue than traditional pendants.With most models weighingunder two pounds, this slim-linependant rests easily andcomfortably in the palm of yourhand. The high-impact resistant, watertight enclosureis ideally suited for any industrial application.

Pre-Engineered PanelsI M P U L S E ® o P 3 ,IMPULSE®oG+ Series 2,and IMPULSE®oVG+Series 2 drives can bepurchased as part of acomplete, pre-engineeredTCONTROLS® motorcontrol system. Thesequick-ship, easy-to-installpanels offer cost-effective and reliable operation using highquality components. All panels are tested and quality-approvedprior to shipment.

217

Williams Wireless PendantsSolo 400 Series

Industrial Radio Remote Controls

• 100% Error Free Transmission • Safe Design

• One Million Press Cycles • Familiar Pendant Design

• 200 Hour Battery Life • Synthesized RF

• 32,768 Unique ID Codes • Main Safety Relay

• Waterproof & Durable • Total Solution

• No Site License Required • One Year Guarantee

AVAILABLE IN SIX MODELS

Solo 400 6 single-speed buttons + AUX + EMS Stop

Solo 410 2 dual-speed buttons + 4 single-speed buttons + AUX +EMS.

Solo 420 6 dual-speed buttons (3 wire cumulative) + AUX + EMS + 2Separate Common Circuits (Typical)

Solo 430 6 dual-speed buttons + SELECT button for dual hoist andtrolley + EMS.

Solo 430A 6 dual-speed buttons + 3rd Speed/AUX button + EMS

Solo 430B 6 dual-speed buttons (4 wire non-cumulative) + AUX +EMS + 3 Separate Common Circuits

218

telePilot™Remote Radio Controls

DELIVERS MAXIMUM VALUE FOR YOUR INVEST-MENT

• Transmitter backward compatible to old receivers—preserve your9K and 10K receiver investment.

• Stores four complete system configurations eliminating the costand hassle of tracking and maintaining a fleet of spares.

• Delivers more than 200 hours of operation with a disposable lithi-um battery.

• Easy programming using Palm Pilot-® and free telePilot.

FEATURES SET IT APART FROM THE COMPETITION • Three motions standard, up to five motions optional.

• Single or two speed operation.

• Electronically synthesized frequency allows for 29 operating channels ...no crystals to break.

• Special output mapping available to customize your crane configurations.

• Lightweight ergonomically designed transmitter.

• Easy interactive PDA programming via infrared wireless link.

• Compact receiver design installs easily in the most confined spaces.

• Controller and diagnostic LEDs allow you to perform diagnostics without opening the receiver door.

• Internal master relay disable switch allows you to safely test the controls "live" without moving the crane.

MOST DURABLE TRANSMITTER ON THE MARKET • Durable, lightweight, extruded aluminum transmitter housing.

• Rubber coated, polycarbonate end caps.

• Switches rated for one million plus operations.

• Shock mounted circuit boards are more impact resistant.

• 3 Battery options:AA batteries Rechargeable lithium Disposable lithium

219

telePendant™Remote Radio Controls

FLEXIBILITY YOU WILL ONLY FIND FROM TELEMO-TIVE

• Available in up to 3 motions with 6 auxiliary functions or 5 motionswith 4 auxiliary functions.

• Available in single, two or three-speed designs.

• Backward compatible to older Telemotive receivers - preserve your10K investment.

• Can be configured to operate 4 cranes in one transmitter.

• Palm Pilot programmable in under a minute.

• Electronically synthesized frequency allows for 29 operating chan-nels ...no crystals to break.

• telePendant™ can be custom labeled.

MOST DURABLE TRANSMITTER ON THE MARKET• Durable, lightweight, specially blended polymer case withstands

shocks and is chemically resistant.

• Simple-to-operate, maintenance-free, "Pendant Style" pushbutton switches save you money and are testedto in excess of one million operations.

• Exceptionally long battery life - can operate up to 200 hours with a disposable lithium battery pack. May alsobe operated with standard AA batteries.

AWARD-WORTHY ERGONOMICS • Total weight less than 1.3 Ibs.

• 50% smaller by volume than its predecessor.

• Ergonomically designed switches are easy to handle and control.

9.5”(24 cm)

Sized right to fit yourhand comfortably

220

DYNAFOR® • HANDIFOR®

DYNAFOR® MWX Crane weigher

The DYNAFOR® MWX gives you the possibility to control and measure loads on cranes with theDYNAFOR® LLX technology. It has great work autonomy of up to 700 hours battery life. The MWX,with its LCD readout, programmable functions, and remote display, is ideal for weighing withcranes. Models 2.5 to 12.5 are available with infrared control and LED, remote read-out.

Dynafor® MWX 0.25 0.5 1.25 2.5 5 12.5

Capacity

Accuracy (0.2%)

Height of Digits

Weight

DYNAFOR® LLZ Compact electronic load indicator

The DYNAFOR® LLZ is a compact and economical load indicator built for measuring tensile forces andchecking loads. Ideal for monitoring lifting systems, check weighing in factories, for checking tension inpower lines and guy ropes, and many other applications. The DYNAFOR® LLZ displays in mass (lbs.)or force (daN) and offers more than a 100 hours battery life.

Dynafor® LLZ 0.25 0.5 1 2 3.2 6.4 10 20

Capacity

Accuracy (0.8%)

Weight

HANDIFOR® Compact weigher

The lightweight, compact and ergonomic HANDIFOR® is built for measuring small forces or loads.Specially designed for difficult load checking conditions, the HANDIFOR® will measure the weight ofyour packages, dispatch bags, courier, materials in laboratories and many other materials that needweighing.

Handifor® 20 50 100

Capacity

Accuracy (0.8%)

Height of Digits

Weight

H x W x D

DimensionsH x W x D

lbs. 44 110 220daN 20 50 100±lbs. 0.5 1 2±daN 0.2 0.4 0.8

in. 0.53 0.53 0.53mm 13.5 13.5 13.5lbs. 0.5 0.5 0.5kg 0.22 0.22 0.22

lbs. 0.2 0.4 1kg 0.1 0.2 0.5lbs. 44 110 220kg 20 50 100in. 5.51 x 3.15 x 1.57

mm 140 x 80 x 40

H x W x D

Smallest Readout

Maximum Display

Smallest readout

Maximum Display

Smallest Readout

Maximum Display

Height of Digits

Dimensions 0.25/0.5/1.25 2.5 5 12.5

in. 17.3 x 5.4 x 6.3 17.3 x 7.9 x 7 20.5 x 7.9 x 7 27.6 x 7.9 x 8mm 440 x 138 x 160 440 x 200 x 177 520 x 200 x 177 700 x 200 x 205

Dimensions 0.25/0.5/1 2 3.2 6.4 10 20

in. 8.7 x 3.5 x 1.7 8.7 x 3.5 x 1.9 9.6 x 3.8 x 1.9 10.8 x 4.5 x 1.9 12.8 x 4.33 x 2.44 14.8 x 5.27 x 2.83mm 220 x 90 x 42 220 x 90 x 48 243 x 97 x 48 275 x 115 x 48 376 x 110 x 62 376 x 134 x 72

lbs. 500 1,000 2,500 5,000 10,000 25,000t 0.25 0.5 1.25 2.5 5 12.5

±lbs. 1 2 5 10 20 50±kg 0.5 1 2.5 5 10 25in. 1 1 1 1 3/4 1 3/4 1 3/4

mm 25 25 25 44 44 44lbs. 10.4 10.4 10.4 15.5 18.7 46.3kg 4.7 4.7 4.7 7 8.5 21

lbs. 0.2 0.5 1.0 2 5 10kg 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5

lbs. 500 1,000 2,500 5,000 10,000 25,000kg 250 500 1,250 2,500 5,000 12,500

lbs. 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 6,400 12,800 20,000 40,000t 0.25 0.5 1 2 3.2 6.4 10 20

±lbs. 4 8 16 30 50 100 160 300±daN 2 4 8 15 25 50 80 150

in. 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4mm 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18lbs. 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.9 3.3 5.1 8.8 15.5kg 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.5 2.3 4 7

lbs. 1 2 5 10 10 20 50 100daN 0.5 1 2 5 5 10 25 50lbs. 550 1,100 2,200 4,400 7,000 14,000 20,000 40,000kg 275 550 1,100 2,200 3,500 7,000 10,000 20,000

221

DYNAFOR® LLX • LLX-TR WIRELESSDYNAFOR® LLX Electronic dynamometer

The DYNAFOR® LLX load indicating device is an accurate and compact instrumentfor measuring tensile forces and loads. Designed for use in though job sitesconditions, the DYNAFOR® features a built-in LCD readout, programmable functionsand remote display.

lbs. 500 1,000 2,500 5,000 10,000 25,000 50,000 100,000 200,000 500,000t 0.25 0.5 1.25 2.5 5 12.5 25 50 100 250

±lbs. 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 400 1,000±kg 0.5 1 2.5 5 10 25 50 100 200 500in. 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 1 1 1 1 1.75

mm 19 19 19 19 19 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 44±lbs. 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 4 8.4 14.5 33 101 474

kg 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.4 1.98 3.8 6.6 15.1 46 215lbs. 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 N/A N/A

t N/A N/A N/A 0.001 0.002 0.005 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1lbs. 500 1,000 2,500 5,000 10,000 25,000 50,000 99,950 N/A N/A

t N/A N/A N/A 2.5 5 12.5 25 50 100 250

*Units of measures can be displayed in lbs., kg, t, metric ton, daN and kN (on most mod-els).Display features auto shut-off, peak hold and zero tare.

Dynafor® LLX 0.25 0.5 1.25 2.5 5 12.5 25 50 100 250

Capacity

Accuracy (0.2%)*

Height of Digits

DYNAFOR® LLX-TR Wireless electronic dynamometer

Using the popular DYNAFOR® load indicating strain gauge technology, theDYNAFOR® LLX-TR wireless radio-controlled dynamometer will let you read data ata distance of up to 200 ft. (60 m). An infrared transmitter lets you adjust the on/off,tare, peak hold parameters from a distance of up to 70 ft. (20 m) for efficient, preciseand secure load readouts. Unique frequencies available for use of units near onanother. See our DYNAFOR® LLX table for technical specifications.

U.S. FCC Identifier: OVL-DYNAFORHHDRXCanada Cert. No.: 36191031952

FCC APPROVEDU.S. & Canada

Remote readout for LLX & MWX

• Connection by cable up to 325 ft. (100 m)• Hand held with 3/4 in. (18 mm) (LCD) digits• Peak Hold, and Tare functions

Portable printer for LLX and MWX

• Connection by cable up to 325 ft. (100 m)• Printer receives signal, records load, date, time• Aluminum casing, measuring 14.5 x 12 x 3.7 in.

(370 x 300 x 94 mm)

Portable printer for LLX-TR w. Wireless Remote

• Radio signal received up to 200 ft. away• Same functions as below

Weight

Dimensions 0.25/0.5/1.25 2.5 5 12.5 25 50 100 250

in. 7.5 x 3.2 x 2.2 8.4 x 3.2 x 2.2 9.2 x 3.5 x 2.2 12.2 x 4.3 2.3 14.1 x 5.3 x 2.7 17.3 x 6.5 x 3.9 26 x 10.2 x 4.7 35.6 x 16.7 x 9.8mm 190 x 83 x 56 214 x 83 x 56 234 x 90 x 56 310 x110 x 58 360 x 134 x 68 440 x 164 x 98 660 x 260 x 18 905 x 424 x 248 H x W x D

Smallest Readout

Maximum Display

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

222

The DYNASAFE load limiter, model HF32, is a mechanicaldevice that has been designed particularly for fitting to exist-ing overhead cranes and hoists with a dead end wire ropeand connecting directly into the UP function of the lifting sys-tem.It is a simple device with a microswitch to allow for certaindynamic effects and which, when correctly adjusted, will pre-vent an overload condition of the lifting system.

Application:This mechanical load cell has been designed to provide atrip point for lifting systems which have a dead end wire rope.The trip point provides a signal that the user may employdepending on his requirements, e.g.:for load limiting in lifting systemsto limit the speed as a function of the load on traversing to limit the effort applied for pulling

This UNIVERSAL load cell is recommended for its simplicity and quick-fitting capability.

Operating principleThe load cell operates by the movement of metal within itselastic limits. This movement acts on an adjustable switchgiving an “all-or-nothing” signal. The position of theadjustable pin sets the capacity range. The central “UNIVERSAL” fixing bracket is adapted to suit wire ropesfrom 5 to 16 mm (model HF 32/1), 17 to 26 mm(model HF32/2), and from 27 to 36 mm (model HF 36/3)Full details may be found in the installation manual.

The effort applied through the wire rope “deforms” the bodyof the load cell creating a difference in the relative positionsof the two sections. This operates a microswitch which maybe wired directly into the UP Relay of the lifting system toprevent an overload condition.

dynasafe®

“UNIVERSAL” load limiter - HF 32 series

Axlepin

Fig. 1 - HF 32 “universal” load cell Operating principle

Complies with ANSI/ASME HST-4Moverload limiting device

Model Code Dia. of Capacity A B Depthw. ropein.(mm) lbs. in. in. in.

HF 32/1/A 0420600 3/16 - 5/8 550-6000 5.9 2.75 1.57(5 -16)

HF 32/2/A 0420601 11/16 -1 600-12000 7.9 3.9 1.97(17 - 26)

HF 32/3/A 0420602 1 1/16 -1 3/8 2000-24000 11 5.43 2.36(27 - 36)

Max. capacity HF 32/1/A: 6000 lbs on a single fallHF 32/2/A: 12,000 lbs on a single fallHF 32/3/A: 24,000 lbs on a single fall

Adjustment: Fine-Thread ScrewMeasuring cell: MicroswitchTrip point power 4A/220 Vac

0.5/220 VdcRepeatability of cut out: +/- 5%Temperature range: From -30

o C to + 80

o C

Connections: 4 Conductor (NO,NC)(6 ft lead supplied)

Material: Anodized, Aircraftgrade aluminum

Protection class IP55

Technical Specification:

Special versions are available for smaller capacities, dynamic filtering, dual trip points andexplosive atmospheres

B

A

223

Thern products are not for lifting people or things over people.

Hand Winches – for Lifting or Pulling

Spur Gear Spur Gear Spur Gear Worm Gear Worm Gearup to 1,000 lb up to 2,000 lb up to 10,000 lb up to 4,000 lb Speed Reducers

Power Winches – for Lifting or Pulling

Series 4WP and 4WP2T8 Series 4WP2D8 Series 477 Series 4WSup to 2,000 lb up to 1,500 lb up to 2,000 lb up to 6,000 lb

Power Winches – for Lifting or Pulling

Series 4WS Series 4HS Series 4HPF Series 4HPFC Series 4HWFup to 26,000 lb up to 56,000 lb up to 25,000 lb up to 15,000 lb 8,100 lb

Davit and Floor Cranes

Series 5122 Series 5110 Series 5124 Series 57 Series 548up to 500 lb up to 1,000 lb up to 2,000 lb up to 2,200 lb up to 1,000 lb

Contact LAMCO for ordering details309-764-7400800-447-1885

224

Model

Approx.Speed

permin(fpm)

Nominal Capacitylbs (kg)

Weightof

Machinelbs (kg)

Weight of

Wire Ropelbs (kg)

Dimensions ofMachinein (mm)

Dimensionsof HandleExt./Closed

in (mm)

WireRopedia.

in (mm)

WireRopebreakstrain

in (mm)

TU-17 7 - 92,000*/1,500**

(800/600)18.5(8.4)

30ft./9m8 (3.6)

20-3/4x9-3/4 x4-1/2(528x284x113)

28/18(730/450)

5/16(8.3)

10,000(4,800)

TU-28 7 - 84,000*/3,000**(1,600/1,200)

41(20)

60ft./18m28.9 (13)

26x13x5-3/4(660x360x145)

45/26(1147/648)

7/16(11.5)

20,000(9,600)

TU-32 58,000*/6,000**(3,200/2,400) 59.5

(27)60ft./18m28.9 (13)

27x13x6-1/8(685x365x156)

45/26(1147/648)

5/8(16.3)

40,000(19,200)

T-508 7 - 92,000*(800)

14.25(6.6)

30ft./9m8 (3.5)

16-1/2x9-7/8x3-7/8(420x250x99)

27/16(690/405)

5/16(8.3)

10,000(4,800)

T-516 64,000*(1,600)

30(13.5)

60ft./18m28.9 (13)

20-7/8x12-7/16x5(530x315x127)

45/26(1147/648)

7/16(11.5)

20,000(9,600)

T-532 68,000*(3,200)

51(24)

30ft./9m8 (3.5)

24-7/16x14x5-1/8(631x357x148)

45/26(1147/648)

5/8(16.3)

40,000(19,200)

Griphoist / TirforHeavy-duty wire rope hoist for unlimited lifts and pulls

225

Rated Speed Motor Motor Wire ElectricModel Load (FPM) Type KW Rope Control

lbs. in.- ft. PendantGripwinch - Mobile Winch with 1600 ft. (500 m) driven wire rope reeler with clutchGXE504 1,000 17 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.55 5/16-1,600 10 ft.GXE500 1,000 35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1 5/16-1,600 10 ft.GXE505 1,000 17/35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.55/1.1 5/16-1,600 10 ft.GXE506 1,000 17/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.55/2.2 5/16-1,600 10 ft.GXE503 1,000 35/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/2.2 5/16-1,600 10 ft.GXE704 1,500 17 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.75 5/16-1,600 10 ft.GXE700 1,500 35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.5 5/16-1,600 10 ft.GXE705 1,500 17/35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.75/1.5 5/16-1,600 10 ft.GXE706 1,500 17/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.75/3 5/16-1,600 10 ft.GXE703 1,500 35/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.5/3 5/16-1,600 10 ft.GXE1024 2,200 17 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1 3/8-1,300 10 ft.GXE1020 2,200 35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 2.2 3/8-1,300 10 ft.GXE1025 2,200 17/35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/2.2 3/8-1,300 10 ft.GXE1026 2,200 17/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/2.2 3/8-1,300 10 ft.GXE1023 2,200 35/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 2.2/4 3/8-1,300 10 ft.GXE3050 6,600 23 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 4.5 9/16-1,600 10 ft.

Gripwinch - Mobile Winch with 200 ft. (60 m) free running wire rope reelerGXE300 700 33 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.55 5/16-200 10 ft.GXE302 700 66 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1 5/16-200 10 ft.GXE504 1,000 17 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.55 5/16-200 10 ft.GXE500 1,000 35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1 5/16-200 10 ft.GXE505 1,000 17/35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.55/1.1 5/16-200 10 ft.GXE506 1,000 17/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.55/2.2 5/16-200 10 ft.GXE503 1,000 35/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/2.2 5/16-200 10 ft.GXE704 1,500 17 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1 5/16-200 10 ft.GXE700 1,500 35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 2.2 5/16-200 10 ft.GXE705 1,500 17/35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/2.2 5/16-200 10 ft.GXE706 1,500 17/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/4.0 5/16-200 10 ft.GXE703 1,500 35/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 2.2/4.0 5/16-200 10 ft.GXE1024 2,000 17 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1 3/8-160 10 ft.GXE1020 2,000 35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 2.2 3/8-160 10 ft.GXE1025 2,000 17/35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/2.2 3/8-160 10 ft.GXE1026 2,000 17/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/4.0 3/8-160 10 ft.GXE1023 2,000 35/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 2.2/4.0 3/8-160 10 ft.GXE3050 6,600 21 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 4.5 9/16-360 10 ft.

GripwinchHigh speed powered wire rope winch

226

20 TON HAND WINCH (WWP20M-6)65 TON ELECTRIC WINCH (WWP65E-10-14 )

ELECTRIC WINCHESSimple to operate and rugged, Patterson's tow-boat winches provide tensioning by electric power, allow for controlled pay-out and require minimal maintenance.

• Available in a wide range of models from 20 tonto 65 ton capacity.

• Electric spring-loaded brake.• Heavy-duty roller chain and sprockets.• Rope and gear guards protect wire rope and

enclose the gearing.• Release knob frees brake for manual operation. • Machined alloy gearing - no castings!• High-strength phosphor bronze bearings. • Bolted keeper plate allows fast, easy shaft

removal.• 230/460V-3 Phase-60Hz NEMA Design D motors.

Other special motors available.

HAND WINCHESProven track record of efficient and fast operation.

• Available from 20 ton to 65 ton capacities. • Dished handwheel for operator safety.• Solid handwheel option available.• Pull-up ratchet enables high tension.• Many models include Patterson's brake-lock

system which uses an eccentric-cam safety-release design.

• Full size rope guard helps to prevent fouling ofwire rope.

• Hinged gear shroud protects gearing.• Sturdy and durable components offer reliable, low

maintenance operation.

HEAVY DUTY WINCHESAND RIGGING FOR

WORK BOATS& BARGES

228

229

230


231


232


233


234

SUITABLE FOR:• Excavators• Wheel Loaders• Other weld-on applications

Available in capacities ranging from 500 - 75,000 lbs.Thread diameters range from 1/4” - 2 3/4”.

Take up ranging from 4” - 24”

Contact LAMCO at 309-764-7400 or 800-447-1885 for dimensions available.

235

STANDARD RATCHETTURNBUCKLES

Patterson offers a complete line ofturnbuckles for various uses including applications in general industry,

farming, mining, construction, shipbuilding, and the marine industry.

Eye & EyeRatchet Turnbuckle*

236

237

238

T E N S O RTENSORS have a screw-type action with eccentric loading. By turning the drive head, the large tube telescopes over the inner tube and pulls the anchoring points together. The drive head can be turned manually for initial tightening. Maximum tightening is achieved by using a square drive ratchet wrench or impact wrench in the drive head. Up to 1,000 pounds tension is possible with hand tightening alone!

Initial low tensioning or pulling (upto 9,000 Ibs.) simply by turningthe drive head by hand.

Easy tensioning with a commonratchet wrench.

Effortless, speedy tensioning witha powered impact wrench.

Because all of the working parts are completely enclosed, the TENSOR is almost indestructible. Because the TENSOR leaves the factory fully lubricated, the TENSOR is almost maintenance free.

Designed initially as a marine tensioner to safely secure heavy trailers, cargo containers, rail cars and moreeven in rough seas, the TENSOR has evolved into an industrial tool for any tensioning or pulling application.Now used in mining, trucking, railroading ...even guy wire tensioning for portable radar antennas.

239

240

241

242

240.

243

240.

244

BIG ORANGE ATTACHMENTS—SHACKLES—CARBON

MADE IN U.S.A.

Workingload Painted Galv. Painted Galv. Painted Galv.

Size limit Product UPC UPC Product UPC UPC Product UPC UPC(in.) (tons) code 43927- 43927- code 43927- 43927- code 43927- 43927-

3/16 111/2 M645 — 40061 M345 — 40095 — — —

1/4 113/4 M646 40004 40062 M346 40100 40099 — — —

5/16 111 M647 40008 40064 M347 40105 40104 — — —

3/8 1111/2 M648 40012 40066 M348 40110 40109 — — —

7/16 112 M649 40016 40068 M349 40115 40114 — — —

1/2 113 M650 40020 40070 M350 40120 40119 M850 40183 40182

5/8 1141/2 M651 40023 40073 M351 40125 40124 M851 40186 40185

3/4 1161/2 M652 40027 40074 M352 40130 40129 M852 40189 40188

7/8 1181/2 M653 40031 40076 M353 40135 40134 M853 40192 40191

1 110 M654 40036 40077 M354 41950 40139 M854 40195 40194

11/8 112 M655 40039 40080 M355 40145 40144 M855 40198 40197

11/4 114 M656 40041 40082 M356 40150 40149 M856 40201 40200

13/8 117 M666 40044 40084 M366 40158 40157 M866 40204 40203

11/2 120 M657 40048 40087 M357 40164 40163 M857 40207 40206

15/8 124 M685 40052 40089 M385 40169 40168 M885 40210 40209

13/4 130 M677 40056 40091 M377 40175 40174 M877 40213 40212

2 135 M658 40060 40093 M358 40180 40179 M858 40216 40215

CM super strong anchor shackles

Screw pin type

• These shackles have higher workingload limits than specified by FederalSpecifications.

• All shackle pins are forged from alloysteel, heat treated and tempered togive greater strength.

• All shackles are marked with size (inches and millimeters) and working load limit in tons.

• Ultimate strength equals 6 times working load limit. Proof load equals 2.2 times working load limit.

• All bolt, nut & cotter shackles have thread protected ends.

• When ordering, specify galvanized (G)or painted (P).

• Galvanized per ASTM A153.

• Painted shackles are orange.

• Ton = 2,000 lbs. (3/16" – 2"), 2,200 lbs.(21/2" – 31/2").

• Standard industry tolerances apply.

• Built-in Distortion Detectors (3/16" – 2").

Dimensions (inches) apply to all styles of anchor shackles

Round pin type Bolt & nut type

Dia. Width Inside Outside Approx.of between Inside width dia. of weightpin eyes length at bow eye each

Size P W L B (min.) R (max.) (lbs.)

3/16 1/4 3/8 17/8 5/8 5/8 111.06

1/4 5/16 15/32 111/8 3/4 7/8 111.12

5/16 3/8 17/32 111/4 13/16 1 111.20

3/8 7/16 21/32 117/16 15/16 11/8 111.30

7/16 1/2 3/4 1111/16 11/16 11/4 111.50

1/2 5/8 13/16 117/8 13/16 13/8 111.75

5/8 3/4 11/16 123/8 11/2 17/8 111.3

3/4 7/8 11/4 1213/16 13/4 21/8 112.3

7/8 1 17/16 13 5/16 2 2 3/8 113.5

1 11/8 111/16 13 3/4 25/16 2 5/8 115.0

11/8 11/4 113/16 141/4 25/8 2 7/8 117.0

11/4 13/8 21/32 1411/16 27/8 31/4 119.5

13/8 11/2 21/4 151/4 31/4 31/2 112.5

11/2 15/8 2 3/8 15 3/4 3 3/8 3 3/4 117.2

15/8 13/4 25/8 16 1/4 4 41/8 123.5

13/4 2 27/8 17 41/2 41/2 127.7

2 21/4 31/4 17 3/4 51/4 51/4 139.0

245

246

Size WLL1

(TONS)Nominal

D W Tol. ± L Tol. ± B R P WT.2

(lbs)1/2” 5 5/8” 13/16” ± 1/16” 1 7/8” ± 1/8” 1 9/32” 1 7/16” 5/8” .75

5/8” 7 3/4” 1 1/16” ± 1/16” 2 1/2” ± 1/8” 1 3/4” 1 5/8” 3/4” 1.5

3/4” 9 7/8” 1 1/4” ± 1/16” 2 7/8” ± 1/4” 2” 1 27/32” 7/8” 2.2

7/8” 12 1” 1 7/16” ± 1/16” 3 5/16” ± 1/4” 2 9/32” 2 1/8” 1” 3.7

1” 16 1 1/8” 1 11/16” ± 1/16” 3 3/4” ± 1/4” 2 11/16” 2 1/4” 1 1/8” 5.5

1 1/8” 18 1 1/8” 1 13/16” ± 1/16” 4 1/4” ± 1/4” 2 15/16” 2 5/8” 1 1/4” 7.2

1 1/4” 21 1 1/4” 2 1/32” ± 1/16” 4 5/8” ± 1/4” 3 1/4” 3” 1 3/8” 10.5

1 3/8” 26 1 3/8” 2 1/4” ± 1/8” 5 1/4” ± 1/4” 3 5/8” 3 1/4” 1 1/2” 13.8

1 1/2” 31 1 1/2” 2 3/8” ± 1/8” 5 3/4” ± 1/4” 3 7/8” 3 7/16” 1 5/8” 18.5

1 5/8” 35 1 5/8” 2 5/8” ± 1/8” 6 1/4” ± 1/4” 4 5/8” 4” 1 3/4” 23

1 3/4” 41 1 3/4” 2 7/8” ± 1/8” 7” ± 1/4” 5” 4 1/4” 2” 29.5

2” 52 2” 3 1/4” ± 1/8” 7 3/4” ± 1/2” 5 3/4” 5” 2 1/4” 42

2 1/4” 67 2 1/4” 3 7/8” ± 1/8” 9 1/4” ± 1/2” 6 1/2” 5 1/2” 2 1/2” 60

2 1/2” 82 2 1/2” 4 1/8” ± 1/8” 10 1/2” ± 1/2” 7 1/4” 5 7/8” 2 3/4” 90

2 3/4” 104 2 3/4” 4 1/2” ± 1/8” 11 1/2” ± 3/4” 7 1/2” 6 1/4” 3” 115

3” 117 3” 5” ± 1/8” 13” ± 3/4” 7 7/8” 6 1/2” 3 1/4” 150

3 1/2” 150 3 1/2” 5 3/4” ± 1/4” 15” ± 3/4” 9 1/2” 8” 3 3/4” 250

4” 175 4” 6 1/2” ± 1/4” 17” ± 3/4” 11” 9” 4 1/4” 350

4 1/2” 210 4 1/2” 7 1/4” ± 1/4” 19” ± 1 1/8” 12 1/2” 9 3/4” 5” 475

No. 320Safety Pin Shackle

Available 1/2” - 4 1/2”

No. 263Screwpin Shackle

Available 1/2” - 3”

No. 264Screwpin Shackle

Hex Head Pinor Marine Hex Head

Available 1/2” - 3”

SKOOKUM®

Gold Standard®

Anchor Shackles

1 Design factor is 5 to 12 Weights vary slightly with style of shackle pin used.

247

LONG REACHSHACKLES

SELF COLORED ORP=PAINTED ORANGE

M7152 3/4 10,000 2.8 .88 4.56 2.75 M7152P 3/4 10,000 2.8 .88 4.56 2.75M7154 1 19,000 6.4 1.00 5.50 3.25M7154P 1 19,000 6.4 1.00 5.50 3.25M7157 1 1/2 34,000 19.6 1.63 7.00 4.50M7157P 1 1/2 34,000 19.6 1.63 7.00 4.50

Size WorkingProduct diameter load limit Wgt

Type code (in.) (lbs.) (lbs.) P L W

Long Reach ShackleINDUSTRIALPRODUCTS

A Division of Columbus McKinnon Corporation

Columbus McKinnon’s new Load Rated Long Reach Alloy Steel Shackles were developedfor those special situations when a standard shackle needs that little extra reach to get thejob done right.

Born out of customer demand, these highly versatile shackles will prove to be an indispen-sable addition to the rigger’s toolbox. The open design, extra long reach and generous loadbearing surfaces will accommodate many rigging hookups that a standard shackle cannotreach.As with all rigging gear, extreme care should be taken to center loads and observe theworking load limit of each component of your hookup.

SKOOKUM®

All Alloy No. 59ASheet Pile Shackles

Size Opening2 A B C D E F G H WeightWLL1

(Tons)

1” 1 3/4” 4 1/4” 2 1/4” 1” 1 1/8” 7” ± 1/4” 5/8” 2 3/8” 5” 8 lbs. 8

1 1/8” 1 7/8” 4 1/2” 2 1/2” 1” 1 1/4” 8” ± 1/2” 3/4” 3” 5” 13 lbs. 10

1 1/4” 2” 5 1/4” 2 3/4” 1 1/4” 1 3/8” 9” ± 1/2” 7/8” 3” 5” 18 lbs. 12

1 1/2” 2 1/8” 6 1/4” 3” 1 1/2” 1 5/8” 10” ± 1/2” 1 1/8” 3 1/2” 6” 28 lbs. 17

1 3/4” 2 1/2” 7” 3 1/2” 1 3/4” 2” 11” ± 1/2” 1 1/4” 4” 7” 47 lbs. 24

2” 3” 8” 4” 2” 2 1/4” 12” ± 3/4” 1 3/8” 4 1/2” 8” 63 lbs. 30

The No. 59A shackles were specificallydesigned for pulling sheet piling. They areequipped with an easy opening pin which willnot detach and become lost. No tools arerequired.

1 Design factor is 5 to 12 Max opening with pin in open (unlocked) position

249

HORIZONTAL LIFT: Clamps (used in pairs or multiples)are attached to the side edges of a plate or bundle of platespositioned horizontally to the floor level. The riggingattached to clamps is generally multi-legged slings with theconnecting point of the slings being approximately centeredbetween the distance separating the clamps. Refer to illus-trations shown below.

WARNING: The capacity of all horizontal clamps isbased on a sling angle of sixty degrees (60°). See illus-tration below. Sling angles less than sixty degrees (60°)increase the load exerted on the clamps. Sling anglesgreater than 60° reduce gripping force, Do not exceed60°.

STEEL PLATES: Unless otherwise specified, lifting clampsare manufactured to handle hot-rolled steel plates whoseBrinell Hardness does not exceed 300.

WARNING: Do not lift plates with coatings or mill scalethat prevent the gripping surfaces of the clamp frommaking positive contact with the base metal.

For applications not covered by the above information,secure written recommendations from RENFROE.

DEFINITIONS - FOR RENFROE CLAMPSVERTICAL LIFT: The lifting of a single plate or memberin which the lifting force exerted by the rigging is directlyabove and in line with the lifting shackle as shown in theillustration below.

VERTICAL TURN/LIFT: A vertical turn/lift clamp is a ver-tical lifting clamp specifically intended to turn a single plateor member thru a ninety degree (90°) arc and back to ver-tical thru the same ninety degree (90°) arc or from horizon-tal to vertical to horizontal thru a one hundred and eightydegree (180°) arc. Refer to Application Section of specif-ic Turn/Lift clamps for further detail.

During the turning operation the edge of the plate oppositethe edge to which the clamp is attached should always bein contact with a supporting surface such as a factory floorand the load on the clamp should not exceed one halfrated capacity of clamp — refer to illustrations shownbelow.

LIFTING FORCELIFTING SHACKLECLAMP

PLATE ORMEMBER

The Model JPA is a verticallifting clamp capable of turn-ing a single plate or memberfrom horizontal to verti-cal to horizontal througha 180 degree arc.Incorporates a pushbutton auxiliary lock.Permits side loading oflifting shackle to 90degrees by derating ofclamp’s rated capacity.Refer to Figure 1 forderated capacities.

Model JPA incorporates a pivoting shackle thatpermits side loading of the lifting shackle at 100percent of rated capacity from vertical to 30degrees, 75 percent of rated capacity between30 and 45 degrees and 50 percent of ratedcapacity between 45 and 90 degrees.

Model JPAVERTICAL LIFTING LOCKING

Rated PlateCapacity Thickness MAX. MAX. Weight

Tons A B C D E F G H J (in pounds)1/2 0-5/8 2 3/4 61/2 12 23/8 5 5/8 3 1/4 2 1/4 1/2 12

1/2-1 2 3/4 61/2 12 23/8 6 3 1/4 2 1/4 1/23/4-11/4 2 3/4 61/2 12 23/8 6 1/4 3 1/4 2 1/4 1/2

11/4-13/4 2 3/4 61/2 12 23/8 6 3/4 3 1/4 2 1/4 1/21 0-3/4 3 3/8 73/4 13 3/4 2 5/8 7 3 1/2 2 5/8 5/8 20

1/2-1 3 3/8 73/4 13 3/4 2 5/8 7 1/4 3 1/2 2 5/8 5/83/4-11/4 3 3/8 73/4 13 3/4 2 5/8 8 3 1/2 2 5/8 5/81-11/2 3 3/8 73/4 13 3/4 2 5/8 8 1/4 3 1/2 2 5/8 5/8

11/2-2 3 3/8 z73/4 13 3/4 2 5/8 8 3/4 3 1/2 2 5/8 5/82 0-1 3 5/8 91/2 173/8 3 1/2 8 3/4 41/2 3 3/4 40

3/4-11/2 3 5/8 91/2 173/8 3 1/2 9 1/4 41/2 3 3/411/4-2 3 5/8 91/2 173/8 3 1/2 9 3/4 41/2 3 3/4

2-23/4 3 5/8 91/2 173/8 3 1/2 101/2 41/2 3 3/44 3/16-11/4 43/8 111/2 201/8 3 1/2 9 1/4 41/2 3 1/4 11/2 50

1-2 43/8 111/2 201/8 3 1/2 10 41/2 3 1/4 11/22-3 43/8 111/2 201/8 3 1/2 11 41/2 3 1/4 11/23-4 43/8 111/2 201/8 3 1/2 12 41/2 3 1/4 11/2

6 1/4-13/8 47/8 123/8 20 7/8 3 1/2 10 3/4 43/4 3 3/4 11/2 721-21/8 47/8 123/8 20 7/8 3 1/2 111/2 43/4 3 3/4 11/22-31/8 47/8 123/8 20 7/8 3 1/2 121/2 43/4 3 3/4 11/23-41/8 47/8 123/8 20 7/8 3 1/2 131/2 43/4 3 3/4 11/2

8 3/8-11/2 5 3/8 12 3/4 22 5/8 33/4 12 3/8 51/4 41/4 2 931-21/8 5 3/8 12 3/4 22 5/8 33/4 13 51/4 41/4 22-31/8 5 3/8 12 3/4 22 5/8 33/4 14 5/8 51/4 41/4 23-41/8 5 3/8 12 3/4 22 5/8 33/4 15 5/8 51/4 41/4 2

Additional capacities available. Contact LAMCO.SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.

Figure 1

250

Model HR & HDRHORIZONTAL LIFTINGNON-LOCKING

The Model HR is a horizontal liftingclamp intended to be used in pairs,sets of pairs, or in a tripod arrange-ment for transporting steel plateshorizontal. The Model HDR is sim-ilar to the Model HR except that itcontains dual cam assemblieswhich provide two gripping sur-faces.

Equipped with serrated grippingcams as standard equipment, bothmodels are available with smooth,bronze or stainless steel grippingcams to prevent marring when han-dling polished metals such as stain-less steel, copper, aluminum, etc.

Rated JawCapacity Opening Weight

Tons A B C D E F G H J K (in pounds)1/4 0-1 23/4 1/2 + 1 39/16 41/16 3 3/8 1/2 31/21/2 0-2 41/4 1/2 + 13/8 55/8 61/8 7 3/4 1/2 143/4 0-2 43/8 5/8 + 13/8 55/8 61/4 7 3/4 3/4 1911/2 0-2 43/8 3/4 + 13/8 55/8 63/8 7 3/4 3/4 233 0-2 45/8 5/8 15/8 13/8 55/8 71/4 7 3/4 3/4 244 0-3 55/8 3/4 21/8 13/8 71/2 95/8 7 11/8 1 44

SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. + No backpad on 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 or 11/2 ton models.

Rated JawCapacity Opening Weight

Tons A B C D E F G H J K L (in pounds)11/2 0-2 43/8 5/8 + 31/4 55/8 61/4 12 15/16

3/4 5 443 0-2 43/8 3/4 + 31/4 55/8 63/8 12 15/16

3/4 5 486 0-2 45/8 5/8 15/8 31/4 55/8 71/4 12 15/16 15/8 5 538 0-3 55/8 3/4 21/8 31/4 71/2 95/8 121/4 15/16 15/8 51/4 84

SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. + No backpad on 11/2, or 3 ton models.

Model HR

Model HDR

Model SCP Model SCPAThe Model SCP and SCPA clampsare capable of handling steel platefrom the horizontal through a 180degree arc and may be used forhandling plate at rolling and form-ing machines. These clamps fea-ture a spring loaded pivoting camjaw that "cams in" when a load isapplied to the lifting shackle.Clamp is capable of handling platehorizontally when used in pairs orsets of pairs, or in a tripodarrangement.

Model SCP & SCPALOCKING, SCREW TYPE

Rated PlateCapacity Thickness

Tons A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R

1/2 0- 3/4 23/8 41/2 9 23/8 6 5/8 23/8 17/8 1/2 11/2 — 13/4 13/4 9/16 123/16

11/2 0-11/4 27/8 51/2 10 9/16 2 5/8 8 7/16 33/8 23/8 5/8 13/4 81/4 2 2 11/16 143/16

3 0-2 31/8 53/4 12 2 3/8 1013/16 41/16 213/163/4 2 85/8 3 6 3/4 213/8

6 0-21/2 45/16 79/16 143/8 3 143/8 53/8 37/16 1 215/16 — 3 1/2 7 1 273/410 0-3 51/2 93/4 191/4 31/4 163/8 63/4 43/8 1 31/8 — 3 1/2 7 1 297/16

15 0-4 71/4 121/8 227/8 33/4 211/2 81/4 59/16 11/4 4 — 3 7/8 8 11/4 361/220, 30, 50, 100 and 150 Ton capacities available upon request.SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.

251

ted

Text Box

252

ted

Text Box

253

254

Models AVL and VLLocking Clamp

Horizontal to Vertical - 180°1/2 through 12 Ton Rated Lift Capacities

Features:

* Universal Shackle- Allows for side loading of lifting shackle up to 90°.- The rated lift capacity is lowered as the

angle of the pull increases (see figure 1).* Horizontal to Vertical Lift

- Capable of turning a single steel platefrom horizontal to vertical to horizontalthrough a 180° arc.

* Lock Open and Close- Lock open to facilitate loading and unloading

clamp.- Lock close onto material for a more secure lift.

* Remote Release Locking Mechanism- Enables user to open the clamp from a distance

when the load is at rest and secured.- Also available: Remote Locking Mechanism

that also allows the user to lock the clampclosed onto the material.

Figure 1The Universal Shackle permits side loading ofthe lifting shackle at 100 percent of ratedcapacity from vertical to 30 degrees, 75 percentof rated capacity between 30 and 45 degrees,and 50 percent of rated capacity between 45and 90 degrees.

* Rated for 420 Brinell Surface Hardness- Grippers are rated to lift material with a surface

hardness up to 420 Brinell.- 2 through 12 ton lift capacities have dual gripping

cams and a self-aligning gripping pad.- Also available with stainless grippers.

* Working Parts Enclosed- Protects parts for longer use.

* Also Available with an Auxiliary Lock and/orStainless Grippers

Larger sizes upto 12 ton areavailable on

request

255

MerrillPartNo. Cat. No.

UPC No.020418

WorkingLoad Limit Handle

Lengthin.

Grip Range

Dimensions

WeightC J O

lb kg in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm lb kg3 6421801 096693 500 227 2 0-5/16 0-8 6 152 1 7/8 48 3 3/4 95 2 1

3 6421802 096709 500 227 Eye nut 0-5/16 0-8 8 203 1 7/8 48 3 3/4 95 2 1

3 6421803 096716 500 227 6 0-5/16 0-8 12 305 1 7/8 48 3 3/4 95 3 1

3 6421805 096723 500 227 10 0-5/16 0-8 16 406 1 7/8 48 3 3/4 95 3 1

3 6421806 096730 500 227 18 0-5/16 0-8 23 584 1 7/8 48 3 3/4 95 4 2

• Designed to carry or pull any object that will fit into its jaws• Grips and releases automatically

Campbell®

Duplex Hand Grip

Replacement Parts for Duplex Hand Grip

A B C D E

256

Universal SUPERCLAMP

• Can be fully loaded at any angle, i.e. 90° in 360° rotation• Designed for side load applied at full rated capacity• Low headroom anchor point• Single or twin lifting point• Light weight one piece adjustable design• Positive Grip on beam flange and web• Used for lifting, pulling or as an anchor point• Approved for Personnel tie-off use

Permanently Fixed Adjustable Girder Clamps

• Designed for light industrial applications • Positive Grip on flange• Lightweight one piece adjustable design • For use at 0° from vertical• Ideal for permanent overhead anchor point above machinery or equipment

Fixed Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps

• One piece adjustable design • Used for lifting, pulling or as an anchor point• No tools required for mounting/removal • Integrated lifting shackle• Positive Grip left/right threaded adjusting bar • Designed with maximum safe jaw grip adjustment• For use at up to 15° from vertical • Approved for Personnel tie-off use

257

Swivel Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps• One piece adjustable design • Used for lifting, pulling as an anchor point• Added benefit of horizontal jaw adjustment • Integrated lifting shackle• Full length/width of swivel jaw anchors on flange • Positive Grip left/right threaded adjusting bar• For use at up to 15° from vertical • Approved for Personnel tie-off use

Fixed Jaw Adjustable Girder Dog• One piece adjustable design • Used for lifting, pulling as an anchor point• Enhanced by balanced distribution of side plates • Maximum grip & hold and safety• Positive Grip left/right threaded adjusting bar • No tools required• For use at up to 15° from vertical • Approved for Personnel tie-off use

Geared Runway Beam Trolleys with Anti-Drop Plates• One piece adjustable design • Hand geared for easy movement of heavy loads• Ball bearing wheel movement • Integrated lifting shackle• Adapts to beam width by turning left/right • Includes locking collar and wheel guard anti-drop

hand threaded adjusting screw plates for maximum safety• Ideal for temporary and permanent installations • Approval for personnel tie-off use

requiring speedy installation and use

Adjustable Runway Beam Trolleys with Anti-Drop Plates• Lightweight hand push, easy to use ball bearing wheels • Developed for lighter industrial applications• Adapts to beam width by turning left and right hand adjusting bar • Fitted with width adjustment locking mechanism• Wheel guarding anti-drop plates • No additional width adjusting tools required• Positive Grip Clamps • Approval for personnel tie-off use

259

VESTIL MANUFACTURING CORPORATION

MODELNUMBER

OVERALL DIMENSIONS(W x D x H)

BASE PLATE(W x L)

CAPACITY(POUNDS)

NET WT.(LBS.)

ML-2ML-6ML-12

21/2” x 5” x61/2”31/2” x 8” x 7”

43/4” x 11” x 103/4”

21/2” x 33/4”31/2” x 61/2”43/4” x 83/4”

2006001200

62253

Magnetic LiftersPick up sheets of material by use of overhead crane or chain with thepermanent Magnetic Lifer. Magnet is activated or deactivated by simplerotating the lever. Units are lightweight, so transporting from work area towork area is convenient.

Magnetic Trigger Lift

Rapid Fire Retriever

Power GripHand held lift grips parts withan easy to use trigger release.• Aluminum housing• One handed operation• Permanent magnet• Move parts faster & easier• Retrieve hot parts from

Burn Tables• 300°F (148°C)

Versatile, swivel-head design allows various pickup positions on the part,and the long handle enables the operator to safely grab pieces thatwould normally be out of arms reach. While lift capacity will varydepending on the size and thickness of parts, the magnetic Rapid-Fireretriever is capable of handling up to 35 Lbs. and exceeds the lift capac-ity of most suction cups.Air Connection: 3/8” NPT Universal male quick couplerAir requirements: 25 psi min. to 60 psi max.

• Retrieve hot parts off burn tables with speed & precision!• Increases production while reducing the potential for injury• Powerful Rare Earth magnet hold parts securely• “On-Command” release with just a quick blast of shop air• Actuate release with just one finger, it’s as simple as the pull of a

trigger

• Effective holding against shear force• Securely grips heavy parts• High heat epoxy encapsulated• Aluminum insulator

HoldingValue

PartNumber Length Width Height Weight

50 LBS. B090 3-3/8 2-3/8 4-13/16 1.5 Lbs

HoldingValue Part Number Width Length Height

No. ofPoles

22.5 Lbs.45.0 Lbs.55.0 Lbs.

AC2100WLHAC2200WLHAC2201WLH

11

1-1/4

4-1/24-1/24-1/2

2-7/82-7/82-7/8

233

HoldingValue Part Number Length Width

353535

RFR2400RFR3600RFR4800

243648

31216

Note: Customer supplied air hose and properline pressure are required for correct operation

260

The MaxX arealso available in the VSVersion, that iscomplete with a verticalloading device.Recommended liftingcapacity reduced by 30%compared to standarddeclared values.

The most practical, safe andeconomical way to lift ferrous loads

MaxX lifters are a real revolution in magnetic handling of ferrous loads.

Absolute compact dimensions and low weight, great power andtotal work safety are the quali-ties which make MaxX the ideal

solution for small and large factories in the industry, with near zero operat-ing costs and quick return on investment.

A range of 5 models is available with lifting capacity from 250 kg (550 Ibs)to 2000 kg (4450 Ibs). Easy to use and manage, they give huge advantagesthrough increased efficiency and productivity in a great number of applica-tions even with limited handling space and short range hoisting or liftingequipment.

Ideal for handling workpieces in machine tools and oxygen cuttingoperation, for plates, sheet and iron blocks in steel structural works

and shipyards building, insteel industries and distri-bution centers, for changingtooling in production and ingeneral for all the require-ments of the modern mechanical workshops.

ModelWeight

lbs A B C D E F GMaxX 250 13 7.5 7.3 3.2 3.1 2.5 1.7 1.4

MaxX 500 33 9.8 9.3 4.2 4 3.5 2.4 2

MaxX 1000 75 13.5 12.5 5.3 5.2 3.5 2.4 2

MaxX 1500 145 15.1 18 6.6 6.7 4.8 3.4 2.5

MaxX 2000 176 18 18 6.6 6.7 4.8 3.4 2.5

Dimensions In

Technical Characteristics

Type of load ModelLoad max

lbsThickness

min. InLengthmax In

Diametermax In

Plate

Round

MaxX 250 550 0.79 59 -MaxX 500 1100 0.98 79 -MaxX 1000 2200 1.57 118 -MaxX 1500 3300 1.77 118 -MaxX 2000 4400 2.17 118 -

MaxX 250 220 0.39 59 11.9MaxX 500 440 0.59 79 15.8MaxX 1000 880 0.98 118 17.7MaxX 1500 1320 1.18 118 19.7MaxX 2000 1760 1.38 118 23.6

Load Characteristics

MaxX/VS

Vertical System

261

The non-marringroller cam will easilyrelease parts. Thisensures that yourvaluable materialswill be scrape anddrag free.

Creative Lift Magnets

Sheet Handlers

For non-flexing steel items!Permanent lift magnets are ideal for handling steel plates,die castings, forgings, etc. They eliminate the need forclamping devices, slings or chains. One person can per-form operations previously calling for two or more people.• Non-Marring Roller Cam Release• Less torque required to release part• Lift capacity clearly stated on magnet• No electrical power required for operation• Durable stainless steel casing

HoldingValue

PartNumber Name A B C D E F Weight

400 Lbs.1000 Lbs.1500 Lbs.1250 Lbs.3000 Lbs.

5C13825C13835C13845C13855C1386

Mighty MiteJuniorTuffy

Long JohnBig Daddy

9-7/812-5/814-7/1619-5/819-5/8

3-1/257

3-1/210

9-1/49-1/4

202020

3-3/163-3/163-3/163-3/163-3/16

68-11/1610-1/215-3/415-3/4

2-1/42-1/42-1/42-1/42-3/4

12 Lbs.28 Lbs.42 Lbs.49 Lbs.

105 Lbs.

Note: Never stand under load beinglifted. Always use extra caution.Only use magnetic lifts on materialthat does not flex or bend. The sur-face of the lift and the load need tobe clean & free of chips, oil, slag,dirt, etc. Lifts must be centered onthe load. Not recommended forpainted or finish coated surfaces

Patented ReleaseU.S. Patent 6,471,273 B1

C

F

AE

1-5/16I.D.

D

B

StatedValue

PartNumber

Holding Value & Max. Sheet Size for Specified Material Thickness

3/16” 1/4” 3/8” 1/2” 3/4” 1”400 Lbs.1000 Lbs.1500 Lbs.1250 Lbs.3000 Lbs.

5C13825C13835C13845C13855C1386

400 Lbs. [4’x6’]600 Lbs. [4’x6’]800 Lbs. [4’x6’]650 Lbs. [4’x6’]800 Lbs. [4’x6’]

400 Lbs. [4’x8’]900 Lbs. [4’x8’]

1000 Lbs. [4’x8’]1000 Lbs. [4’x8’]1100 Lbs. [4’x8’]

400 Lbs. *[4’x6’]1000 Lbs. [4’x8’]1500 Lbs. [4’x8’]1250 Lbs. [4’x8’]1800 Lbs. [4’x8’]

400 Lbs. *[4’x4’]1000 Lbs. [4’x8’]1500 Lbs. [4’x8’]1250 Lbs. [4’x8’]2700 Lbs. [4’x8’]

400 Lbs. *[4’x3’]1000 Lbs. *[4’x8’]1500 Lbs. [4’x8’]1250 Lbs. [4’x8’]3000 Lbs. [4’x8’]

400 Lbs. *[3’x3’]1000 Lbs. *[4’x6’]1500 Lbs. *[4’x6’]1250 Lbs. *[4’x8’]3000 Lbs. [5’x10’]

• Available in magnetic and vacuum models for all of your sheet metal handling applications

• Lift or move sheets, plates, hot or oily parts• Handle sheets stacked horizontally or vertically• Protect workers from cuts, slivers, nicks & burns• Increase production time• No electricity required

Lift by hand

Vacuum StyleLift with hook

HoldingValue

PartNumber Style Width Length/Dia. Height Weight

125 Lbs.200 Lbs.330 Lbs.

B250B400

BV330

MagneticMagneticVacuum

5-1/45-1/2NA

668

1-1/81-7/161-3/4

6.75 Lbs.6.75 Lbs.8.00 Lbs.

* These maximum sheet sizes are recommended due to the weight of the specified sheet. All other maximum sheet sizes are selected due tothe sag characteristics of the specified sheet. NOTE: When lifting sheets over 4’ x 8’, use two or more lifts on a spreader bar to prevent sheetflexing, sagging or peel-off. Material less than 3/8” thick is susceptible to magnetic bleed through, resulting in two sheets being lifted at once.

Magnetic Sheet Handler Operation

Pull PartLiftPart

Release Part

262

CM ToterMagnets

Permanent Lift Magnets for Flat MaterialHandling

The TOTER is a compact, self-contained, lifting magnet which usespermanent magnets that maintain holding power indefinitely. Withinthe steel housing are powerful ceramic magnets whose field is con-trolled by the "on-off" position of the handle. Because no electricpower is required, TOTERS can operate completely free of therestriction of power cords, and can be used where electric power isnot readily available.

Standard Features• High strength steel bail• Operating mechanism moves on bearings for ease of

operation• Specially shaped pole shoes ensure the full magnetic

field is directed into work piece• Operating handle plunger must be fully depressed to

prevent accidental operation• Handle locks in "On or Off" positions to prevent uninten-

tional operation• Meets all the requirements of ANSI/ASME B30.20

(safety standard)• Supplied with manual, pull test certificate, video, and

safety poster.

Recommended ApplicationsPermanent lifting magnets require good surface conditions to achieve maximum lifting. The TOTER is ideally suit-ed for in-plant handling, loading, and unloading machine tools, and is commonly found in industrial plants, machineshops and warehouses. When greater holding capacity is required, refer to our battery magnets or our circularelectric magnets.

263

WBM MagnetLocal & Cordless Remote Controlled Battery

Powered Lift Magnets for Flat Material Handling

These Walker Lift Magnets are compact, mobile, self-contained batterypowered units. Operating on their own power sources, they are free ofrestricting cords and wires and have the further advantage of being usablein areas where electric power is not available. The WBM-13 is a new,compact model for general utility lifting. The WBM-36 has a special shoedesign for plate lifting, but it has almost universal capability. WBM-13,WBM-25 and WBM-36 are all single units. The WBM-50 is two magnetson an adjustable spreader beam operated from a single battery pack.

Standard Features• Pocket for IR Remote Transmitter*• Removable cover allows inspection of battery.• Temperature compensated: built-in automatic cut-off charg-

er prevents over-charging of battery.• For safety, magnet can not be turned "ON" if battery charge

is too low.• Interlock prevents magnet de-energization when suspended

in air.• Audible Warning Alarm and flashing light indicate low battery• Lighted display indicates battery charge level.• 110V AC cord and plug for built-in battery charger• Uses "Deep Discharge" type low maintenance Gel Cell

Battery.• Meets all the requirements of ANSI/ASME B30.20 (safety

standard).• Supplied with manual, pull test certificate, video, and safety

poster.

WBM-13Rated Lift Capacity

0-3,000 lbs.

WBM-25Rated Lift Capacity

0-5,500 lbs.

*One IR Remote Transmitter Supplied with each WBM - WBP Magnet.

264

THE BROAD RANGE OF TECNO-LIFT PERMANENT-ELECTRO MAGNETIC SYSTEMSALLOWS HANDLING ANY TYPE OF FERROUS LOAD

CVModules for handling cold-rolled coils, vertical eye.

BRModules for handling slabs, even on harbor cranes.

TUModules for handling layers of seamless pipe.

ROModules for handling layers of rails.

BLModules for handlinglayers of billets up to450° C.

Bat GripBat Grip Permanentelectric battery lifters forloads up to 3000 kg.

COModules for handling open coils, vertical eye.

CHModules for handling cold-rolled coils, horizontal eye.

RDModules for handling rounds.

EM Electromagnetic modules for handling bundles.

Contact LAMCO for ordering details309-764-7400800-447-1885

265

SSMMHHFor handling single thick slabs and forgedblocks.SMH permanent electro-magnetic modulesare designed for hoisting loads with bigoperational air gaps.

SINGLE MODULES

SSMMLLFor handling single plates or semifinishedblocks.SML permanent electro-magnetic modulesare the ideal answer for handling where oper-ational air gaps are small.

BEAM AND SECTION UNITS

TTPPFor handling merchant beams andsections.Their specially shaped profile allowsoverturning of beams on the ground.

TILTING BEAMS

TTBBFor handling single plates up to 12 meters long.Fixed beams with tilting modules provide vertical plate handling.This joins the intrinsic safety of permanent electromagnet sys-tems to compactness and great warehouse space saving.

FIX BEAMS FOR CUTTING SYSTEMS

TTTTFor handling single plates and skeleton cutting.They allow easy and fast loading & unloading operations on any type of cut-ting machines.

266

Mechanical & PoweredVacuum Lifters

Eight Pad Self-PoweredMechanical Vacuum Lifter

Vacuum tube systemfor roll handling

Vacuum Lifters for CoilHandling and Roll

Handling

Vacuum Lifters for CoilHandling and Roll

Handling

Self-Powered Mechanical VacuumLifter with Four Adjustable In-Line

Vacuum Pads

Six Pad Self-PoweredMechanical Vacuum Lifter

Suction Hand Cup withPlastic Body

Vacuum Tube Lifting System withTwo Pad Box Lifting Attachment

Contact LAMCO for a quote on an Anvervacuum system to fit your

specific needs.

309-764-7400 or 800-447-1885

267

Air & Electric PoweredMultiple Pad Vacuum Lifters

Four Pad Electric PoweredVacuum Lifter with Powered Tilt Standard Heavy-Duty

Powered Vacuum Lifters

Four Pad Air PoweredVertical Lifter

Two Pad Compressed AirPowered Vacuum Lifter and

Tilter with ANVER AL1001 MiniVacuum Station

Eight Pad Electric PoweredVacuum Lifter with Powered Tilt

Two Pad Air Powered AirBalancer Vacuum Lifter with

Powered Tilter

Contact LAMCO for a quote on an Anvervacuum system to fit your specific needs.

309-764-7400 or 800-447-1885

Mechanical & PoweredVacuum Lifters

Vacuum Lifters forBag Lifting

Vacuum Lifters forBag and Roll Lifting

268

VacuumSystemComponentsFor All Applications and Industries

ANVER offersyou a full range ofvacuum compo-nents, fromminiature vacuumsuction cups, airand electric pow-ered vacuumpumps and vacu-um generators, tocomplete vacuumstations and sys-tems.

Since oure s ta b l i s h -

270

Standard Vest Style Harness1102000

• Delta No-Tangle™ design foradded comfort and easy donning

• Back D-ring• Adjustable non-slip chest strap

with easy to use pass-thru buckle• Parachute buckles on lower

shoulder straps for quick andeasy adjustment

• Tongue buckle leg straps for fast& easy donning

• Polyester webbing constructionfor added durability

• Coated hardware for corrosionresistance

• Universal sized

ShockWave2™ Shock Absorbing Lanyard1224306

• Expands to 6 ft. and contractsto 4-1/2 ft. in reaction to yourmovements

• Reduces trip fall hazards, drag-ging and snagging for completefreedom of movement

• Easy to use self locking snaphooks at both ends

• Abrasion resistant tubular web-bing for durability and longevity

• Impact indicator allows user tovisually inspect unit for a fall

• 6 ft. in length• Limits arresting forces to 900 lbs. or less

ShockWave2™ Shock Absorbing Lanyard1224406

• Expands to 6 ft. and contracts to4-1/2 ft. in reaction to yourmovements

• Reduces trip fall hazards, drag-ging and snagging for completefreedom of movement

• Twin-leg 100% tie-off style helpsyou remain connected at alltimes

• Easy to use self locking snaphooks at center and at the leg ends

• Abrasion resistant tubular webbing for durabilityand longevity

• Impact indicator allows user to visually inspect unitfor a fall

• 6 ft. in length• Limits arresting forces to 900 lbs. or less

Standard Vest Style Harness1103321

• Delta No-Tangle™ design foradded comfort and easy donning

• Back D-ring• Adjustable non-slip chest strap

with easy to use pass-thru buckle• Parachute buckles on lower

shoulder straps for quick andeasy adjustment

• Pass-thru buckle leg straps forfast & easy donning

• Polyester webbing constructionfor added durability

• Coated hardware for corrosionresistance

• Universal sized

DBI/SALA & Protecta is the world's leading manufacturersolely dedicated to providing innovative solutions in fall protection andindustrial rescue systems. We offer two brands delivering thesesolutions:

• DBI/SALA: Ultimate in fall protection for any work environment • PROTECTA: Fundamental fall protection at exceptional value

These two product lines offer:• Anchorage Connectors • Confined Space Equipment • Full Body Harness • Horizontal Systems• Positioning Devices • Rescue and Descent Systems • Rope Grabs & Lifelines • Self-Retracting Lifelines• Shock Absorbing Lanyards • Vertical Systems

In addition, DBI/SALA offers:• Compliance in a can • Compliance in a Can Light • Equipment Bags • Skyseat Working Chair

Protecta also offers:• Body Belts • Load Arrestors

All above items meet or exceed all applicable industry standardsincluding OSHA, ANSI and the stringent ANSI Z359

271

Fixed Beam Anchor2108406

• Anchor is easilyinstalled by slidingthe adjustablehook-end sown tothe flange andsecuring a pin

• Easily adjust to exactly where you want it in any ori-entation or direction

• Fits 1-1/2" thick flange, 2-1/2" to 12" wide• 5,000 lbs. minimum strength in any direction

Tie-Off Adaptor1003000

• Pass-through design makesattaching to anchorage quick andeasy

• 1-3/4" polyester strength member(5,000 lb. Min. tensile strength)

• 3" wide polyester wear pad foradded abrasion resistance andproduct longevity

• 3 ft. in length, other lengths avail-able

• Coated steel hardware for corrosion resistanceand strength

Sayfline Horizontal LifelineSystem7600502

• Sayfline™ system is acomplete kit coming in itsown carrying bag that iseasily installed with nospecial tools or equipment

• System is lightweight (12lbs.) and extremelyportable allowing you tomove it and reuse it overand over again

• Complete with kernmantle rope lifeline assemblywith a tensioning device for ease-of-use

• Two tie-off adaptors are included to anchor thesystem to a structure

• System length = 20 ft. (30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90and 100 ft. systems are also available)

AD111A Rebel®

AD111A• The industry’s lightest and

most compact 11 foot SRL• Lightweight and compact

aluminum housing construc-tion weighing only 2.8 lbs.

• Best lifeline length-to-weightratio in the industry

• Unique super strength thinwebbing for total securityand added length in a com-pact SRL

• Unique speed sensingbrake reduces clearancerequirements and limits fall arrest forces to 900lbs. or less

• Designed for smooth consistent operation• AJ565A snap hook on lifeline, AJ514A carabiner

on housing• Two year warranty, no recertification necessary

Ultra-Lok® Self Retracting Lifeline - 20ft. web3103208

• Stainless steel working componentsfor corrosion resistance

• 20 ft. one-inch nylon web lifeline forreduced weight

• Reserve lifeline retention system foradded safety

• Self-locking swivel snap hook withimpact indicator

• Swiveling anchorage loop to preventtwisting of lifeline

Ultra-Lok® Self Retracting Lifeline3504430

• Stainless steel working componentsfor corrosion resistance

• 30 ft. 3/16" galvanized steel wire ropefor durability

• Reserve lifeline retention system foradded safety

• Self-locking swivel snap hook withimpact indicator

• Swiveling anchorage loop to preventtwisting of lifeline

All above items meet or exceed all applicable industry standardsincluding OSHA, ANSI and the stringent ANSI Z359

272

RECTANGULARMODELS

Dimensions Max. RatedLoad Capacity

lbs.

Test Weightlbs.

Basket Weightlbs.W L H

BM1-300BM2-600BM3-900BM4-1200

28”36”36”36”

38”60”84”108”

42”42”42”42”

3006009001200

37575011251500

385560690860

SQUARE MODELSDimensions Max. Rated

Load Capacitylbs.

Test Weightlbs.

Basket Weightlbs.W L H

SM1-300SM2-600SM3-900SM4-1200

28”38”48”58”

28”38”48”58”

42”42”42”42”

3006009001200

37575011251500

315440560675

ROUND MODELS DimensionsDiameter

Max. RatedLoad Capacity

lbs.

Test Weightlbs.

Basket Weightlbs.

RM1-300ARM2-600RM3-900RM4-1200

19”, 21”, 26”, 32”38”48”60”

3006009001200

37575011251500

355395510600

MANBASKETS

42” High Guardrail

Inner Grab Rail

Steel PipeConstruction

Mid-Rail

Toeboard

Master Link

Wire Rope WithProtective Cover

Cable Run Pipe

Perforated Steel Enclosure

Patented Detachable TestWeight with Pins

(US Patent No. 4,884,454)

Data Plate

All dimensions are outside dimensions.Rated load capacity of all models may be increased.Access gates are available on most models.Overhead protection is available on all models.LTI welcomes inquiries for custom-designed platforms of almost any size or shape.

273

QQUUIICCKK CCLLAAWW

STANDARD MODEL NO.Platform

Dimensions Load Capacitylbs.

Platform Weightlbs.

RecommendedMinimum Truck

Capacity lbs.W L H OHFL1-400GFL2-700GFL2-800GFL3-1200GFL4-1600G

40”60”48”84”108”

36”36”48”36”48”

42”42”42”42”42”

72”72”72”72”72”

40070080012001600

5606256557001045

20003000400050006000

FORKLIFT WORK PLATFORMS®

U.S. PATENT NO. 5,433,493

FEATURING THE

S A F E T Y S Y S T E M

QUICK CLAW SAFETY SYSTEMAll LTI platforms feature our unique patented Quick Claw safetysystem which automatically attaches itself securely to the forks ofthe truck when lifted, then releases itself when returned to thefloor -- all without driver dismount. This system eliminates haz-ardous slippage, saves time, and complies with OSHA ProposedRule 29 CFR Part 1910.31, Subpart D.

STRONG AND LONG-LASTINGOur 5x design factor ensures that every LTI platform will support its ownweight plus five times its maximum load. Standard Model platforms arebuilt of .125” wall, 1.500” square tubular steel, plus perforated steel mast-guard and enclosures, to enable them to hold up under many years ofindustrial maintenance punishment. A 4-mil thick electrostatic powder coatfinish adds long-life durability.

FULL OSHA COMPLIANCELTI platforms meet or exceed all OSHA rules for mastguard protection,guardrail, inner grab rail, personal fall arrest system anchorage, and enclo-sures.

FOLD DOWN WORK PLATFORM • Model WP-3737-FD

• Platform Size: 37”W x 37”D• Folded Height: 11-9/16”• Capacity: 1,000 lbs.• 36”H Handrail, 22”H Mid-rail and 4”H Kickplate• 60” High Extended Metal Back• Fork Pocket: 7-3/4”W x 3-

7/8”H on 26” centers• Fork Truck Tine Lock• Tri-Lingual Safety

Instruction Sign

The Fold Down Work Platform, model WP-3737-FD, folds easily out of the wayby one person for storage when not in use. Unit stores conveniently in the 4”deep bottom base.

“G” denotes access gate option

274

LMX-10M-360

LMX-10M-324

DescriptionLength 27’

Web Width 2”

30’

2”

LMX-15M-324

LMX-15M-360

27’

3”

30’

3”

27’

4”

30’

4”

LMX-16M-360

LMX-16M-324

2” Winch Strap 2054 Webbing1015 Flat Hook



WorkingLoad Limit

BreakingStrength

3,335 lbs.1515 kgs.

10,000 lbs.4540 kgs.

4,300 lbs.1950 kgs.

13,000 lbs.5096 kgs.

5,400 lbs.2455 kgs.

16,200 lbs.7365 kgs.

LMX-10SD-18-360

LMX-10MSD-18-324

2” Ratchet Strap 803 Long Wide Handle2004 Webbing1015 Flat Hook

3,335 lbs.1515 kgs.

10,000 lbs.4540 kgs.

LMX-10MXD-24-324

LMX-10MXD-24-360

2” Ratchet Strap 804 Wide Handle2004 Webbing3705-2 Chain Anchor

3,335 lbs.1515 kgs.

10,000 lbs.4540 kgs.

2” Long Wide Handle Code: 35Breaking Strength: 11,000 lbs./4990 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,670 lbs./1665 kgs.Weight: 2.44 lbs./1.11 kgs.

803

2” Standard Handle Code: 29Breaking Strength: 11,000 lbs./4990 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,670 lbs./1665 kgs.Weight: 2.34 lbs./1.06 kgs.

802


The items below and on the following two pages areavailable as options on cargo restraint straps:

Winch Strap & Ratchet Strap Tie Down Assemblies

Winch strap and ratchet strap tie down assemblies are designed to handle most types of flatbed tie downrequirements. Assemblies are available in 1” - 4” webbing widths with breaking strengths ranging from500 - 15,000 lbs. Working Load Limits range from 165 - 5,000 lbs.

All standard 2” x 27’ assemblies have an 18” fixed end and are equipped with flat hooks on each end.Standard lengths are 27’ and 30’ but straps can be made to any length required. Special end fittings areavailable as well to fit almost every need.

RepairsTie down hardware, if not damaged, can be used to build a new assembly after the webbing is worn out.

275

1” Cam Buckle, One-Piece Frame Code: 21Breaking Strength: 1,200 lbs./545 kgs. Working Load Limit: 400 lbs./185 kgs.Weight: 0.27 lbs./0.12 kgs. Webbing: 1000

605

2” Cam Buckle, One-Piece Frame Code: 81Breaking Strength: 2,500 lbs./1135 kgs. Working Load Limit: 835 lbs./380 kgs.Weight: 0.58 lbs./0.26 kgs. Webbing: 4900

910

2” Cam Buckle Code: 19Breaking Strength: 2,500 lbs./1135 kgs. Working Load Limit: 835 lbs./380 kgs.Weight: 0.69 lbs./0.31 kgs. Webbing: 4900

43010 1015

2” Flat Hook Code: 20Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4540 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1515 kgs.Weight: 0.68 lbs./0.31 kgs.

2” Flat Hook Code: 23Breaking Strength: 12,000 lbs./5445 kgs. Working Load Limit: 4,000 lbs./1815 kgs.Weight: 0.86 lbs./0.39 kgs.

FE7915-1

4” Flat Hook with Abrasion Clip Code: 21Breaking Strength: 16,200 lbs./7350 kgs. Working Load Limit: 5,400 lbs./2450 kgs.Weight: 1.06 lbs./0.48 kgs.

1021

2” Snap Hook Code: 63Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4540 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1515 kgs.Weight: 0.69 lbs./0.31 kgs.

1209


FE7900-1

2” Wide Handle Code: 30Breaking Strength: 11,000 lbs./4990 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,670 lbs./1665 kgs.Weight: 2.41 lbs./1.10 kgs.

804

1” Cam Buckle Code: 26Breaking Strength: 700 lbs./320 kgs. Working Load Limit: 235 lbs./110 kgs.Weight: 0.13 lbs./0.06 kgs. Webbing: FE129 or 1010

608

276


FE8028-1

2” Twisted Snap Hook Code: 64Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4540 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1515 kgs.Weight: 0.70 lbs./0.32 kgs.

1212

1” Vinyl Coated S Hook Code: 87Breaking Strength: 1,200 lbs./545 kgs. Working Load Limit: 400 lbs./185 kgs.Weight: 0.31 lbs./0.14 kgs.

1101 - Vinyl Coated

1” Narrow Hook Code: 81Breaking Strength: 2,500 lbs./1135 kgs. Working Load Limit: 835 lbs./380 kgs.Weight: 0.12 lbs./0.05 kgs.

1003

2” Narrow Hook Code: 84Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4540 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1515 kgs.Weight: 0.58 lbs./0.26 kgs.

1006

18“ Chain Anchor Code: 39Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4540 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1515 kgs.Weight: 2.67 lbs./1.21 kgs.

3705-2

Use with 5/16� and 3/8� chain.

1” D-Ring Code: 45Breaking Strength: 5,000 lbs./2270 kgs. Working Load Limit: 1,670 lbs./757 kgs.Weight: 0.08 lbs./0.04 kgs.

1703

2” Flat Delta Ring Code: 42Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4540 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1515 kgs.Weight: 0.29 lbs./0.13 kgs.

1023

Contact LAMCO for all your custom winch strap & ratchet strap

tie down needs.

Local: 309-764-7400Toll Free: 800-447-1885

277

CARBON—WELDED CHAIN

Eye grab hook

Grade 43 Grade 70

Working WorkingSize Product UPC load limit Product UPC load limit(in.) code 43927- (lbs.)* code 43927- (lbs.)*

5/16 x 14 638228** 38228 3,900 638259** 33301 4,700

5/16 x 16 638229** 33855 3,900 638264** 33303 4,700

5/16 x 18 638230** 33856 3,900 — — —

5/16 x 20 638231** 27117 3,900 638224 33300 4,700

5/16 x 25 — — — 638306** 33314 4,700

3/8 x 12 638227 33857 5,400 — — —

3/8 x 14 638239 27448 5,400 — — —

3/8 x 16 638240 27449 5,400 — — —

3/8 x 18 638242 27451 5,400 — — —

3/8 x 20 638241 27450 5,400 — — —

3/8 x 25 638232 33858 5,400 — — —

Sizes not coded can be furnished upon request.**Standard packaging 1 per bag. Others bulk.All can be furnished bulk or bagged upon request.

Clevis grab hook

Grade 43 Grade 70

Working WorkingSize Product UPC load limit Product UPC load limit(in.) code 43927- (lbs.)* code 43927- (lbs.)*

5/16 x 14 — — — 638281 33309 4,700

5/16 x 16 — — — 638282 33310 4,700

5/16 x 18 — — — 638283 33311 4,700

5/16 x 20 — — — 638284 33312 4,700

5/16 x 25 — — — 638279 33308 4,700

3/8 x 12 638215 33859 5,400 — — —

3/8 x 14 638216 31888 5,400 638291 33860 6,600

3/8 x 16 638217 38217 5,400 638292 33488 6,600

3/8 x 18 638218 27442 5,400 638293 33489 6,600

3/8 x 20 638219 27443 5,400 638294 33490 6,600

3/8 x 25 638220 27444 5,400 — — 6,600

1/2 x 18 — — — — — —

1/2 x 20 — — — — — —

Sizes not coded can be furnished upon request.All can be furnished bulk or bagged upon request.

CM binder chain assembliesUsed by truckers, contractors, oil field crews, highway crews and farmers.

Eye grabhook

Clevisgrab hook



278

279


280

281

282

INDEX- A -

Air Balancer 120 - 121Aircraft Cable 44Anchor Shackles 241 - 246Articulating Jib Crane 205Assemblies:

Chain 74 - 100Nylon 7 - 17Wire Rope 33 - 36, 45 - 46

- B -

Beam Clamps 256 - 257Binders:

Binder Chains 277Binder Straps 274 - 276Load Binders 279

Blocks:Crane 66 - 68Snatch 65

Bolt Type Shackles 21Braided Wire Rope Slings 35 - 36Bridge Cranes 128 - 136, 176, 197 - 199Bridge Crane Electrification 216 - 219

- C -

Cable Assemblies 33 - 36, 45 - 46Cable Laid Wire Rope Slings 35Cable Lubricant 38Care, Use & Inspection:

Alloy Chain Slings 72 - 74, 90 - 91, 97Synthetic Web Slings 2 - 6Wire Rope Slings 29 - 32Wire Rope, Running 37 - 38

Cargo Restraint Systems 274 - 279Carts 119Chain:

Alloy:Grade 63 99Grade 80 74 - 76Grade 100 92 - 93Grade 120 97

High Test 98Proof Coil 98Transport 98Stainless Steel 98

Chain Hoists & Pullers 138 - 185Chain Lubricant 38Chain Mesh Slings 100Chain Shackles 241 - 243Chain Slings:

Grade 80 Alloy 74 - 76Grade 100 Alloy 92 - 93Grade 120 Alloy 97

Choker Hooks 20, 57, 60, 81

Clamps:Beam/Girder 256 - 257Plate Lifting 249 - 255

Clips, Wire Rope 51 - 52Coil Lifters 110 - 112Coil Upender 114Connecting Links 20, 22 - 23, 80 - 81, 95, 97Cordage 280 - 281Core Lifter 118Coupling Links:

Alloy Chain 20, 80 - 81, 95, 97Web/Round Sling 20, 22 - 23

Cranes:Bridge 128 - 136, 176, 197 - 199Davit 223Enclosed Track 128 - 136Floor, Portable 126, 223Gantry 206 - 215Jib 126, 200 - 205

Crane Blocks 66 - 68Crane Scale 220 - 222Crane Tractor 173Cumalongs 143 - 148, 174, 177

- D -

Davit Cranes 223Dynamometer (Crane Scale) 220 - 221

- E -

Enclosed Track 128 - 136End Trucks 176, 199Ergonomic Lifting Devices 117 - 136Excavator Hooks 234Eye Bolts 233

- F -

Fall Restraint 270 - 273Festooning 216Fist Grip Wire Rope Clips 52Forklift Work Platforms 273

- G -

Galvanized Air Craft Cable 44Gantry Cranes 206 - 215Grab Hooks 82 - 84, 95, 97

- H -

Hammerlok Coupling Link 80, 95Headache Balls 62Hoists & Accessories:

Air Manipulator 123

283

Balancer, Air 120 - 121Chain, Air 162 - 167, 175 - 176,

178 - 181, 185Chain, Electric 149 - 161, 174 - 175,

182 - 184Chain, Hand 138 - 142, 174Chain, Lever 143 - 148, 174, 177Dynamometer (Scale) 220 - 221Electrification 216 - 219Hooks 187 - 190Load Limiter 222Load Point Control 123, 182Remote Controls 216 - 219Trolleys 155, 157, 168 - 172,

174 - 175Turnover 124Wire Rope, Air 185Wire Rope, Electric 149, 176, 186

Hoist Rings 230 - 232Hooks:

Barrel 19Choker 20, 57, 60, 81Coil 110 - 112Grab 82 - 84, 95, 97Excavator, Weld-on 234Hoist 187 - 190Flat 275Foundry 88J-Hook 106Latch Kit 87, 96, 192 - 195Plate 87, 109S-Hook 107Safety 86Shank 188 - 190Shortening 84Sliding Choker:

Chain 81Synthetic Web 20Wire Rope 57, 60

Sling (Slip):Chain 85 - 86, 96 - 97Rigging 58 - 59Synthetic Web 19

Snap 60, 275 - 276Sorting 60Stirrup 108Swivel 62 - 64, 187, 190 - 191

- J -

J-Hooks 106Jib Cranes 126, 200 - 205

- L -

Lanyards 270 - 271Latch Kits 87, 96, 192 - 195Lift Beam 105Lift Table 119Load Arrestors 122

Load Binders 274 - 279Load Positioning/Rotating Beam 125Lubricant - Wire Rope & Chain 38

- M -

Magnets, Lifting:Permanent 259 - 262Powered 263 - 265

Manbaskets 272 - 273Manila Rope 280 - 281Manipulator 117 - 118, 122Master Links 77 - 79, 94, 97

- N -

Nylon Rope 280 - 281Nylon Web Slings 7 - 18

- O -

Oblong Master Links 77, 79, 94, 97Overhaul Balls 62Overhead Crane 176, 197 - 199

- P -

Pac-Flex Alloy Chain Mesh Sling 100Pallet Lifter 113Pendant, Hoist 216 - 219Plate Clamps 249 - 255Plate Hooks 87, 109Polyester Roundslings 24 - 26Polyester Web Slings 7 - 18Polypropylene Rope 280 - 281Positioning Equipment 117 - 125Pullers (Cumalongs) 143 - 148, 174, 177

- R -

Ratchet Lever Hoists 143 - 148, 174, 177Ratchet Tie Downs 274 - 276Rope, Manila & Synthetic 280 - 281Roundslings:

Polyester 24 - 26Twinpath 27

- S -

S-Hooks 107Scale, Crane 220 - 222Shackles:

Alloy Type 246Bolt Type 21, 243 - 244, 246Long Reach 247Round Pin 23, 241, 244Screw Pin 21 - 22, 242, 244, 246 - 247Web Sling 21 - 23Wide Body 245

284

Shank Hooks 188 - 190Sheaves 66, 69 - 70Sheet Lifter 115Shortening Hook 84Sling:

Chain, Alloy 74 - 76, 92 - 93, 97, 99Chain Mesh 100Flat Web, Nylon & Polyester 7 - 18Roundsling 24 - 27Transformer 280Wire Mesh 101Wire Rope 33 - 36

Snatch Blocks 65Sockets, Wire Rope 45Sorting Hooks 60Spreader Beams 104Stirrup Hooks 108Swaged Fittings 45 - 46Swivel Hoist Rings 230 - 232Swivel Hooks 62 - 64, 187, 190 - 191Swivels 63 - 64, 89Synthetic Rope 280 - 281Synthetic Web Slings 7 - 18

- T -

Tea Cup Pipe Carrier 61Thimbles, Wire Rope 55 - 57Tie Down Straps 274 - 276Tilt Tables 119Tool Balancers 122 Tractor, Crane 173Training IIITrolleys, Hoist 155, 157, 168 - 172, 174 - 175Turnbuckles 234 - 239Twin Path Roundslings 27

- U -

Utility Cable 44

- V -

Vacuum Lifters 266 - 268

- W -

Wear Pads 18Web Sling Hooks 19 - 20Web Sling Chain Connector 20Web Sling Connector 20, 22Web Sling Shackle 21 - 23Web Sling Sliding Choker Hook 20Wedge Socket 53 - 54Winch Lines:

Synthetic Rope 280 - 281Wire Rope 45 - 46

Winches 223 - 226Wire Mesh Slings 101

Wire Rope:Standard 39 - 41Rotation Resistant 41 - 42Premium Value 41, 43

Wire Rope Assemblies 33 - 36, 45 - 46Wire Rope Clips 51 - 52Wire Rope Fittings:

Field Installed 47 - 50Swaged 45 - 46

Wire Rope Lubricant 38Wire Rope Sheaves 66, 69 - 70Wire Rope Swivels 63 - 64Wire Rope Slings 33 - 36Wire Rope Thimbles 55 - 57

CARGO RESTRAINTS(Synthetic, Chain)Columbus McKinnon Corp. (CM)Crosby Group (Lebus)Kinedyne

CHAIN & FITTINGS(Alloy, Welded, Misc.)ACCO ChainCampbell/Cooper ToolsColumbus McKinnon Corp. (CM)Crosby GroupGunnebo-Johnson Corp.Peerless Chain Co.Pewag, Inc.Thiele

CLAMPS(Plate, Beam, Pipe)General Clamp IndustriesCrosby IPJC Renfroe & Sons, Inc.MerrillSafety Clamps, Inc.

CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT(Blocks, Sheaves, Swivels)Crosby GroupGeneral Clamp IndustriesGunnebo-Johnson Corp.Miller Products, Inc.Skookum/Rope Master

CRANE SYSTEMS(Overhead, Jib, Gantry, Crane Hooks)Abell-Howe Co.Columbus McKinnon Corp. (CM)Crosby GroupDemagHarrington Hoists, Inc.Spanco, Inc.UESCO

ERGONOMIC EQUIPMENT(Positioners, Lifters, Air Balancers, Lift Tables)Caldwell GroupColumbus McKinnon Corp. (CM)GCIPosi-TechVestil Manufacturing Corp.

HOISTS & ACCESSORIES(Air, Electric, Hand, Pullers)Cattron, Inc.Chester HoistsCoffing HoistsColumbus McKinnon Corp. (CM)DemagDuct-O-Wire Co.Electromotive SystemsGriphoist, Inc.Harrington Hoists, Inc.Insul 8OZ Lifting ProductsWilliams Wireless

HOIST RINGS(Safety Swivel, Forged Bail)Actek Manufacturing and Engineering, Inc.American Drill Bushing Co.Crosby GroupJergens, Inc.

LIFTERS(Coil, Magnet, Vacuum)Anver Corp.Caldwell GroupIndustrial Magnetics, Inc.Letellier M.H.E.O.S. Walker Co., Inc.Tecnomagnete, Inc.Vestil Manufacturing Corp.

RIGGING & HARDWARE(Hooks, Clips, Eye Bolts, Turnbuckles, Shackles)Campbell/Cooper ToolsChicago Hardware & Fixture Co.Columbus McKinnon Corp. (CM)Crosby GroupEsmet, Inc. (Electroline)Newco Mfg. Co., Inc.Skookum/Rope Master

SAFETY EQUIPMENT(Belts, Lanyards, Manbaskets)DBI/SalaLifting Technologies, Inc.

WINCHES(Hand, Electric, Barge)Griphoist, Inc.Thern, Inc.W.W. Patterson Co.

LAMCO SUPPLIERS

Date post:	10-Jan-2023
Category:	Documents
Upload:	khangminh22
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times

catalog.pdf - LAMCO Slings & Rigging, Inc

Documents